Home

XFaceMaker/UIMS Reference Manual

1. Figure 5 10 C File Selector The box has the following fields Class name Enter a name for the class here or click the Default Names button once you have specified the fm file name below Style Click here to choose the style used to generate the C files The default is NSL style Header File Suffix Specify the suffix for the file that contains the C definition of the class 67 The Editing Boxes C File to Save Enter the name for the C source file of the class or click the De fault Names button once you have specified the fm file Default Name Clicking here automatically builds the class name and the C file name from the name of the fm file Fm File to save for C class This field is for the name of the fm file to save It is the XFaceMaker model of the C class This is the file you will load in XFace Maker if you want to edit the class definition OK Generates the code for the specified class then closes the box Cancel Closes the box without making any changes 68 The Environment Box 5 7 The Environment Box XBMLANGPATH XBMLANGPATH FMFILEPATH PATH fausr include X11 bitmaps 2B gigal NewNs Product sunos lib xfm bitn FMLIBDIR giga2 NslProduct sunos lib xfm bitmaps FMEDITOR LB bitmaps 3B FMEDITORTIMEOUT gigal NewNslProduct sunos bitmaps 2B XFM_WINDOWS_MSVC_VERSION gigal NewNs1lProduct sunos 1ib X11 bitn 7 XFM_WINDOWS_CLIENT_SERVER_MODE Other H
2. 205 Table 12 1 Application only Functions C name Fm Fm_c B oO FmLoadCreateGroup FmLoadCreateManaged FmLoadCreateManagedGroup FmLoadGroup FmLoadWidgetClass FmLoop FmNewPredefined Variable FmNewType FmNewTypeDef FmRead Value FmRegisterStructures FmSetCloseHandler FmSetFunctionPrototype FmSetSuperclassInfos FmSetToplevel Ml mK mM mK mL mK KL OL KL LT OK ml mK mM mK KL mK KT KL KL LT aa a FmSetToplevelC FmSetToplevell gt x lt gt lt FmWriteValue 206 12 2 The FACE Functions Table The FACE Functions table lists the functions that are intended to be called from FACE scripts although they can also be called directly from the application in their C name form which can be a function name or an operator Each entry includes the following information from left to right FACE name is the name used in FACE scripts C name is the name that is generated in a C interface file or that you can call directly from your application Class is the module to which the function belongs libraries are libraries which contain the function indicated by an x The libraries are the following Xm Xt the standard i e non NSL libraries including the C library and the OSF Motif libXm a and libXt a Only those functions for which type checking is done are listed here Refer
3. Add Delete Select Figure 5 11 The Environment Box Variable Name pulldown menu Contains a number of useful environment variables Select an existing variable or select Other and type the variable name in the text field on the right you may have to enlarge the box to display the variable name textField If the variable is a path the elements of the path are displayed in the scrolled list below the menu Add Adds the value typed in the text field to the selected path variable after the se lected line Delete Deletes the selected line from the path Select Pops up a file selector and puts the result in the text field OK Stores the currently displayed value for the selected variable and closes the En vironment box Apply Stores the value without closing the box Close Closes the box without modifying the variable 69 The Editing Boxes 5 8 The FACE Debugger This section describes the FACE Debugger window This window enables you to trace the execution of FACE scripts execute instructions step by step print the stack of script and function calls set named breakpoints interrupt and abort execution of scripts execute FACE statements to print variables etc Status Running W Debug on M Step by step M Trace Widget BB Script create proc Script Source self RC TF value itoa cftoi self xnslMeter0 value function None setlim Widget wvumeter Float lim Int
4. 409 C Name FACE Name XmRepTypeValidValue XmRepTypeValidValue XmResolveA IPartOffsets XmResolveA IPartOffsets XmResolvePartOffsets XmResolvePartOffsets XmScaleGetValue XmScaleGetValue XmScaleSetValue XmScaleSetValue XmScrollBarGetValues XmScrollBarGetValues XmScrollBarSetValues XmScrollBarSetValues XmScroll Visible XmScroll Visible XmScrolledWindowSetAreas XmSelectionBoxGetChild XmSetColorCalculation XmSetFontUnit XmSetFontUnits XmSetMenuCursor XmSetProtocolHooks XmStringBaseline XmStringByteCompare XmStringCompare XmStringConcat XmStringCopy XmStringCreate XmStringCreateFontList XmStringCreateLocalized XmStringCreateLtoR XmStringCreateSimple XmStringDirectionCreate XmStringEmpty XmStringExtent XmStringFree XmStringFreeContext XmStringGetLtoR XmStringGetNextComponent XmScrolledWindowSetAreas XmSelectionBoxGetChild XmSetColorCalculation XmSetFontUnit XmSetFontUnits XmSetMenuCursor XmSetProtocolHooks XmStringBaseline XmStringByteCompare XmStringCompare XmStringConcat XmStringCopy XmStringCreate XmStringCreateFontList XmStringCreateLocalized XmStringCreateLtoR XmStringCreateSimple XmStringDirectionCreate XmStringEmpty XmStringExtent XmStringFree XmStringFreeContext XmStringGetLtoR XmStringGetNextComponent 410 C Name FACE Name XmStringGetNextSegment XmStringHasSubstring XmStringHeight XmStringInitContext XmStringLength XmStringLineCount XmStringLtoRCreate Xm
5. AcceptFocus ChangeManaged ClassInitialize DeleteChild Destroy DisplayAccelerator Expose GeometryManager Initialize InsertChild QueryGeometry Realize Resize SetValuesA lmost This is explained further in Section 11 2 e If there is already a superclass resource with the same name as the active value then the resource is not redefined but the Set and Get scripts will still be called by the SetValues and GetValuesHook methods as explained in Sections 11 2 4 and 11 2 5 This can be used to define additional side effects for an existing re source of the superclass The type of a new resource can be specified in the type field of the Active Values editing box The resource type is a FACE type To define a new resource type you can declare it in the Set script using the type keyword Remember that the type of your new resource will be used for converting strings to values suitable for the resource Here is what you will have to do depending on the type of your new resource Ifthe new resource can be represented by an existing Xt or Motif type you must use the representation type string corresponding to the existing type For exam 189 New Widget Classes ple if your resource is an integer value you must give the type Int which is pre defined by Xt and for which a String to Int converter exists In this case you don t have to do anything else Ifthe new resource is enumerated i e can
6. SEE ALSO FmEditLoop 242 C NAME FACE NAME FmCallValue FmCallValue SYNOPSIS XtArgVal FmCallValue Widget widget char ayname int count DESCRIPTION Activate the set script of a per call active value This function stores its count last arguments in a structure starting at field 1 and calls the set script of the specified active value with the address of the structure passed as the argu ment for an immediate active value and as otherwise The function returns the first field of the structure which is initialized to 0 Calling this function is similar to executing an instruction of the form lt widget gt lt name gt in a FACE script widget is the widget in which the active value whose set script is to be acti vated has been defined avname is the name of the active value whose set script is to be executed count is the number of arguments passed in the arguments following Storage for the arguments is allocated at the time of the call and freed upon com pletion SCOPE Application FACE scripts EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmWriteValue FmReadValue 243 C NAME FACE NAME FmCatClose none SYNOPSIS int FmCatClose nl catd i DESCRIPTION Close the catalog identified by the catalog descriptor i A value of 1 means close all catalogs SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmCatOpen 244 C NAME FACE NAME FmCatFind none SYNOPSIS nl_catd FmCatFind char name DESCRIP
7. recursive pattern lt pattern name gt lt expression gt Recursive patterns are a special kind of sub patterns This command can occur only inside the definition of the named pattern The effect is as if the whole def inition of the named pattern were included in place of the recursive pattern command A conditional expression is allowed but only in the second form 179 The Genappli Utility call pattern lt name gt lt condition gt Call a pattern defined with the instruction define pattern The effect is like begin pattern end pattern but the pattern called can be defined elsewhere call define lt name gt Call a pattern but use the same values as for the enclosing pattern call command lt cmd gt lt arg gt Execute a Shell command from genappli call include lt file gt Include a pattern file in another pattern file The included file should contain pattern lines and no user code code copied directly without processing set local lt variable gt lt expression gt Set a local variable The value variable is added to the current object just as if it had been defined in the gen file expression can be a succession of words the words will be substituted as in a standard code line then the substituted values will be placed in a list associated to the vari able e an expression within the expressio
8. Note if the intent is to show a DialogShell w should refer to the Dia logShell s child not to the shell itself because of the way Motif handles Dia logShells SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Show a transientShell which is the shell ancestor of self Show toplevel SEE ALSO FmHideWidget 336 C NAME FACE NAME FmStartCursorDrag FmStartCursorDrag SYNOPSIS Widget FmStartCursorDrag Widget widget XEvent event String targets Pixmap pixmap Pixmap mask DESCRIPTION FmStartCursorDrag is like FmStartSimpleDrag with the additional argument mask that specifies a mask bitmap to use with the cursor pixmap SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmStartSimpleDrag 337 C NAME FACE NAME FmStartSimpleDrag FmStartSimpleDrag SYNOPSIS Widget FmStartSimpleDrag Widget w XEvent event String targets Pixmap pixmap DESCRIPTION Start a drag operation w argument specifies the drag source It is generally the widget in which the user has pressed mouse button two event is a pointer to the X event generated by the user s action this must be a button event targets is a character string which contains the name s of the target s that the widget can provide If several targets are specified they must be sep arated by commas pixmap specifies the Pixmap which will be displayed during the drag opera tion by the drag icon If pixmap is null a default pixmap provided by Mo tif i
9. 110 The Resource Edit Boxes 5 17 11 The String Box The String box is used to enter text for a resource It is popped up when you select a resource of type String or XmString XFaceMaker Current Widget Resources Parent AS BB Name PE Class imPushButtor Templates f W Current selection Resource labelString Custom Editor click here ta change the values of the BarGraph ok Rebuild Set Values Set Cancel GLS Heip Figure 5 38 The String Editor The String box has the following fields A text input field Used to enter a text string for the widget resource Custom Editor Calls the editor if any you specified with the FMEDITOR environ ment variable OK Applies the specified value to the resource and returns to the main Resource win dow Rebuild Applies the value by rebuilding and remains in the editor Set Values Applies the change by setting values remains in the editor Set Updates the value in the Resources list but does not apply it Cancel Returns to the main Resource window with no value change GLS Marks the string as an internationalized string and gives it the default set num ber If no message number was specified the message will be given a number when the messages are saved 111 The Editing Boxes 5 17 12 The Translations Box The Translations box is used to select and create elements for the translation table of the currently selected widg
10. 2 0 ccc eenees 131 6 6 9 X Properties teer dete Siac yh SS ERR A OR 133 6 6 10 Widget Active Values 0 ec eeeeenee 133 6 7 Type Casters sisi gustav nee ira wikicd san oe a pla tay woe eo age aces Bd ee ease 134 6 7 1 Declaring New Type Casters 1 0 2 0 0000 cece eee eee 135 6 7 2 Declaring Enumerated Resource Types 00 005 135 6 7 3 Explicit Type Conversion 0000 cece eee eee es 135 6 83 Statements oe an hhh edd fond et tote A eal ed felt 137 vi 6 8 1 Assignments ooe csere iea e i i E E ia E EEEE 137 6 8 2 Control SHUCHITESs eseo nustate posan apa eoa i eoh 138 6 8 3 Function calls sh n cece teen eens 139 6 8 4 Named Scripts cee si seg cece E CEEE E A dna g sparta wena N 139 6 9 FACE Functions sro ice seeding chines it gel alent 141 6 9 1 Scope of Variables in FACE Functions 5 142 6 9 2 Declaration of Application Functions 2 0005 143 6 10 Floating Point Variables 0 0 2 144 6 11 Using Arrays in FACE 20 0 0 eee eee 146 6 11 1 Declaring Arrays 0 0 eects 146 6 11 2 Allocating Arrays 0 eects 148 6 11 3 Accessing Array Elements 00000 c eee eee eee 149 6 11 4 Iterating Through Arrays 0 2 0 0 0 0 c eee 150 6 11 5 Getting the Size of an Array 11 kee eee eee 150 6 11 6 Getting the Address of an Array 1 0 2 eee eee eee 151 6 11 7 Clearing an Array 0 ccc tees 151 6 12 St
11. 23 Another possibility is to incorporate application functions into XFaceMaker using the functions FmAttachFunction and FmCallEditor to build a new XFaceMaker To test application functions in interpreted mode you should in your main program attach the function using the application function FmAttachFunction If in your in terface you have declared your application functions using the function keyword and you are executing your application in interpreted mode any warning messages that would normally be generated if the functions are not attached are suppressed 7 8 Generating C Code in XFaceMaker XFaceMaker generates function calls for all operations on arrays These functions are contained in the libFm_c a library which must be linked with the application if arrays are used They are private and should not be used directly from the C code of an application When FACE scripts are saved in C code a FACE statement return x is translated into a C statement return x whereas return is translated into return If return is called outside a FACE function it should always be called without argu ments because the C functions corresponding to toplevel scripts are declared as void in the C files generated by XFaceMaker Inside of functions however return state ments should always be called with one argument even if the function is declared as returning None because FACE functions are translated as C functions returning an i
12. lt avname gt fetches the address attached to the specified active value and associated with the specified widget possibly allocating a memory location of size sizeof XtArgVal if the active value is automatic calls the get script of the active value with the address passed as the argument and returns the con tents of the address The type of the result is the type of the active value If the active value does not exist or if it is immediate or if it is not attached and it is not automatic a FACE error occurs v lt widget gt lt avname gt fetches the address attached to the specified active value and associated with the specified widget calls the get script of the active value with the address passed as the argument and returns the address The type of the result is the type of the active value if it is immediate or Pointer otherwise If the active value does not exist a FACE error occurs lt widget gt lt avname gt v fetches the address attached to the specified active value and associated with the specified widget possibly allocating a memory location of size sizeof XtArgVal if the active value is automatic converts v to the type of the active value if v is of type String stores v as the contents of the active value address and calls the set script of the active value with the address passed as the argument If the active value does not exist or if it is immediate or if it is not attached and it is not automatic
13. sprintf buf Label0_ d iter iter iter 1 w XtNameToWidget root buf Raise Widget w if iter lt 9 CallCallbacksTimeOut self activateCallback 2000 else iter 0 SEE ALSO 240 FmStopTimeOut FmGetActiveValueTimeOut FmSetActiveValueTimeOut 241 C NAME FACE NAME FmCallEditor CallEditor SYNOPSIS None FmCallEditor DESCRIPTION Call the XFaceMaker editor from an interpreted interface If the application uses FmEditLoop as the main events handling function the CallEditor func tion is also activated by typing lt Shift Control Escape gt while the pointer is in one of the windows of the interface However lt Shift Control Escape gt does not work in a window which was popped by PopupAndWait This function can also be called from an application as FmCallEditor to pro duce a customized version of XFaceMaker Any application or interface which calls this function must be linked with the library libFm_e This library is protected and the resulting executable will expect the token server to be running SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Application program to create a new XFaceMaker which includes the func tion strncpy include lt Fm h gt extern char strncpy main argc argv int argc char argv Widget toplevel toplevel FmlInitiaize myxfm Xfm NULL 0 amp arge argv FmAttachFunction strncpy strncpy String 3 String String Int FmCallEditor
14. CHAPTER 8 Memory Management This chapter describes how XFaceMaker handles memory allocation when interpret ing scripts and how it handles the setting or fetching of resources During script execution XFaceMaker does not implicitly copy buffers nor does it create memory buffers with malloc but Motif does The programmer is responsible for freeing memory in scripts Therefore it is important to know which resources when accessed provide their direct contents or a copy thereof If they provide a copy the corresponding buffer should be freed when no longer needed in order to keep memory usage within reasonable limits while running an application 8 1 Accessing Resources When the current status of a resource is required XFaceMaker calls XtGetValues and stores the result in a word All FACE variables have the same size that of a word In certain cases the Motif Toolkit allocates memory for values returned by Xt GetValues Normally values returned by XtGetValues are never freed but in the fol lowing cases you should free the values returned e when you retrieve the value of a compound string such as labelString It should be freed with StringFree in FACE or XmStringFree in the application e when you retrieve the value of the XmText or TextField value resource which is of type String and not XmString you should use free For example in a line such as buffer XmText value a pointer to a copy of the widget s contents is r
15. Xevent event int value int pixel To print the scrollbar value you could have the following script XmScrollBarCallbacks cbs printf new value d n cbs gt value creation scripts In a creation script the value of is 0 and the use of is forbidden active value Set and Get scripts In active value Set and Get scripts is the value and is the address of the active value in the widget whose active value script is being parsed the current widget translation eval scripts In a translation eval script is a pointer to the Xevent which triggered the execution of the script The structure elements can be accessed us ing regular structure addressing For example in a translation eval script associated to a ButtonPress event to print which button was pressed you could have the following script XButtonEvent xev xev printf button d pressed n xev gt button the application In scripts launched using the function FaceEvalString is the ad dress of the param argument is the content of that address startup script In startup scripts the use of and is forbidden These two special variables are reserved for internal use 156 Active Value Variables widget class creation In scripts associated to widget class methods is a pointer to a structure in which the parameters passed by the X Toolkit are passed on to the script There is a different structure for each method The Class Method A
16. 2 0 0c cee cece eens 167 9 1 Conversion and Transfer Structures s s 00 00 cece eee eee 170 9 2 XEVent Structures 2 6 es ee eo e ee Nea ERS eee aS 172 10 1 Description File Syntax 0 eee ee eee 175 10 2 Pattern Files iecerei ie eb ea ead fo eae ead de Ee ee 176 10 2 1 Pattern File Objects 0 0 cece eee ee teens 181 10 3 Genappli Options 0 0 cece teens 183 10 4 Genappli Error Messages 20 0 0 ccc eee teenies 185 11 1 Widget Class Resources 1 0 0 0 00 cece eee eens 188 11 1 1 Superclass Resources 0 00 188 11 1 2 Active Value Resources 0 2 0 000 cece ee eee ee 189 11 2 Widget Class Methods 0 cece cette ees 192 11 2 1 The Class Method Arguments 0 0 0 0 0e eee 193 11 2 2 The ClassInitialize Method 0 0 0 0 cee ee eee ee 194 11 2 3 The Initialize Method 0 0 cee eee 194 11 2 4 The SetValues Method 0 00 cece ee eee 195 11 2 5 The GetValuesHook Method 00 00 e eee eee 196 11 2 6 The Resize Method 0 0 00 cece cee 196 11 2 7 The Expose Method 0 0 00 cece eens 197 11 2 8 The Destroy Method 0 0 0c cee cee 197 11 2 9 The Realize Method 0 0 0 ccc 198 11 2 10 The SetValuesAlmost Method 00 00 0000 198 11 2 11 The AcceptFocus Method 00 00 cee eee 198 11 2 12 The QueryGeometry Method 00 0000 e eee 1
17. FmWidest FmWidest FACE x x x FreeArgList FmFreeArgList FACE x x x GetActiveValue FmGetActive Value FACE x x X GetActiveValueAddr FmGetActiveValueAddr FACE x x x GetActiveValueTimeOut FmGetActive ValueTimeOut FACE x x x GetString FmGetString FACE x x x GetVersionString FmGetVersionString FACE x x x Hide FmHideWidget FACE x x x Internationalize FmInternationalize FACE x x x IsManaged XtIsManaged Xt IsSensitive XtIsSensitive Xt ListGetNthItem FmListGetNthItem FACE x x x ListGetNthSelectedItem FmListGetNthSelectedItem FACE x x x ListSetItems FmListSetItems FACE x x X LowerWidget FmLowerWidget FACE x x x ManageChild XtManageChild Xt MapWidget XtMap Widget Xt MoveWidget XtMoveWidget Xt x NewArgList FmNewArgList FACE x x x NewString XtNewString Xt x Popdown XtPopdown Xt x Popup XtPopup Xt x Table 12 2 FACE Functions 209 FACE name C name Class Xm Xt Fm Fm_c Fm_e PopupAndWait FmPopupAnd Wait FACE x x x Quit exit C x Raise Widget FmRaise Widget FACE x x x RemoveGrab XtRemoveGrab Xt ResizeWidget XtResizeWidget Xt Return FmReturn FACE X x x SendClick FmSendClick FACE x x x SendMessage FmSendMessage FACE x x x SetActiveValue FmSetActiveValue FACE x x x SetActiveValueTimeOut FmSetActiveValueTimeOut FACE x x x SetKeyboardFocus XtSetKeyboardFocus Xt x SetSensitive XtSetSensitive Xt x SetValues Face
18. In addition pointers are passed as longs 6 8 4 Named Scripts The keyword script must always be followed by an identifying name and has two uses e to name scripts e to share scripts The name must begin with an alphabetic character The keyword script labels and executes a named script if one is defined immediately after a colon or executes the named script if no colon announcing a script defini tion follows i e it is followed by an end of statement semicolon The first time FACE encounters a script it caches the script using its name as an index Therefore two different scripts should never have the same name or the second one will not be executed 139 The FACE Language Eval scripts should be named systematically even if they are only used in one place to make use of this caching mechanism A named Eval script is parsed only the first time it is encountered whereas un named Eval scripts are parsed each time they are executed thus increasing memory allocation The second usage is to share a script For example if two buttons in an interface are to have the same help facility the first defines the script named help helpCallback script help root HelpBox dialogMessage help ret PopupAndWait root HelpBox while the second simply calls it causing it to be retrieved from the cache helpCallback script help The effect will be the same when either callback is called the values of self a
19. SEE ALSO FmAttachValue FmGetValue FmSetActiveValue 333 C NAME FACE NAME FmSetWidest FmSetWidest SYNOPSIS None FmSetWidest Widget n DESCRIPTION FmSetWidest sets the width of up to twelve widgets to that of the widest wid get If the list contains less than twelve widgets you must put a null widget Widget NULL after the last widget SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmSetTallest 334 C NAME FACE NAME FmShowPopup ShowPopup SYNOPSIS None FmShowPopup Pointer event Widget menu DESCRIPTION Pop up the menu popup menu The menu is popped so that its upper left cor ner is at the position indicated by the event This function is mostly used in a translation where the event is passed as the special variable XFaceMaker automatically defines such a translation on Button3 when a popup menu is created SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Translation defined in a bulletinBoard to open a popup menu XFaceMaker defines a different translation translations override lt ButtonPress gt Button3 eval ShowPopup self popup_PopupMenu0 PopupMenu0 SEE ALSO 335 C NAME FACE NAME FmShowWidget Show SYNOPSIS None FmShow Widget Widget w DESCRIPTION Display widget w on the screen If w is a Shell widget then Show realizes it and maps it If w is a Popup Shell then Show calls XtPopup on the shell with a grab_kind of GrabNone Otherwise Show simply manages the Widget
20. The Editing Boxes 5 17 2 The Colors Box Color Display The Colors box shown below as it would appear on a color display is used to select a color for the widget resource being edited It is popped up when color or pixel re sources for a widget are being edited xFaceMaker Current Widget Resources Parent AS Name BE Class XmBulletinBoard Templates 3 I current selection Resource background Figure 5 29 The Color Box color It has the following fields color palette Clicking on a color square selects the color to be used for the selected resource and its name appears in the text field The resource name is displayed above the color palette text input line Displays the name of the selected color or can be used to enter the name or pixel value directly OK Applies the specified value to the resource and returns to the main Resource win dow Rebuild Applies the changes by rebuilding the widget and remains in the editor 98 The Resource Edit Boxes Set Values Applies the changes by setting the values and remains in the editor Cancel Returns to the Resource window without changing the value Set Updates the value in the Resources list but does not apply it RGB Pops up the RGB color editing box 5 17 3 The Colors Box Monochrome Display The Colors box shown below as it would appear on a monochrome display is used to select a color for the widget resource being edited It is
21. The following characters act as delimiters as well as blanks tabs and newlines 1 SM R OH BTN lt 2 175 The Genappli Utility Symbols containing special characters must be quoted using matching sequences of any number of back quote and quote characters e g Hello An attribute value can be either a single string or a list enclosed in parentheses function Hello RETTYPE void NUMARGS 2 ARGNAMES indent msg ARGTYPES int char The convention is to use upper case characters for attribute names to make them more visible in pattern files but this is not mandatory Pattern descriptions can contain sub patterns which are defined using the special at tribute name children function Hello RETTYPE void NUMARGS 2genappli children argument indent TYPE int argument msg TYPE char Sub patterns can nest at any depth There may be more than one children attribute in which case the values of all children attributes are concatenated 10 2 Pattern Files Pattern files contain plain code that is copied to the output file and pattern defini tions Pattern definitions must be defined inside comments for the target language and are identified by special character sequences depending on the language For ex ample if the output file is a C source file pattern lines begin with and end with whereas if the output file is a Makefile pattern lines beg
22. XmDropProcCallback XmDropProcCallback XmDropSiteVisuals XmDropSiteVisuals 9 1 Conversion and Transfer Structures The drag source and drop site active value scripts for the exported and imported tar gets can and sometimes must access additional information about the data being transferred This information is passed to the active values scripts as the address of a structure The structure fields can be accessed in FACE using the n syntax They can also be accessed as FACE structure fields using the gt operator The argument of a drag source s active value for an exported target points to an FmConvertProcStruct typedef struct FmConvertProcStruct XtPointer value String type int length int format Widget drag_context String selection String target XtPointer client_data unsigned long max_length XtRequestlId request_id FmConvertProcStruct The fields of this structure are derived from the values passed to the convertProc of the drag context which is provided by XFaceMaker The Atoms are changed to strings and some return values are initialized to default values Refer to the X Tool kit Intrinsics manual section 11 5 2 1 for a complete description of selection con version procedure arguments 170 Conversion and Transfer Structures value is where the active value s get script must store the value to transmit to the drop site If the value is immediate i e it is an
23. XmGetPixmapByDepth XmGetPostedFrom Widget XmGetSecondaryResourceData XmGetTabGroup XmGetTearOffControl XmGetVisibility XmGetXmDisplay XmGetXmScreen XmImGetXIM XmImMbLookupString XmImRegister XmImSetFocus Values XmImSetValues XmImUnregister XmImUnsetFocus 407 C Name FACE Name XmImVaSetFocus Values XmImVaSetFocus Values XmImVaSetValues XmImVaSetValues XminstallImage Xminstallimage XmiInternAtom XmiInternAtom XmIsMotifWMRunning XmIsMotifWMRunning XmlsTraversable XmlsTraversable XmListAddItem XmListAddItem XmListAddItemUnselected XmListAddItemUnselected XmListAddItems XmListAddItems XmListAddItemsUnselected XmListAddItemsUnselected XmListDeleteAllItems XmListDeleteAllItems XmListDeleteltem XmListDeleteltem XmListDeleteltems XmListDeleteltems XmListDeleteltemsPos XmListDeleteltemsPos XmListDeletePos XmListDeletePos XmListDeletePositions XmListDeselectAllItems XmListDeselectItem XmListDeselectPos XmListGetKbdItemPos XmListGetMatchPos XmListGetSelectedPos XmListItemExists XmListItemPos XmListPosSelected XmListPosToBounds XmListReplaceltems XmListReplaceItemsPos XmListReplaceltemsPosUnselected XmListReplaceltemsUnselected XmListReplacePositions XmListSelectItem XmListDeletePositions XmListDeselectAllItems XmListDeselectItem XmListDeselectPos XmListGetKbdItemPos XmListGetMatchPos XmListGetSelectedPos XmListItemExists XmListItemPos XmListPosSelected XmListPosToBounds XmListReplaceltems XmLis
24. fim Directories Files Thermometer hermometer fm Thermometer le Class name Thermometer D Default Name Class file to load er widgets Thermometer Thermometer En ok Filter Cancel Help Figure 5 9 The Class Name Box The Class Name Box has the following fields Class name Enter a name for the class here or click on the ellipsis to pop up a list of current class names Default Name Clicking here assigns to the class the name given in the Class file to load field starting with an uppercase letter Class file to load Enter a class here or select it from the list in the Files field The class name must begin with an uppercase letter OK Registers selects the specified widget class then closes the box Cancel Closes the Class Name box without making any changes 66 C Class Name Box 5 6 C Class Name Box This box is an enhanced file selector which allows you to specify the name of the C class and the files in which its definition must be saved ae ee E r Jala Filter liz Cpp_Motif_Classes stop_watch_complete fm Directories ses stop watch complete ses stop_watch_complete StopWatch fm Style NSL Rogue Wave Header File Suffix C file to save Kontrol H Default Names Fm file to save for C class fontrolfm o o OK Filter cancel Help
25. lt lt gt gt and can be used with the same semantics as in C except for and which can be used to compare character strings as well as integers Arithmetic operators treat non numeric character strings as 0 In addition the following operators are available s1 s2 Ifs2 is a string if string s2 contains s1 returns the position 1 N of s1 within s2 Else returns 0 If s2 is a multiple element list test is s1 is a member of the list and returns its position s1 s2 s2 sl s i Ifs is a multiple element list returns string number i starting from 1 Else returns character number 1 s1 left s2 If s1 contains s2 returns the sub string to the left of s2 within s1 Else returns s1 s1 left i Returns the first i characters of s1 177 The Genappli Utility s1 right s2 If s1 contains s2 returns the sub string to the right of s2 within s1 Else returns an empty string s1 right i Returns the i last characters of s1 upper s converts string s to upper case lower s converts string s to lower case length s returns the length of string s cstring s returns string s with its special characters escaped so that it can be used in a C program defined s Returns ifs is a defined value or variable i e in an expression it would be substituted value s Explicitly substitutes value s Use this operator to obtain the values of vari ables whose name
26. not XtAppInitialize or XtInitialize unless you have generated the C code interface with the standalone option FmAppInitialize has the same arguments as XtAppInitialize and you should refer to the X documentation for a full explanation If your application does not need to use the application context returned you can pass 0 An application which uses FmAppInitialize can use FmLoop for its main loop The application context created by FmAppInitialize will be au tomatically used by the event loop The line top FmApplInitialize 0 Name NULL 0 amp argce argv NULL NULL 0 is sufficient for an application called name which does not need to parse the command line to recognize its own options to specify fallback resources nor to pass an argument list If you pass the class Xfm to FmAppInitialize it will be replaced by XfmApplication Otherwise the class name that you pass will be the class name of the application you are building 233 The FmAppInitialize function is also available in two versions FmAppInitializel is defined in the libFm_e and libFm libraries while FmAppInitializeC is defined in the libFm_c library The arguments and return values are the same as for FmAppInitialize SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmInitialize 234 C NAME FACE NAME FmAttachAv none SYNOPSIS int FmAttachAv char name XtPointer address DESCRIPTION FmAttachAv associates the application variable whose addre
27. or if v is a String which cannot be converted to the type of the active value or if v is not a String and the type of v is not compat ible with the type of the active value a FACE error occurs lt widget gt lt avname gt v changes the address attached to the specified active value and associated with the specified widget and calls the set script of the active val ue with the new address passed as the argument If the active value does not exist or if it is immediate and the type of v is not compatible with the type of the active value or if it is not immediate and the type of v is not compatible with the type Pointer a FACE error occurs 6 7 Type Casters Type casting functions are available in FACE They do not convert an object i e they do not change its value but they cast the object type to another type to satisfy FACE type checking requirements These functions return their argument which may be of any type in the appropriate type FACE type checking does not consider all resource types as distinct For example types Position Dimension Bool ean are all equivalent in FACE 134 Type Casters 6 7 1 Declaring New Type Casters New type casting functions can be declared using the keyword type followed by the variable type to which you want to be able to cast After such a declaration the new type casting function exists For example type NewType n NewType x 6 7 2 Declaring Enumerated Re
28. parent or for a gadget and its parent if you want the variables to be independent To define a property an assignment statement is required such as widget lt property_name gt self x where widget is the name of the realized widget for which you are defining a property property_name is the name of the property i e the name you will use to refer to that variable Note that the name is placed in lt angle brackets gt With such a statement you have defined a new variable name and its type the type of the property is the type of the resource or of the variable which is on the other side of the assignment statement For example you can write self lt area gt self height self width parent lt area gt parent height parent width to define two variables properties called area both of type Int both being the area of the associated widget If self is a gadget and not a widget however area is a single variable whose value is the area of parent after the second statement is executed 6 6 10 Widget Active Values In XfaceMaker an object can have active values attached to it Such active values can be referenced in FACE using the following constants lt widget gt lt avname gt and lt widget gt lt avname gt 133 The FACE Language These expressions can be used in the same manner as resource references but will read or write an active value associated with a given widget v lt widget gt
29. s attachments can be to its XmForm parent to another widget or to itself To view the attachments you specify select the Draw Attachments item in the View menu The display uses vectors originating from the selected widget edge and point ing to the reference widget s edge Attachment vectors for position mode are dis played as broken lines while attachment vectors for offset mode are drawn with solid lines Parent AS F Name PE Class imPushButtor Templates f W Current selection Resource left attachment Attach to form 9 self Y none Al Y position Y widget gt J opposite edge Ad Offset l M no offset Position l Y saage OOOO SSS WE Update Offsets E Draw Attachments Detach This Side Detach All Sides OK Rebuild Set Values Set Cancel Figure 5 7 The Attachments Box Widgets placed within a Form composite widget inherit a set of attachment resourc es The following resources define the attachment for each side of a widget topAttachment bottomAttachment leftAttachment rightAttachment The enumerations available are 57 The Editing Boxes attach_none do not attach current side attach_form attach current side to the same side of the Form widget attach_opposite_form attach current side to the opposite side of the Form widget attach_widget attach current side to the corresponding side as defined in Motif e g attach left side to
30. this toggle button activates the FACE debugger This button is automatically unset when the FACE debugger window is hidden Step by step This toggle button controls whether the FACE debugger stops before it executes each instruction or not In step by step mode you can only use the FACE debugger window and control the execution with the Step Abort and Continue buttons The rest of the XFaceMaker interface as well as your user in terface is locked Trace When this button is set the FACE debugger traces the execution of all instruc tions by showing the source of the corresponding script and by highlighting the current instruction If this button is not set the debugger only traces errors warn ings and breakpoints by showing the corresponding source and instruction and by entering step by step mode Note that the FACE debugger can trace the exe cution of all scripts not only widget callbacks in Try mode but also create call backs in Build mode or active value scripts for a user defined widget Script source and Debugger output These areas are read only If you want to modify a script you have to switch back to Build mode if necessary and edit the script in the usual XFaceMaker editing window Execution area You can enter instructions in the Execution area such as debug to print the values of variables resources etc The debug function is called exactly like printf but the output is directed to the debugger s
31. 137 basic objects 122 comments 120 constants 124 Eval 140 function calls 139 function declaration 143 function definition 141 include files 121 interpreter 119 keywords 120 object types 122 reserved names 129 special characters 120 special variables 126 statements 137 type casters 134 variables 125 FACE Debugger 30 70 FACE functions 139 141 FACE scripts 155 FaceConvertString 214 FaceEvalString 215 FacelInitTimer 216 FaceSetValues 217 FaceStopTimer 218 fast resource list 32 fastlist 378 fastResourceList 378 File Menu New 16 File menu 16 Change Directory 20 420 Design Process 19 Load Extensions 18 Messages 20 Open 16 Print 21 Read 16 Save 17 Save Appli Files 17 Save As 17 Save MS Windows Files 18 Save Prefs 20 Save Project As 17 Save Selected As 17 File Selector box 73 files fm_rdb 31 msg 381 ps 21 C Code 61 Fm 389 Fm fm 378 help 391 postscript 21 81 RDB 83 saving 17 selecting 73 structure 389 UIL 117 first 150 360 Float box 104 Fm file structure 389 Fm fm 378 Fm_c library 63 FmAddArg 219 FmAddBootFile 220 FmAddEnumeratedType 221 FmAddRepresentation 222 FmAddResourceType 224 FmAddWidgetClass 230 FmApplnitialize 233 FmAppInitializeC 233 234 FmAppInitializel 233 234 FmAttachA v 235 FmAttachFunction 236 FmAttachValue 238 fmavprt 390 FmBeep 239 fmbootfile 378 fmbootfile 378 FmCall 339 FmCallCallbacksTimeOut 240 FmCal
32. 296 FmListSetItems 297 FmLoad 298 FmLoadCreate 300 FmLoadCreateGroup 302 FmLoadCreateManaged 303 FmLoadCreateManaged Group 304 FmLoadGroup 305 FmLoadWidgetClass 306 FmLoop 307 FmLowerWidget 308 FmNewArgList 309 FmNewPredefinedVariable 310 422 FmNewType 311 FmNewTypeDef 312 FmNotEqualString 313 FMPIXMAPSPATH 277 387 FmPopupAndWait 314 FmRaiseWidget 315 FmReadValue 316 FmRegisterSimpleDropSite 317 FmRegisterStructures 318 fmresources 378 FmReturn 320 FmSendClick 321 FmSendMessage 322 FmSetActiveValue 323 FmSetActiveValueTimeOut 324 FmSetCloseHandler 325 381 FmSetFunctionPrototype 326 FmSetSuperclassInfos 327 FmSetTallest 329 FmSetToplevel 330 FmSetToplevelC 331 FmSetToplevell 332 FmSetValue 333 FmSetWidest 334 FmShowPopup 335 FmShowWidget 336 FmStartCursorDrag 337 FmStartSimpleDrag 338 FmStopTimeOut 339 FmTransferProc 172 FmWait 340 FmWaitForReturn 341 FmWarpPointer 342 FmWidest 343 FmWidgetName 344 FmWriteValue 345 fonts 105 Fonts box 105 for 138 ftoi 272 function keyword 141 143 function calls 137 143 functions application 143 global 143 161 G gadgetize widgets 23 gadgets 389 changing widgets to 87 properties 133 genappli 384 genappli command line options 183 error messages 185 pattern files 176 target language 176 generate main file 18 generateAppliFiles 384 generating C code 161 Geomet
33. 91 restricted 96 searching in list 88 selecting 88 setting values 91 sorting the list 96 string 111 Resources box 85 Restart on FACE Errors 32 restarting Design process 12 19 restore 13 383 restore 383 Restore state 12 return keyword 141 Return 320 revision 377 revision 377 RGB box 101 115 root keyword 129 Save 17 Save Appli Files 17 All 17 Custom 18 Functions 18 Include 18 Main 18 Makefile 18 New XFM 18 427 Save As 17 Save MS Windows Files 18 Save Prefs 20 Save Project As 17 Save Selected As 17 saving files 17 application files 17 as projects 17 C Code 61 saving message files 20 script 139 script keyword 139 scripts creation 155 errors in 71 Eval 114 get scripts 155 named 139 166 set scripts 155 setting breakpoints 71 shared 139 self 215 self keyword 129 send_click 321 SendClick 321 SendMessage 322 separator 78 server 383 server 383 serverHost 383 serverhost 383 servername 383 Set Values 91 SetActiveValue 323 428 SetActive ValueTimeOut 324 SetValues method 195 SetValues 217 SetValuesAlmost method 198 shell 380 Shell widgetstore 42 Shift click 4 Show 336 ShowPopup 335 shrink icon 36 silentmode 381 silentmode 381 size 150 368 socketFile 383 socketfile 383 socketPort 383 socketport 383 sprintf 369 sscanf 370 Standalone C 63 standc 381 standc 381 startup 381 startup 381 startup file 155 startupClasses 377 statements 137
34. Current selection ea E Auto position x 3 y 3 O Popup W Auto size w 48 h 17 C Gadget Resource List lt Search f Callbacks XnLabel fat accelerator d I acceleratorText d alignment d alignment_beginning i fontList S adobe courier medium r 12 labelInsensitivePixnap labelPixnap labelString S minLin labelType d string marginBottom d 0 marginHeight d 2 Close Rebuild Set Values Edit Sort Undo Help Figure 5 23 The Fast Resource List ttomShadowPixmap C bottomShadowPixnap foreground 3 white foreground T white helpCallback FnSho helpCallback 5 FmShowid highlightColor Y red highlightColor R red highlightOnEnter 7 true highlightQmEnter d true highlightPixmap scale highlightPianap S scales highlight Thickness 7 0 highlightThickness d 0 navigationType 7 none navigationType d none shadowThickness 7 0 shadowThickness d 0 topShadow Color C topShadowColor Figure 5 24 The Fast List Letters The figure above shows the letter icon correspondence 90 The Resources Box 5 16 4 The Apply Options Once you have specified new resource values for the widget you are editing apply them to the widget by clicking Rebuild or Set Values The default options are e all resources re creating widgets e self To override the default options for this apply set new values in the Apply Options box and click OK Open
35. Design process manually from a shell or by any other external means Don t forget to set the client option when launching the Design process Exit XFM Selecting this button exits XFaceMaker 115 The Editing Boxes 5 19 The Template Box The Template Mode box is used to specify the mode and or a name for a template It is popped up when you edit a template using the commands in the Modules menu or when you apply a template XFace aker File Selector aja Filter fhot eliz User gems templates fm Directories E m gt Template name ArnColog Template mode Use values as default Q Force resource values Default Name Template file to save eliz User gems templates ArmColor fn Figure 5 42 The Template Box The Template Mode box has the following fields Use resource values as default Resources take the default value specified in the template but can be changed Override force resource values Resources are set to the value specified in the template and cannot be changed Default Name Clicking here gives the template file name to he template starting with an uppercase letter OK Registers the mode for the selected template and closes the box Cancel Closes the Template Mode box without making any changes 116 UIL Options 5 20 UIL Options The UIL Options box is used to set the options for saving a UIL file All options have an equivalent com
36. Filotti J r me Maloberti Sara Sautin Eric Touchard Philippe Volle Many thanks to all of them and to several others Table of Contents Table of Contents iii List of Tables ix List of Figures xi 1 1 What You Need to Run XFaceMaker 0 00 cece eens 2 1 2 Keyboard Conventions scese nae e a tee eens 3 1 3 Typesetting Conventions 0 0 0 e cee eee eens 3 1 4 Using the Mouse siei eee aw ceed eee ad ee eae ea Peete 4 1 5 Organization of This Manual 0 2 0 0 eee eee eee 4 2 1 Recommended Actions 00 cece cee tee nee ences 7 2 2 Before Contacting Technical Support 0 0 0 e eee ee eee 8 2 3 NSL Technical Support 0 0 ccc eee 9 2 4 Further Help snye hoe Maa aac E E epee gee ee 9 Bul Biror Protech Ons sarin dh ayn ae das AB Pee L wees Mes 12 3 1 1 Restarting the Design Process 0 0c cee eee eee 12 3 1 2 Restoring the Design Process State 2 0 0 eee eee ee 13 3 1 3 Launching a New Design Process 00 00 secur eeee 14 4 1 The XFaceMaker Menus 00 e cece eee enn e nee 16 Alls The File Meni sg uc 22 uae he eke va deal thew elena 16 4 1 2 The Edit Ment ciie ocd yc SEA Rea te Ree Ras 22 41 3 The View Ment deos a enh atearen ots a lenih seas 25 4 1 4 The Modules Menu 0 0c eee eee cee eee nee 21 4 1 5 The Windows Menu 0 c eee eee nee 29 4 1 6 The Options Menu 0 eee
37. L Immediate Use instead of Get Script Custom Editor Clear Eo Active Value Name Set Script Custom Editor Gear Add Repiace Delete a F E Figure 5 1 Interface Active Values Active Value Name Used to enter a name to identify the active value The name must begin with an alphabetic character Type Used to enter the FACE type of the active value variable If no type is specified the type is Any The ellipsis pops up a type selection box The size of an active value is the size of an XtArgVal Value If storage is per widget and allocated automatically by XFaceMaker you may enter an initial value for the active value here Storage Used to specify data storage and how it is allocated m global if the entire interface may always use the same data m per widget if you want separate storage locations for each widget in the inter face that uses the active value m per call if you want XFacemaker to allocate storage each time it calls the ac tive value s set script and then de allocate it after the script is executed 47 The Editing Boxes Allocate automatically when set XFaceMaker will allocate storage for the active value unless the application has already allocated storage i e the active value has already been attached to an application variable With automatic allocation you can test your active value scripts in Try mode
38. Makefile and Compiling 04 393 17 2 1 Platforms supported by NSL 2 0 02 e eee eee 393 17 2 2 Platforms not supported by NSL 00000 e eee 393 APPENDIX A Functions Called in FACE 00 000 eee eee 397 Index 415 Vili List of Tables Keyboard Conventions nanenane 3 Typesetting Conventions seso ues aa hea ue oe Rs de Ra ea nae ey 3 SMUCHITES nee ics he itd he lh etd ahah ete dab ieat 169 Application Generation Error Messages 00 eee eee eens 185 Class Method Arguments 0 00 cece cee tenets 193 Application only Functions 0 0 0 0 e eee eens 205 FACE Functions ie eo etek ey a caine Wak dos ante E E ae 208 Predefined Resource Types 00 000 c cece cece eens 226 C Code Command Line Options 00 c eee ees 382 List of Figures Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 3 1 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 The Restart Process BOX 0 0c cee cece eee 12 The Command Window 00 cece eee eee 15 The File Ment 2222 3 c0e bhi a a bee PR SR 16 The Sa
39. The remainder of the widget name i e the path of sub widget names is used to find the sub widget by calling an equivalent of the X Toolkit function XtNameToWidget with the reference widget and the sub widget path If there is no sub widget path the reference widget is returned When naming a widget the name must be made explicit by starting it with one of the above reserved names The following are legal widget names in FACE self parent root toplevel self Wix2 parent ScrollBar parent parent WarningBox 129 The FACE Language root GrabShell GrabBoard Input toplevel GrabBoard Input parent GrabBoard Input root Input wid Button wid is a variable of type Widget You can refer to a widget ina FACE script using the wildcard character in a manner similar to the X Toolkit function XtNameToWidget The following limitations ap ply The can only be used in the sub widget path part of a widget name and it cannot be used at the beginning or at the end of a widget name e If used in association with a variable name the variable must be explicitly de clared of type Widget Otherwise the will be interpreted as multiply These are legal examples of the use of the wildcard character in widget names self Button root Shell ScrollBar wid Text wid is a statically typed Widget variable When naming widgets do not include a space a dot a star a colon a semi colon within the name Avoid using any
40. Widget Tells XFaceMaker to use the Xt varargs functions to create the widgets XtVaCreate Widget etc The resources of the widget are passed as a varargs list of pairs name value or as a tuple XtVaTypedArg name type value size for resources that need to be converted The following three options are valid with XtVaCreate Widget 64 C Code Options 5 Creation Arguments allowed When set the maximum number of arguments that can be passed to the creation function of a widget is five 20 Creation Arguments allowed When set the maximum number of arguments that can be passed to the creation function is twenty 100 Creation Arguments allowed When set the maximum number of arguments that can be passed to the creation function is one hundred The pushbuttons at the bottom of the C Code Options box do the following OK Applies the options and closes the window Apply Applies the options and remains in the C Code Options window Close Closes the window without applying any options Reset Resets the options to the preceding values Default Resets the options to their default values 65 The Editing Boxes 5 5 The Class Name Box Class Name box is a modified file selector used to specify the name of an Xt widget class The box pops up automatically when you save or load a class using the com mands in the Modules menu J XFaceMaker File Selector ja Filter ad_drawmaker widgets Thermometer
41. XmDragProcCallback 170 XmDrawingAreaCallback 169 XmDrawingAreaCallbackS truct 169 XmDrawnButtonCallback 169 XmDrawnButtonCallbackS truct 169 XmDropFinishCallback 170 XmDropProcCallback 170 XmDropSiteEnterCallback 169 XmDropSiteLeaveCallback 169 170 XmDropSiteVisuals 170 XmDropStartCallback 170 XmFileSelectionBoxCallback 169 XmFileSelectionBoxCallbackS truct 169 XmList 87 297 XmListCallback 169 XmListCallbackStruct 169 XmOperationChangedCallback 169 XmPushButtonCallback 169 XmPushButtonCallbackStruct 169 XmRowColumnCallback 169 XmRowColumnCallbackStruct 169 XmScaleCallback 169 XmScaleCallbackStruct 169 XmScrollBarCallback 169 431 XmScrollBarCallbackStruct 169 XmSecondaryResourceData 169 XmSelectionBoxCallback 169 XmSelectionBoxCallbackS truct 169 XmsStrings 64 XmStringTable 166 XmText 165 XmTextBlock 169 XmTextBlockWes 169 XmTextVerifyPtr 169 XmTextVerifyPtrWes 169 XmToggleButtonCallback 169 XmToggleButtonCallbackS truct 169 XmTopLevelEnterCallback 169 XmTopLevelLeaveCallback 169 XmTraverseObscuredCallback 169 XmTraverseObscuredCall backStruct 169 XtAddCallback 188 XtGetValues 131 165 196 XtRemoveAllCallbacks 197 XtRImmediate 191 XtRString 190 XtSetArg 64 XtSetValues 131 165 195 XtVaCreateWidget 64 xwd 277 xwud 277 432
42. a description file and a pattern file to produce one output file The description file contains information specific to the interface for which files are being generated and is produced by XFaceMaker For example the description file contains the names of the interface modules the types of their top level widgets the active values defined etc The pattern file describes the code that will be generated and is specific to the kind of file being produced For example there is one pattern file for the main of an XFaceMaker application and another pattern file for the Makefile The pattern file contains patterns that will be matched against the information contained in the de scription file The pattern file can also contain plain code that will simply be copied to the output file The output of genappli can optionally contain a copy of the input patterns In that case the output file can in turn be used as an input pattern file If code has been added to the output file it is preserved the next time the file is generated 10 1 Description File Syntax The description file contains pattern descriptions of the form lt pattern name gt lt object name gt lt attribute 1 gt lt valuel gt lt attribute2 gt lt value2 gt All symbols pattern names object names attribute names and attribute values are arbitrary strings Symbols do not have any predefined semantics except for the sin gle keyword children explained later
43. a page that is taller than it is wide Scale factor Affects the size of the window on the page the default scale is the larg est that will fit on the page defined Value can be between one and six Gray Scale Size Gray scale conversion of color image Value can be between one and four Print delay Number of seconds to wait before storing the window default one sec ond Command Displays the specified xpr command parameters The pushbuttons at the bottom of the window are used as follows OK Sets the print options for future printing and closes the box 81 The Editing Boxes Apply Applies the print options you have entered in the window to any future Print commands but does not close the Print Options box Close Closes the window without applying the options Reset Resets the fields of the window to the previous values i e the values specified at the last Apply Default Resets all the fields of the box to their default values Help Pops up a Help box on using the Print Options window Once the options are set and applied select the Save Prefs item in the File menu to save the print options for subsequent XFaceMaker sessions 82 RDB Options 5 15 RDB Options The RDB Options box is used to set the options for saving an RDB file Whenever you save an interface with the Save RDB file option set two files are saved in addi tion to the standard fm file An rdb file the Resource Data Base File This cont
44. be registered Also you might want to design a special ed iting box which will be popped by XFaceMaker when the new resource is select ed in the resource list of the Resources box of XFaceMaker See the section entitled Editing a New Resource Box in the XFaceMaker User s Guide Active values are translated into resources as follows resource name is the name of the active value which should start with a lower case letter and follow the Xt Intrinsics conventions e resource class is the name of the active value with its first letter in upper case e resource type is the type obtained as explained above or otherwise XtR String 190 Widget Class Resources resource size is one long word or four bytes except if the resource type is an existing Xt or Motif type corresponding to a data type of a different size for ex ample if the resource type is Boolean then the resource size is one byte e resource offset is the offset of the memory location allocated in the widget struc ture for the resource e default address is 0 if no default value is specified for the resource otherwise a pointer to the default value string e default type is XtRImmediate if no default value is specified for the resource oth erwise XtRString Default values can be specified in the Resource Edit box like other resource values i e arrows XfmARROWS_ LEFT max 10 Active values are also listed in the resource list so you can choo
45. be used for the widget class as in Xm or Xnsl The prefix defined is used in much the same manner as that of Xm for the OSF Motif widgets The class name becomes PrefixName the include files are expected to be in the Prefix directory as in include lt Prefix Name h gt and resource values begin with the prefix force With this option set XFaceMaker stays silent when genappli finds applica tion or interface C code files whose timestamp has changed If this option is not set genappli pops a confirmation dialog when it encounters files whose times tamp has changed This may instclose instclose Used with the compile or compilegroup options causes XFaceMaker to install on shells a default handler that will be called when the Motif Window Manager mwm Close menu item is selected as in interpreted Fm mode The default handler exits the application if the shell is an ApplicationShell or unmaps the shell otherwise To change the handler use FmSetCloseHandler msg msg Assign all message numbers in lt file gt fm and generate a message cat alog source file corresponding to all the internationalized strings in lt file gt msg lt file gt fm is changed if some message numbers were not assigned previously i e all messages are numbered nowarnings nowarnings This option prevents the FACE compiler from issuing certain frequent warnings when compiling FACE scripts into standalone C code i e when the standc option is used T
46. can be called from FACE and or the application 13 Command Line Options lists command line options 14 Environment Variables is a list of those available in XFaceMaker 15 Fm File Structure describes the structure of an interface file in the fm format 16 Adding Help Files explains how you can add new Help files or modify existing ones 17 Porting the C Code Library explains how to port the library libFm_c to a new machine Appendix A List of Functions is a complete list of functions attached by XFace Maker for use in FACE Introduction CHAPTER 2 NSL Product Support NSL provides technical support in English and French through our office in France The standard purchase agreement between purchasers and NSL states that NSL sup port includes telephone support within reasonable limits NSL reserves the right to decide what amount of support is reasonable Please note that this support is for NSL products only and not for general X Window System information other than that relating directly to NSL products Having said this we wish to make it plain that the Support Department is dedicated to helping users as much as possible and allowing them to benefit from using the full capabili ties of NSL products 2 1 Recommended Actions We recommend that one person within an organization or department be appointed as the NSL Contact Person All inquiries should be addressed to this person in the first instance so that common pr
47. converters in the Ini tialize method Methods such as Realize SetValuesAlmost etc are used less often and should merely call C functions written by the application designer Defining inappropriate scripts e g bad pointers or bad values given as resource val ues for certain methods can confuse the X Toolkit and cause XFaceMaker to crash In general all the pitfalls of Xt programming in C can occur in FACE scripts How ever due to XFaceMaker s dual process architecture the design process may crash but the XFaceMaker process stays alive Only the methods of the Core and Composite classes can be defined using active val ues Widget designers who wish to define other methods defined by a sub class of Core or Composite must do so by calling a C function that sets the appropriate point ers in the class record This function must be called in the ClassInitialize method 192 Widget Class Methods 11 2 1 The Class Method Arguments Method self 0 1 2 3 ClassInitialize _ Initialize new request J Realize w value_mask attributes Destroy w Resize w xofw yofw width of w height ofw Expose w event region SetValues new value in new value in current current SetValuesAlmost new old request reply GetValuesHook w value AcceptFocus w time return value QueryGeometry w request geometry_return return value Display
48. default mode is override Clicking on a translation in the list places it in the Translation field You can then modify the translation and add it to the list by selecting it and clicking on the Add button or delete it by selecting it and clicking on Delete Translation A text field for entering a translation script Add Adds the specified translation to the table Replace Replaces the selected translation with the one specified Delete Deletes the specified translation from the table Event type Displays the standard event types for the currently selected widget Click ing on an event type displays it in the Translation text line for editing Actions This scrolled window displays the standard actions for the currently selected widget Clicking on an action displays it in the Translation text field for editing To specify multiple actions type them in the Translation editing field separated by commas The Eval action listed at the top of the list was added by XFace Maker It lets you enter a FACE script as the action Clicking on Eval opens the Eval Editor icon The icon below the Event types window represents a mouse and keyboard If you do not know the official name of the event placing the cursor on the mouse and keyboard icon and then simulating the event you are interested in for in stance clicking a mouse button or pressing a key will insert the name of this event in the Translation text input line OK Applies the speci
49. dialog portion of the Menu Editor to the menu shown in the menu representation Replace Replaces the selected menu item with a new one according to the contents of the dialog portion of the Menu Editor Applies to the menu shown in the menu representation Delete Deletes the selected menu item 79 The Editing Boxes 5 13 Message Catalog Options Box This box is used to specify the current message set number The set number specified in this box is used for all MSG strings for which you do not explicitly specify a set number Open it by clicking on the Message Catalog item in the Options menu Once you have set these options the next time you save the interface XFaceMaker will generate a message catalog source file msg file along with the fm file E Save message catalog file Default Set Number F Command xfm msg LOK Apply dose Reset Defaut Help Figure 5 17 The Message Catalog Options Box The Message Catalog Options box has the following fields Save message catalog file When this option is set and applied XFaceMaker gener ates one or several catalog files with the msg suffix containing all the inter nationalized messages of the current interface when you save an interface Default set number Used to specify the current message set number for internationalized messages When you internationalize a string without specify ing the catalog set number XFaceMaker
50. do one overall Save You can also save your class using the commands in the Classes sub menu of the Modules menu Usage interface Q drag source Q drop site widget class Q C class ee Qass Name f O l Qasin OOOO mj New Resources Type F S vam a Get Script Custom Editor Gear 1 Cr Set Script Custom Editor Gear New Resource Name Methods Poo i __ _ aad Repco beete A F s aose Edit save Help I p Figure 5 4 Widget Class Class Name Used to specify the name of the class being defined or edited The ellip sis opens a list of already defined classes from which to choose Class names must have a leading uppercase character New Resource Name Used to enter the resource name when you are defining a new resource editing an existing resource or deleting a resource Edit This button pops up the Class Name box from which you may select the class name that you want to edit XFaceMaker will pop the FileSelector to let you spec ify the name of the fm file that defines the class and it will load the file 51 The Editing Boxes Class Icon Enter the name of a pixmap to represent the class in the widgetstore The ellipsis pops up the Pixmap editor for defining a pixmap Type Specify the active value s type in the Type field or click the ellipsis to pop up the T
51. does load all the hierarchies deriving from multiple toplevel shells this is not the case with FmLoadCreate FmLoadCreateGroup FmLoadCreateM anagedGroup and FmLoadGroup EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmLoadCreate FmLoadCreateManaged FmLoadCreateManagedGroup 299 C NAME FACE NAME FmLoadCreate none SYNOPSIS Widget FmLoadCreate char name char filename Widget parent Arg args Cardinal nargs DESCRIPTION 300 Load and create the fm interface contained in filename Unlike FmLoad does not manage the interface even if the interface was saved as visible Unlike FmLoad if the interface contains several main shells only the first one will be loaded and created You can specify a parent and creation arguments The toplevel object created is returned FmLoadCreate always reads in the speci fied fm file and creates the widget hierarchy each time it is called It does not save an internal description in memory and should therefore be used whenev er a widget hierarchy is to be created only once Use FmLoadCreate to create interface fragments that do not contain an App plicationShell The parameters are name is the name under which the topmost widget of the hierarchy is created If you need to create several instances of the interface with different names you should use FmLoadCreateGroup and change this parameter for each instance filename is the name of the fm file which is to be loaded parent specifies the widget of
52. example choice nchoice2 nchoice3 n offset specifies the integer value of an enumerated resource value The values following must be contiguous Therefore if offset is 3 then choice1 is 3 choice2 is 4 and choice3 is 5 prefix is a character string that defines the prefix for the enumeration values i e Xnsl giving XnsICHOICE1 which has integer value 0 SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE FmAddEnumeratedType XnsIRNewType 2 choice 1 nchoice2 nchoice3 n 10 Xns l SEE ALSO FmAddResourceType 221 C NAME FACE NAME FmAddRepresentation none SYNOPSIS int FmAddRepresentation const char type const char repname const char ctype int size int aligned int indirect DESCRIPTION This function informs XFaceMaker on how to manipulate resources for a new resource type and how to generate C code when the resource is set for a wid get or used in a FACE script The arguments are type The type name e g MyType repname The representation name symbol in C i e the name of the C symbol containing the type name in a C program e g XnslIRMyType The rep resentation name is used to generate portable C code with references to the representation symbol which may have different values on different plat forms e g the representation name XmFontList is defined as FontList on most platforms but as XmFontList on DEC platforms ctype The C type declarat
53. handler installed by XFace Maker The function returns the address of the previously installed close han dler function i e that of the default close handler the first time it is called If the user function returns True then the default close handler will be called af terwards If it returns False the default close handler will not be called SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE include lt Fm h gt Boolean Myclose w Widget wW if XtIsApplicationShell w do clean up before exiting close files etc else do clean up before unmap return True main argc argv int argc char argv Widget def_app_sh app_sh def_app_sh Fmlnitialize app App NULL 0 amp argc argv app_sh FmCreateinterface app def_app_sh NULL 0 FmSetCloseHandler Myclose FmLoop SEE ALSO 325 C NAME FACE NAME FmSetFunctionPrototype none SYNOPSIS int FmSetFunctionPrototype String Myfunction String MyCfunction String typel String type2 i DESCRIPTION Equivalent to the cprototype construct The FmSetFunctionPrototype func tion takes a variable number of arguments If the number of C types for the arguments of the FACE function does not match the number of arguments specified in the corresponding call to FmAttachFunction the behavior is un defined Myfunction is the name of the function declared in a FACE script MyCfunction is the name the function should have in the C code type is t
54. in C code generated VALUE Resource value in string format 10 3 Genappli Options The genappli program accepts the following command line options and arguments genappli p lt pattern file gt a lt application file gt o lt output file gt b lt begin patt string gt e lt end patt string gt 1 lt list delimiter string gt m lt output file fopen mode gt c q lt pattern file gt lt application file gt lt output file gt n p lt pattern file gt specifies the pattern file to use 183 The Genappli Utility a lt application file gt specifies the application pattern description file to use 0 lt output file gt specifies the output file b lt begin patt string gt specifies the character string which identifies the beginning of pattern lines e lt end patt string gt specifies the character string which identifies the end of pat tern lines l lt list delimiter string gt specifies the character used to delimit list iterations m lt output file fopen mode gt mode passed to fopen to open the output file c clean if set do not output pattern definitions in output file q quiet do not print messages on the standard output lt pattern file gt specifies the pattern file to use lt application file gt specifies the application pattern description file to use lt output file gt specifies the output file 184 Genappli Error Messages 1
55. integer or a one word value then it must be stored directly in the value field and the length field must be left to its initial value of 0 For a string or a pointer then the pointer must be stored in the value field For targets STRING TEXT and COMPOUND TEXT the length field is updated automatically to the length of the string which must be null terminated For other targets for which a pointer is stored the length field must be updated explicitly to the size of the data type is where the type of the data must be stored This field is initialized to a default value which is taken from the table of generally accepted atoms listed in the ICCCM section 2 6 2 For the commonly used targets STRING and COMPOUND TEXT the type is initialized to the target name For the TEXT target the type is initialized to TEXT but it is changed to STRING if left alone For targets not in this table the type field is initialized to the target name length is where the length of the converted data must be stored if the data is a pointer and not a string The length is in units defined by format format is where the format of the converted data must be stored This can be 8 16 or 32 This field is initialized to 8 if type is STRING TEXT and COMPOUND TEXT and to 32 otherwise drag_context is the XmDragContext widget returned by XmDragStart selection is the name of the selection used by the Motif drag and drop mech anism MOTIF DROP ta
56. is the value returned in by the get script of the active value type_return is the type of the variable Calling this function is similar to executing an instruction of the form value lt widget gt lt name gt in a FACE script SCOPE Application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 316 FmWrite Value C NAME FACE NAME FmRegisterSimpleDropSite FmRegisterSimpleDropSite SYNOPSIS None FmRegisterSimpleDropSite Widget widget String targets DESCRIPTION Register widget as a drop site which accepts the targets specified in the tar gets argument If several targets are specified they must be separated by com mas This function is generally called from a widget s xfmCreateCallback at widget creation time Similar to FmDropSiteRegister but does not have the arglist argument all arguments other than XmNimportTargets and XmNnu mImportTargets have their default values SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmDropSiteRegister 317 C NAME FACE NAME FmRegisterStructures none SYNOPSIS int FmRegisterStructures FmStructDesc structs int num_structs DESCRIPTION Declare the structures described by structs which points to the following type typedef struct FmStructDesc String name String cname FmFieldDesc fields int num_fields String id_field XtArgVal id value FmStructDesc name is the name of the structure i e the FACE type which will be used to declare pointers to the structure This
57. library The pattern files for extension libraries are PattLibMake and PattLibExt c newxfm lt xfm name gt Used in conjunction with the gen option to generate the source files of a new XFaceMaker The pattern files used are PattXfmMake and PattXfmMain c extpath lt dir1 F dir2 F gt Search path for extension files 384 The Command Line Options 13 1 9 Standard X client All standard X client command line options will be recognized although not all may be meaningful for XFaceMaker For a full list consult the standard X documention The X Window System User s Guide from O Reilly has a description in the chapter Command Line Options Finally lt file gt fm file The name of the interface file that you wish to load with XFaceMaker if you want to load it directly and not with the Open command in the File menu All of the above command line options can be set in your SHOME Xdefaults file although only a few are really meaningful This is done by using the option name without followed by a colon a tab character and the value required For example to disable lazy mode every time you use XFaceMaker add the follow ing to your SHOME Xdefaults file at the beginning of a new line Xfm nonlazy true Other examples are Xfm fmresources home my xfm MyXfmDb Xfm kill X When using the CallEditor function any command line options for the application will be used by XFaceMaker when the function is cal
58. library functions The functions simplify the application and reduce code size The source code of the Fm_c library is included in the standard distribution The following two options are valid with Use Fm_c library Install WM close handler Installs a default handler that will be called when the Motif Window Manager Close menu item is selected as in interpreted mode The default handler exits the application if the shell is an ApplicationShell or else unmaps the shell The handler can be changed using the FmSetCloseHandler function Dynamic widget references Specifies that XFaceMaker produce dynamic widget references for all widgets Standalone C Specifies that the code generated contain calls to the X and Motif libraries only The application will have to use XtInitialize and XtMainLoop instead of FmIni tialize and FmLoop to be fully independent of the Fm_c library Resource spec ifications in FACE scripts need to explicitly type variables See the section on Stand alone C code in the X FaceMaker User s Guide Initialize Resources Using resource database Specifies that an internal resource database be generated as an array which is passed to the X resource manager The widget creation functions consult the resource manager which handles all resource conversions This option has been kept for backward compatibility It is somewhat old fashioned 63 The Editing Boxes Initialize Resources Using XtSetArg Tells
59. library is not already available 17 1 Source and Configuration Files Once XFaceMaker is installed the files needed to recompile the libFm_c library are in the directories NSLHOME src Clib and NSLHOME sre Clib config 17 2 Generating the Makefile and Compiling 17 2 1 Platforms supported by NSL If the platform is one of the reference platforms Spare SunOS 4 1 x Spare Solaris 2 5 IBM RS 6000 AIX 4 1 5 DEC Alpha OSF 1 v3 2 and up SGI IRIX 5 3 SCO Open Server 5 SCO_SV sco 3 2 2 or HP HP UX 9 0 the existing configuration files should work All you have to do is follow the steps below 1 cd NSLHOME srce Clib 2 config boot The boot script asks you a few questions type Return each time It builds the imake file 3 config imake Iconfig 4 make Wait while the source files are being compiled 17 2 2 Platforms not supported by NSL If you want to compile the libFm_c library for another platform you will have to modify the following files in the config directory first Imake tmpl template file e imakemdep h include file to build imake The Makefile is generated using the imake utility used in the X Window System Here are the steps you will have to follow 1 Finda preprocessor cpp symbol that can be used to identify the target platform If the preprocessor defines no special symbol choose one You will have to spec 393 Porting the XFaceMaker C Code Library ify this symbol when executing the b
60. m Load Loads the fm widget class definition file specified in the file selector box and adds a default icon to the widgetstore m Save Saves the selected object and its subtree as a class in the last widget class definition file specified with Save As Load or Edit and with the same widget class name If the selected object is not the same as the object selected during the last Save As or Edit XFaceMaker pops a confirmation dialog m Save As Used to save the selected object and its subtree in a widget class def inition file Pops the File Selector box to specify the file in which the selected object is to be saved Next pops up the Class Name box to specify the name of the new class Class names and class file names must start with an upper case character m Edit Reads a widget class definition file as a regular fm file maps it in a shell and selects its top level object m Delete Deletes the user defined class specified in the Class Name box and removes its icon from the widgetstore Note that the corresponding widget class is not actually deleted because the XToolkit provides no support for this action The instances of the class that you have created are not destroyed This does not delete any previously saved fm file m Choose Icon Pops up the Icon Selection box to select or create an image for the widgetstore icon of the class This box works like the box described in section 5 12 The Menu Editor C Cla
61. modify your configuration file and try again To learn more about imake read the file config doc README imake It explains how to use imake with X11 not XFaceMaker but the principles are the same You can also read An Imake Tutorial by Mark Moraes Using Imake to Configure the X Window System by Paul DuBois or Software Portability With IMAKE by Paul Dubois published by O Reilly amp Associates it is a nutshell Please note that NSL does not support the imake utility The only non standard defines used by NSL are m DMOTIF_1 2 required if your target platform has MOTIF 1 2 m DHAS GLS required if your target platform has General Language Support 394 Generating the Makefile and Compiling X OPEN 395 Porting the XFaceMaker C Code Library 396 APPENDIX A Functions Called in FACE This Appendix contains a complete list of the functions attached by XFaceMaker for use in FACE The FACE names are included for backward compatibility only We recommend that you use the C name 1 C Functions C Name FACE Name atoi atoi exit Exit Quit close close gets gets open open puts puts ree ree scanf scanf malloc malloc pelose pelose popen popen printf printf sprintf sprintf sscanf sscanf strcat strcat stremp stremp strcpy strepy strlen strlen strncmp strncmp strncpy strncpy 397 2 Xt Functions C Name FACE Name XtAddGrab XtAugmentTranslations XtCallActio
62. name Initialize exists for the model object of the class The CreateCallback or the Initialize Set script should be used to set the initial values for any resource whose default values cannot be set directly in the Resource Editor Box However these two are not strictly equivalent 1 The CreateCallback script is called every time the model object is rebuilt it can not be used to initialize new resources of the class being defined since these do not yet exist as such in the model object They are still only Active Values when the model object is being rebuilt 2 The Initialize Set script is called only after the new class is saved when instances of the class are being created At this time all the resources of the new class exist and are accessible For example if you design a class which consists of a BulletinBoard and some chil dren and you want to set the defaultButton resource you can do it in the CreateCall back the resource exists in the BulletinBoard class Moreover by setting the resource in the CreateCallback you have the advantage of being able to check the be havior directly on the model object xfmCreateCallback self defaultButton self ok_button 194 Widget Class Methods On the other hand if in your new widget class you are defining a new resource called applyButton whose type is a widget ID you can set it only after the class has been created i e in the Set script associated to the initialize activ
63. not placed in the widget cut buff er and therefore cannot be retrieved with the Paste command Track Name Places in the X Buffer X selection that is pasted with Mouse button The XFaceMaker Menus 2 the widget path of a widget relative to the current widget The cursor changes to a question mark Drop it on the widget whose path you want to get then paste with mouse button2 in a text input window You can obtain the absolute path of a widget by clearing the widget selection Delete Deletes the current widget selection The selection is not placed in the widget cut buffer and therefore cannot be retrieved with the Paste command Gadget Changes into gadgets all the widgets that are in the sub tree of the select ed widget Only the widgets that have a gadget equivalent and in which no wid get specific resources are used are changed The number of widgets changed is displayed in the Status field Note that widgets can also be changed to gadgets individually by using the Gadget toggle button in the Resources box UnGadget Changes into widgets all the gadgets that are in the sub tree of the se lected widget The number of widgets changed is displayed in the Status field Note that gadgets can also be changed to widgets individually by using the Gad get toggle button in the Resources box Auto Pos Size Removes unnecessary position and size resources from the wid gets that are in the sub tree of the selected widget The resource definiti
64. null call the get scripts for all active values defined for w regardless of their names If w is null call the get scripts for all active values called name regardless of the Widget they are defined for If at least one script was called return 1 other wise return 0 SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Activate the get script for active value fval in widget parent SB GetActive Value parent SB fval Activate the get script for active value fval in all widgets GetActive Value Widget 0 fval SEE ALSO FmSetActiveValue FmGetActiveValueTimeOut 273 C NAME FACE NAME FmGetActiveValueAddr GetActiveValueAddr SYNOPSIS String FmGetActiveValueAddr String name DESCRIPTION Return the address attached to the active value named name or 0 ifno address was attached to name SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Print the value of a float active value ptr GetActiveValueAddr fval printf decimal val d n ftoi Pointer ptr SEE ALSO FmAttachAv FmFetchValueAddress FmAttachValue 274 C NAME FACE NAME FmGetActiveValueTimeOut GetActiveValueTimeOut SYNOPSIS TimeOutClosure FmGetActiveValueTimeOut Widget w String name Int interval DESCRIPTION Initialize a timeout so that the get script of the active value name is called in interval milliseconds by GetActiveValue w name It returns a pointer to a timeout identifier TimeoutID The timeout can be stopped with StopTime Out Pointer Tim
65. one argument of any type It can be used in FACE functions but also anywhere else in a FACE script in which case it will im mediately leave the FACE script the return value is then ignored No type checking is done between the type of a FACE function and the argument of return 141 The FACE Language 6 9 1 Scope of Variables in FACE Functions In FACE functions local variables are automatic a new instance of the variable is created every time the function is called The scope of variables is defined as follows e the scope of a local variable declared outside a function is the whole script not including functions defined in the script e the scope of a global variable declared outside a function is the whole script in cluding functions defined in the script i e it is not necessary to declare the glo bal variable again inside the function e the scope of a local variable declared inside a function is the function itself not including other functions defined inside the function e the scope of a global variable declared inside a function is the function itself and the rest of its surrounding script When a FACE function is called the reference widget and call_data accessed with the special variable are those of the script from which the function was called For example in widget XmPushButton activateCallback function Widget MySelf return self PB1 widget XmPushButton activateCallback f
66. or close it before you can take any other action in XFaceMaker If you at tempt some other action before responding to a modal box you will find that you are unable to proceed and the cursor takes the form of a caution sign to indicate this To continue simply enter an appropriate response in the box or close it 45 The Editing Boxes 5 1 The Active Values Box The Active Values box is used to define and edit the active values of the currently selected widget Open it by clicking on Windows Active Values The options avail able in this box change according to the usage you select for the active value There are five choices for Usage interface The active value is used to share data with the application or to define a script a pseudo resource or a method drag source The active value names a target the widget can drag drop site The active value names a target accepted by the widget as a drop site widget class The active value is a resource in a widget class described by the widget e C class The active value is a member of the C class generated in connec tion with the widget There are a number of fields that always appear A list of active values Only active values that have the same usage appear in this field if you are using new style active values version 3 0 and later However older fm files with old style active values will display all the active values of the widget regardless of the
67. otherwise you widget will still be managed by its parent and this could cause a crash To do this you can call the superclass s DeleteChild method using the convenience function SuperclassDeleteChild parent w SuperclassDeleteChild self 200 Implementation 11 3 Implementation 11 3 1 The Class Record The class record for the new class is an aggregate structure composed of the class parts of all the superclasses including the class part of the model object class plus the class part of the new widget class which is empty All fields of the class record are initialized to the appropriate inheritance value ex cept the following fields of the Core class structure which have values computed from the model object superclass class_name widget_size class_initialize ini tialize actions num_actions resources num_resources destroy resize expose set_values get_values_ hook tm_table 11 3 2 The Widget Instance Record The widget record for the new class is an aggregate of the widget parts of all the su perclasses plus the widget part of the new class The new widget part contains an array containing the widget IDs of the widget s children and locations where the val ues of the new resources corresponding to the active values of the model object will be stored 201 New Widget Classes 202 CHAPTER 12 Functions This chapter lists the functions available in XFaceMaker alphabetically according to
68. pclose pclose C x popen popen C printf printf C random FACE x x return Cc x send FmSendClick FACE x x x send_click FmSendClick FACE x x x show FmShow Widget FACE x X x size FACE x x x sprintf sprintf C x sscanf sscanf C x stop_timer FaceStopTimer FACE x x strcat strcat Cc x stremp stremp C x Table 12 2 FACE Functions 211 212 FACE name C name Class Xm Xt Fm Fm_c Fm_e strcpy strcpy C strlen strlen C strncmp strncmp C x wait FmWait FACE x x x Table 12 2 FACE Functions 12 3 Function Reference Pages The format for the functions in this chapter is the following C NAME FACE NAME The C name of the function The FACE name of the function SYNOPSIS The calling syntax the arguments and the return type DESCRIPTION A brief description of the function SCOPE States whether the function can be called from a FACE script only from a FACE script and the application or from the application only EXAMPLE An example of its use SEE ALSO A list of related functions 213 C NAME FACE NAME FaceConvertString ConvertString SYNOPSIS Any FaceConvertString Widget w String from String to_type DESCRIPTION Explicitly convert the string from to the to_type resource type This function calls XtConvert For example pixmap ConvertString self 50_foreground Pixmap converts the string 50_foreground into the corresponding Pixmap The re
69. popped up to specify which template should be applied Templates ArmColor BorderColor HighlightColor Default_TB vi Selection ArmGolor OK Cancel Help 24 Figure 4 10 The Template Name Box Unapply Template Opens the template menu to specify the widget hierarchy from which the template will be removed You can unapply a template m To Selected Object Removes a specific template from the currently selected object m To Whole Subtree Removes a specific template from the currently selected object and its entire subtree m To Widgets of Same Class Removes a specific template from the currently selected object and all widgets of its class in the subtree The Template Name box pops up to specify which template should be removed Alignment Pops up the Alignment box to align widgets relative to each other or to their parent widget Widgets can also be snapped to the nearest point on a predefined grid Grid spacing can be adjusted using the slider The grid can be activated only if the current widget is a Composite Refer to Section 5 2 The The XFaceMaker Menus Alignment Box Attachments Pops up the attachment box in the resource editing window This item is sensitive only if the current widget is a child of XmForm The attachment box is popped up in the same way when you click in the ellipsis of an attachment resource in the Resource editing window Refer to Section 5 3 The Attachments
70. popped up when color or pixel resources for a widget are being edited Parent applicationShell0 transientShel1l0 smForml ame mPushEuttonl i dass ZnPushEuttor mps o O Current selection Resource bottomShadow Color Black lt lt White black RRE Figure 5 30 The Color Box monochrome It has the following fields Black White Specifies the color to be used for the resource whose name is displayed above the color values 99 The Editing Boxes text input line Displays the name of the selected color or can be used to enter the name or pixel value directly OK Registers and applies the selected color to the widget resource being edited Rebuild Applies the changes by rebuilding and remains in the editor Set Values Applies the changes by setting the values and remains in the editor Cancel Closes the Colors box without registering a color for the selected widget re source Set Updates the value in the Resources list but does not apply it Cancel Returns to the main Resource window without changing the value 100 The Resource Edit Boxes 5 17 4 The Colors Box RGB Box The RGB box is used to specify the RGB Red Green Blue value or HSV Hue Saturation Value value for a color resource RGB and HSV definition are only available if you use XFaceMaker on a color display with a read write color table i e with PseudoColor or DirectColor visuals O
71. replac es the change with the previous values If there is nothing to undo a message stating so is output in the message area of the main window Each time you click on Undo you will undo an earlier change until no more can be undone Close Closes the Resources window Rebuild Applies the resources by rebuilding and remains in the editor Set Values Applies the resources by setting values and remains in the editor ellipsis Pops up the Apply Options box Edit Changes to the Resource Edit window The button s lable changes to List indi cating that clicking on it will return the window to the resources list Sort Changes to the Sort Order window Undo Undoes the last resource modification 92 The Resources Box 5 16 5 The Resource Editing Window The Resource Editor box is used to edit resources for a selected widget Open it by clicking on Edit or Callbacks in the Resources box ynslBarGraph Class ns1BarGraphy Templates f o g E _ W Current selection Peed Auto position x jag y 3 O Pog O Auto size w 296 h 33 i Z Gadget Resource Editor Custom Editor barTitle some valued colorCount 5 colors yellow green white cyan lightseagreen displayAxis true displayGrid false divisions 2 divisionsFormat 1f emitWarning True inLimitCallback XnslBarGraphCallbackStruct chs chs printf inlimitCB reason d index d value 2f old Close Rebuild
72. right side of another widget as specified in the sideWid get resource e g leftWidget parent PushButton0 attach_opposite_widget attach current side to the opposite side as defined by Mo tif e g attach left side to left side of another widget as specified in the side Widget resource attach_position attach current side to a relative position within the Form widget specifying the relative position in the sidePosition resource as a percentage of the corresponding Form s size e g leftPosition 50 attaches the left side to a point which is 50 percent of the form widgets size if scaleFactor is set to its default 100 attach_self attach current side of the widget to its original position The Attachments box has the following fields Arrow Buttons These are used to specify which border of the selected widget is to 58 be attached the Up arrow for TopAttachment the Left arrow for LeftAttach ment etc m Once the attachment choices are set you can apply attachments to the selected widget by clicking on one of the four arrow buttons Move the cursor over the interface and click in the widget you want to attach to or in the Form parent m If position is selected when you click on an arrow the selected widget is at tached to its Form parent the cursor does not appear Note that setting both an offset and a position is valid For instance if you want a PushButton in the middle of a Form you might g
73. script of the active value with the new address passed as the argument If it succeeds the function re turns 1 If the active value does not exist the function does nothing and re turns 0 If widget is null the function returns 1 Calling this function is similar to executing an instruction of the form lt widget gt lt name gt value in a FACE script SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmAttachValue 248 C NAME FACE NAME FmClearArgList FmClearArgList SYNOPSIS None FmClearArgList FmArgList list DESCRIPTION Removes all arguments from a list but does not free the list itself SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Taken from the DragDrop example in the distribution FmArgList arglist FmNewArgList FmAddArg arglist pixmap FmGetPixmap self letters bm FmAddArg arglist mask ConvertString self letters_m bm Bitmap Widget source_icon FmCreateDragIcon self source arglist FmClearArgList arglist SEE ALSO FmFreeArgList 249 C NAME FACE NAME FmCreateDragIcon FmCreateDragIcon SYNOPSIS Widget FmCreateDraglIcon Widget widget String name FmArgList arglist DESCRIPTION Call XmCreateDragIcon with the arguments specified by arglist widget specifies the ID of the widget where default values for the drag icons s visual attributes should be fetched name is the name of the DragIcon widget that will be created arglist specifies the argument list SCOPE FACE
74. searched for when the Search pushbutton is clicked or upon typing Return Search When clicked searches for the specified string in the widget names and se lects the widget where it first occurs in the Widget List Widget Tree and the in terface Click on Search again to find other occurences of the string specified This is useful to locate specific widgets in large interfaces 39 The Command Window 4 5 1 The Widget List The Widget List displays the widgets in the interface as well as their structural rela tionships Widget names are indented from the left to reflect their position in the wid get hierarchy Thus a child widget is listed below its parent and one character to the right Currently selected widgets are highlighted A vertical scroll bar lets you access all the objects in an interface Use the Shrink and Expand icons to control which subtrees of the Widget List you see You can use the Widget List to select widgets or gadgets to reorder sibling widgets and to specify where in the hierarchy you wish to add a widget Open close the box by clicking on the Widget List item in the Windows menu or by toggling the Widget List display icon 4 5 2 The Widget Tree The Widget Tree displays your current interface as a tree structure Scroll bars allow you to see all the objects in the interface You can also enlarge the box to get a larger view of the interface tree structure Use the Shrink and Expand icons to control
75. source needs several pixmaps you can enter a comma separated list of pixmap names directly in the resource editing field Or you can click on the ellipsis and open the Pixmaps Table box xnslBarGraph Cass junslBarGraph Templates f W Current selection Resource pixmaps wide_weave xLogol6 E 1 Figure 5 37 The Pixmaps Table Editor The Pixmap Table box has the following fields A List of pixmaps Displays the current list of pixmap names 109 The Editing Boxes A Text Input Field Enter the name of a pixmap here or click the ellipsis to open the Pixmaps box Add Adds the pixmap name of the textField to the list Replace Sensitive only if a name is selected in the list Replaces the name of the se lected pixmap with the one in the textField Delete Sensitive only if a name is selected in the list Removes the selected pixmap form the list Clear Sensitive only if the list is not empty Removes all the items from the list A warning dialog is popped asking for confirmation Click No if you do not want to remove all items from the list OK Applies the specified value to the resource and returns to the main Resource win dow Rebuild Applies the value by rebuilding and remains in the editor Set Values Applies the change by setting values remains in the editor Set Updates the value in the Resources list but does not apply it Cancel Returns to the main Resource window with no value change
76. storage for it the variable is initialized to 0 Before an array can be used it must be allocated by calling the new_table new_atray or new_c_array functions The new_table function creates a new hash array It takes no arguments Int a String a new_table The new_array function creates a new linear array The storage for the elements will be allocated and expanded automatically when required Int a Int a new_array The new_c_array function also creates a new linear array but allows you to initialize the array with a C array It takes two arguments the first argument is of type Pointer and specifies the C array the second argument is of type Int and specifies the size of the C array XmString items Int items new_c_array Pointer parent list items parent list itemCount The C array passed to new_c_array must be an array of elements of the size of an XtArgVal An initialized array is not expanded automatically When the array is not used any more it should be freed by calling the destroy function destroy a When an initialized linear array is freed the C array passed to new_c_array is not freed FACE arrays are allocated from the heap so the storage of an array remains valid regardless of the scope of the variable which holds it until a call to destroy is made In particular an array allocated in a function is not freed automatically when the function exits 148 Using Arrays in FACE 6 11 3 Access
77. stored in the widget classes tm_table field which de fines the default translation table for the class e Ifthe table begins with override or augment the translation table is installed in the Initialize method by calling XtOverrideTranslations or XtAugmentTransla tions This allows the widget designer to override or augment the superclass de fault translations which is not possible otherwise The default translations of a class are either completely inherited or completely re defined 188 Widget Class Resources Note that if override or augment are specified in the model s translations it will not be possible to re define the specified translations in a particular instance of the class If you want to be able to re define the instance s translations you must specify replace or nothing but in that case you will have to copy all the translations of the superclass If no translations are defined for the model object the translations of the new class are inherited from the superclass To define a new class with no translations use re place followed by an empty translation table 11 1 2 Active Value Resources When XFaceMaker generates a class definition file every active value resource that was specified for the model object of the new widget class is included except in the following cases The following active value names are reserved and are used to define the corre sponding methods of the widget class
78. take a fixed number of integer values then XFaceMaker can generate all the functions necessary to handle the new type All you have to do is give the names of the different values using the type keyword which has been extended for that purpose For example you can put in the Set script for a new resource type MyEnum choicel choice2 choice3 and enter MyEnum as the active value type This defines a new enumerated type MyEnum and registers automatically a resource converter from String to MyEnum The values are defined as FACE constants PrefixCHOICE1 PrefixCHOICE2 and PrefixCHOICE3 where Pre fix is the class prefix that has been specified in the Save Options box or with the cprefix option if any or Xfm otherwise The values will also be output as C constants with the same names as the FACE constants in the public header file when the new class is saved as C code Finally the FmAddEnumeratedType function is called automatically so that XFaceMaker will pop the Enumeration box filled with the right values when the new resource is selected in the resource list of the Resources box of XFaceMaker e Ifthe new resource is of a completely new data type that cannot be represented by any existing type then you will have to provide a type converter which will be called by the X Toolkit to convert strings to the data type of your new resource See the X Toolkit documentation for a complete description of type converters and the way they must
79. the libFm c SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 256 C NAME FACE NAME FmDisableTraversal FmDisableTraversal SYNOPSIS None FmDisableTraversal Widget w DESCRIPTION Disable keyboard traversal for Widget w and all its children by calling Xm RemoveTabGroup w and setting the resources traversalOn to False and highlightThickness to 0 for all children of w SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE FmDisableTraversal parent XmRowColumn0 SEE ALSO FmEnableTraversal XmProcess Traversal 257 C NAME FACE NAME FmDoEvent FmDoEvent SYNOPSIS None FmDoEvent DESCRIPTION Process a single X event This function calls XtNextEvent and then XtDis patchEvent once SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmLoop 258 C NAME FACE NAME FmDragStart FmDragStart SYNOPSIS Widget FmDragStart Widget widget XEvent event String targets FmArgList arglist DESCRIPTION Call XmDragStart with the arguments specified by arglist The XmNexport Targets and XmNnumExportTargets arguments are specified as a comma separated string in targets SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE FmDragStart self STRING arglist SEE ALSO FmStartSimpleDrag 259 C NAME FACE NAME FmDropSiteRegister FmDropSiteRegister SYNOPSIS Widget FmDropSiteRegister Widget widget String targets FmArgList arglist DESCRIPTION Call XmDropSiteRegister with the arguments specified by arglist The Xm Ni
80. the Apply Options box by clicking on the ellipsis next to the Set Values button Apply vall resources selected resources by vre creating widgets setting values to vself yselected widgets selected sub tree Ok Cancel Figure 5 25 The Apply Options You can apply e all resources Applies all changes made since the last Rebuild or Set Values This is the default e selected resources Applies only the selected resources in the list The new resource values can be applied by e re creating widgets A new instance of each object implied in the resource change will be created for each resource modification The effects of the change are immediately visible This is the default mode setting values Choosing this option applies the new resource values to existing objects Most resource changes are directly visible although some are not Some resources cannot be changed this way and an error message will be generated 91 The Editing Boxes The new resource values can be applied to e self Applies the values to the widget being edited in that window This is the default e selected widgets Applies the values to all selected widgets e sub tree Applies the values to the current edit widget and all of its descendants You can undo the last change made to the resources of the widget you are editing by clicking on the Undo button at the bottom of the resources window Doing so
81. the specified active value and associated with the specified widget calls the get script of the active value with the address passed as the argument and returns the address The type of the result is the type of the active value if it is immediate or Pointer otherwise If the active value does not exist a FACE error occurs lt widget gt lt avname gt v fetches the address attached to the specified active value and associated with the specified widget possibly allocating a memory location of size sizeof XtArgVal if the active value is automatic converts v to the type of the active value if v is of type String stores v as the contents of the active value address and calls the set script of the active value with the address passed as the argument If the active value does not exist or if it is immediate or if it is not attached and it is not automatic or if v is a String which cannot be converted to the type of the active value or if v is not a String and the type of v is not compat ible with the type of the active value a FACE error occurs lt widget gt lt avname gt v changes the address attached to the specified active value and associated with the specified widget and calls the set script of the active val ue with the new address passed as the argument If the active value does not exist or if it is immediate and the type of v is not compatible with the type of the active value or if it is not immediate and the type o
82. the widget name and enters it in the script editing window 114 The Restart Design Process Box 5 18 The Restart Design Process Box When the Design process terminates the Restart Design Process window pops up displaying the default command line The default command line launches the Design process which just terminated usually xfm or a new user built instance of XFace Maker with all the command line options specified initially plus the client option and the restore option XFaceMaker Restart Desi Design process command line kfm client calleditor restore Command W Restore state _ Trusted state Ok cancel wat ext xFM Hep Figure 5 41 The Restart Design Process Box The Command button pops the File Selector to choose a different XFaceMaker executable The Restore state and Trusted state buttons toggle the restore and trusted options respectively in the command line The OK button launches the specified command line XFaceMaker waits until the new Design process connects to it Cancel will not launch any Design process An alert box pops up to warn you that XFaceMaker is running in mono process mode Clicking No in the alert box re turns to the Restart Design Process box The Wait button does not launch any Design process but XFaceMaker will still wait for a connection The interface is disabled until the connection occurs This is useful for launching the
83. to Appendix A fora full list of Xt or Xm functions that can be called from FACE scripts Fm the libFm a library is the full library used by an application whose interface is in fm format interpreted mode interface Fm c the libFm c a library is the full library used by an application whose in terface is in c format compiled mode interface Fm e the libFm_e a library is a superset of the Fm library It includes some ad ditional functions which can be used to create new widget classes and to call the editor from the application 207 FACE name C name Class Xm Xt Fm Fm_c Fm_e AddGrab XtAddGrab Xt x Beep FmBeep FACE x x x CallActionProc XtCallActionProc Xt CallCallbacks XtCallCallbacks Xt CallCallbacksTimeOut FmCallCallbacksTimeOut FACE x x x CallEditor FmCallEditor FACE ClearArgList FmClearArgList FACE x x ConfigureWidget XtConfigureWidget Xt x ConvertString FaceConvertString FACE CreateXmString FmCreateXmString FACE DestroyWidget XtDestroyWidget Xt x DisableTraversal FmDisableTraversal FACE EnableTraversal FmEnableTraversal FACE x x Exit exit C x FaceInitTimer FaceInitTimer FACE x x FaceStopTimer FaceStopTimer FACE x x FmAddArg FmAddArg FACE x x x FmBeep FmBeep FACE x x x FmCallEditor CallEditor FACE x FmCallValue FmCallValue FACE x x x FmClearArgList FmClearArgList FACE x x x FmCreat
84. to a gadget Therefore you must not use such resources for any widget you wish to change to a gadget 5 16 2 The Resource List The Resources List displays the resources of the widget you are editing with an icon to indicate its value type You can open a text field to edit the resource The resources in the list can be sorted in various ways for example so that the ones 87 The Editing Boxes you use frequently are displayed first The icon next to the re source name indicates its value type Parent AS BB minRC Name le o SSS Class mabe SCS Templates eS ES EE 5552 Current selection W Auto position ss 3 y 3 O fapup BA Auto size w 48 h 17 Z Gadget Resource List lt Search f Callbacks positionindex 7 0 XmLabel accelerator 7 acceleratorText 7 alignment 7 alignment_beginning fontList Fradobe courier mediun r labelinsensitivePixmap C labelPixmap C labelString ninLin Inhalt Ten M nti ne Close Rebuild Set Values Edit Sort Undo Help Enter a value or the resource n the text field Or click on the ellipsis to open a specialized dit window for that resource Figure 5 21 The Resource List To edit a resource click on the resource line Clicking on the resource name also selects the resource The resource need not be selected in order to be edited This opens a text input field for entering a value The ellip
85. turn type of the function is Any which means that type checking will not be done on the result unless the appropriate type caster is used pix Pixmap ConvertString 5 SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Redefine the translation for lt KeyPress gt osfLeft some managers e g row column redefine the translation table for some keys such as osfLeft in that case you can t use the translation resource to redefine the translation table You can redefine it with a script such a this one in the widget s create call back t ConvertString self XmPushButton0 H override lt KeyPress gt osfLeft eval Beep TranslationTable self XmPushButton0 translations t SEE ALSO XtConvert XtConvertAndStore 214 C NAME FACE NAME FaceEvalString eval _ string SYNOPSIS int FaceEvalString Widget w String str Pointer param DESCRIPTION Interpret the FACE script whose text is in str a character string e g i 1 and return 1 if the script was incorrect Execution of an incorrect script caus es an error message to be sent to stderr This function is not available in the library libFm_c a widget is the reference widget i e the widget which determines the content of self and of parent It need not be otherwise related to the script being evaluated unless it is directly referenced by the script param is any parameter It has been declared here as an int but could be any legal FACE ty
86. widget class generation If the given type is used as the type of a new resource XFaceMaker will take the specified size as the size of the resource SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 312 C NAME FACE NAME FmNotEqualString not_equal SYNOPSIS Boolean FmNotEqualString String sl String s2 DESCRIPTION Returns true if strings s7 and s2 are different SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Print the string returned by the callbacks of a message box if it is not Cancel str PopupAndWait parent parent XmDialogShell0 XmMessageBox0 if not_equal str Cancel printf os n str SEE ALSO FmEqualString strcmp 313 C NAME FACE NAME FmPopupAndWait PopupAndWait SYNOPSIS String FmPopupAndWait Widget w DESCRIPTION Pops up the widget w and the program enters a local event handling loop un til the Return function is called The program then exits the local loop and returns the value passed as an argument to Return If the popup flag is set in the Resources Box and the shell is a TransientShell the shell grabs all events thus forcing the user to answer the popup box Note All possible return points must use Return to ensure the local event loop is exited properly The return value should not be freed if the argument passed to Return is statically allocated SCOPE FACE scripts EXAMPLE In a Pushbutton show a selectionBox print the string returned by the selec tionBox pushbutton callba
87. will enter this default set number for you and the message will be stored in that catalog Set numbers greater than or equal to 200 are reserved Command Displays the current command line OK Applies the options and closes the box Apply Applies the options and remains in the box Reset Returns the box to the previous values Default Returns the box to the default values 80 The Print Options Box 5 14 The Print Options Box The Print Options box is used to create a postscript file for printing your interface Open it by clicking on Print in the Options menu Size width a inches height 0 5 inches Position top 0 25 inches left 10 25 inches Orientation landscape portrait Scale Factor fl Gray Scale Size 1x1 Q 2x2 4 3x3 Q 4x4 Print Delay Al seconds Command xpr device ps top 0 25 left 0 25 _oK Apply aose Reset Default Help Figure 5 18 The Print Options Box You can set the following options by entering values and clicking the Apply button width The page width in inches default value 8 height The page height in inches default value 10 5 top The page top offset in inches default value 0 left The page left hand side offset in inches default value 0 landscape Prints the window in landscape mode default Landscape orientation is a page that is wider than it is tall portrait Prints the window in portrait mode Portrait orientation is
88. with its internal representation SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Taken from the DragDrop example in the distribution FmArgList arglist FmNewArgList FmAddArg arglist pixmap FmGetPixmap self letters bm FmAddArg arglist mask ConvertString self letters_m bm Bitmap Widget source_icon FmCreateDraglIcon self source arglist FmClearArgList arglist SEE ALSO FmNewArgList FmClearArgList FmFreeArgList 219 C NAME FACE NAME FmAddBootFile none SYNOPSIS None FmAddBootFile char filename DESCRIPTION Specify additional fm files that must be loaded after the Fm fm file as part of the XFaceMaker user interface FmAddBootFile is not available in the library libFm c a SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 220 C NAME FACE NAME FmAddEnumeratedType none SYNOPSIS Boolean FmAddEnumeratedType char type char values int offset char prefix DESCRIPTION When adding a new widget class to XFaceMaker FnAddEnumeratedType can be used to add a new enumerated resource type instead of FmAdd ResourceType This allows a prefix to be defined for the enumeration values in place of the default Xm The function returns 1 on success 0 on failure type specifies the representation name of the new resource type i e XtRNew Type XmRNewType or XNewRNewType values is a character string that defines the string values of the enumeration each value must end with the character n For
89. your editing window when you click the on the de sired widget 94 The Resources Box 5 16 6 The Sort Order Window This window provides options for sorting and displaying resources in the Resources list Sort options are saved when you select the Save Prefs command in the File menu XFaceMaker Current Widge Parent AS BB minRC Name A Class Ema o Templates Standardrgcolo O OO O E Current selection Preferred Resources Sort Order alphabetical V by subclass by superclass Place XFM resources at top bottom Place active values at top bottom Resource Name or Type _ Gather set resources Add Replace Delete E Show template resources E Show restricted resources J Show only preferred resources Set Default Figure 5 27 The Sort Order Window The Sort Order window has the following fields Preferred Resources This field displays the list of preferred resources that you have chosen for the widget you are editing The list is established by entering the re source name in the Resource Name or Type field and clicking Add You can also delete or replace resources in this list Show only preferred resources When this checkbutton is set and applied only pre ferred resources will be displayed in the Resources list Resource Name or Type A text input field for entering a resource name to be added or deleted from the Preferred Resources list Add Clic
90. 0 The Group Name Box 0 0 eee teen ene 74 5 11 The Group File Selector Box 2 2 0 0 0 0 75 5 12 The Menu Editors anh ted d a tte a Aledds 76 5 12 1 Representation field 0 0 cee 76 5122The Dialog SECOM eros rorarii HAO d een e dl aedvegew daked bes 77 5 12 3 The Pushbuttons 2 04 2 ee eee 4a ne tele eee daw nes 79 5 13 Message Catalog Options Box 1 0 0 00 80 5 14 The Print Options Box inn aeS RAR RRR EER TREER As 81 5 15 RDB Options ss kd eee tte Pcie ed 4 tid wo nie Been ee 83 5 16 The Resources Box hsr tanine naaa a E A ett e ET 85 5 16 1 The Identification Section 2 0 cece eee 86 516 2 Fhe Resource Listy ortir gai p ox oy gels poaae pa taepex ales 87 5 16 3 The Fast Resource List 0 0 0 e cece eee ee 90 5 16 4 The Apply Options 0 0 0 0 91 5 16 5 The Resource Editing Window 2 00 0 e cece eee ee 93 5 16 6 The Sort Order Window 00sec cece eee eee 95 5 17 The Resource Edit BOXES sor esc ns b es eee ee ea Wiehe ee 97 5 17 11 The Boolean Boxee cscs cg haa renro oie oe dence ee ET Ea 97 5 17 2 The Colors Box Color Display 0 0 00 e eee eee 98 5 17 3 The Colors Box Monochrome Display 99 5 17 4 The Colors Box RGB Box 20 0 0 0 cece eee 101 5 17 5 The Enumeration Box 0 cece eee 103 5 17 6 PheFloat Box merti e ad ides ee ge eS Ae 104 SLT The wR ont
91. 0 4 Genappli Error Messages When genappli encounters an unrecoverable error it displays the line number where the error occurred and an error message You should first determine which pattern files you are working with then examine the faulty file correct the error then re is sue the command to generate your files Table 10 1 Application Generation Error Messages Error Constant Value Meaning ERR_NO_TMPL 100 no patterns found in file ERR NO NAME 101 no name found for pattern ERR NO KEY 102 no key ERR NO START 103 encountering end of pattern without a start ERR _NEST_USER 104 nested user parts not allowed ERR NO USER 105 encountering end of user part without a start ERR BAD LIST 106 incorrect list syntax ERR_LIST_ MISMATCH 107 list mismatch ERR PARSE ERROR 108 parse error ERR_CANT_READ_TMPL 109 cannot read pattern file ERR CANT READ DESC 110 cannot read description file ERR_ USAGE 111 incorrect program arguments ERR BAD COND 112 incorrect condition syntax ERR BAD IF 113 incorrect if or while syntax ERR IFLESS ENDIF 114 if less end if or while less end while ERR_IFLESS_ ELSE 115 if less ifelse ERR_IFLESS_ELSEIF 116 if less elseif ERR_BAD_PATT_CALL 117 incorrect pattern call ERR_BAD_DEPTH 118 incorrect depth specification in variable assign ment ERR BAD SUB_ PATT 119 Jincorrect s
92. 2 libXm 207 lib Xt 207 list icon 35 ListGetNthItem 294 ListGetNthSelectedItem 295 ListSetItems 297 literal strings 166 Load Extensions 18 local 125 lower icon 35 LowerWidget 308 LPATH 387 M malloc 165 mapped 389 member 53 memory 165 menu editing box 30 Menu Editor box 76 opening 30 Menu widgetstore 42 menu_bar 389 menu pulldown 389 menus 16 callbacks in 78 creating 76 message default set number 31 Message Catalog 31 message catalogs NLSPATH 387 message icons 44 Messages 20 Close Catalogs 21 Open Catalogs 21 methods 52 192 Modules menu 27 C class 28 Classes 28 Groups 27 Templates 27 monochrome displays 99 monoprocess 383 monoprocess 383 Motif 207 mouse button 4 in build mode 4 in Try mode 4 msg 381 msg 381 N names for widgets 130 New 16 New Resource Window 29 new_atray 148 361 new_c_array 148 362 new_struct 363 new_table 148 364 NewArgList 309 NewString 166 newxfm 384 next 150 365 NLSPATH 387 nocalleditor 378 nodebugface 384 nointerface 383 nointerface 383 None 124 nonlazy 377 nonuniquenames 379 nonuniquenames 86 379 not_equal 313 nowarnings 381 nowarnings 381 NSL DrawGadgets widgetstore 43 NSL widgetstore 43 NSL_LICENSE_HOST 387 425 NSL_LICENSE_ PORT 387 NSLHOME 388 O offsets 59 updating 32 On Version 34 onlyGen 384 onlygen 384 Open 16 options C code 61 Options menu 31 Auto Save State 32 C Code 31 Check MS Windows Porta
93. 4 0 lib xfm bitmaps Directories Files EPS AppShe11 b xfm bitmaps AppShell xpm b xfm bitmaps color 7 l Copy bm i E ee S m Selection Size 6 opt must par O lib xfm bitmaps Copy bi width p2 height ks 4 View Filter OK Rebuild Set Values Set Cancel Help Figure 5 36 The Pixmaps Box The Pixmaps box has the following fields A display window The display window displays the current pixmap Size The two size fields display the size of the pixmap and are not editable File Selection Window This windows enables you to select a pixmap in the standard Motif manner The window has two buttons View To display the pixmap Filter To filter the file names You specify the pattern in the Filter text field above and by pressing the Filter button the corresponding file names are dis 108 The Resource Edit Boxes played OK Registers any changes made to the current pixmap and applies them to the cur rent resource before closing the Images box Rebuild Applies the changes by rebuilding and remains in the editor Set Values Applies the changes by setting the values and remains in the editor Set Updates the value in the Resources list but does not apply it Cancel Returns to the main Resource window without changing values 5 17 10 The Pixmaps Table Box The Pixmaps Table box is used to enter a list of pixmaps for a resource When a re
94. 63 C NAME FACE NAME none new_table SYNOPSIS FaceArray new_table DESCRIPTION Create a new hash array SCOPE FACE scripts EXAMPLE Int b String new_table keyl key1 b keyl 1 key2 key2 b key2 2 String si first b 0 printf key first s n si printf first d n b si String s2 next b si 0 printf key second s n s2 printf second d n b s2 SEE ALSO new_array new_c_array 364 C NAME FACE NAME none next SYNOPSIS key_type next FaceArray a key_type p key_type k DESCRIPTION Return the next key in array a p is the previous key returned by first or next and k is the key to be returned if the end of the array is reached SCOPE FACE scripts EXAMPLE Int b String new_table keyl key1 b keyl 1 key2 key2 b key2 2 String si first b 0 printf key first s n si printf first Y d n b si String s2 next b si 0 printf key second s n s2 printf second d n b s2 SEE ALSO first size 365 C NAME FACE NAME printf printf SYNOPSIS None printf None f DESCRIPTION Call the C function printf No type checking is done SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 366 C NAME FACE NAME none random SYNOPSIS Int random Int num DESCRIPTION Return a random integer whose value lies between 0 and num SCOPE FACE scripts only EXAMPLE In a pushbutt
95. 99 11 2 13 The DisplayAccelerators Method 00000 199 11 2 14 The GeometryManager Method 0002 aes 199 11 2 15 The ChangeManaged Method 00 00 e eee 200 11 2 16 The InsertChild Method 2 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 200 11 2 17 The DeleteChild Method 00 0 e eee eee 200 11 3 Implementation 205 0005 ice eget bt Se a 201 11 3 1 The Class Record 0 0 2 na ea a E 201 vil 11 3 2 The Widget Instance Record 00 00 e eee eee 201 12 1 The Application Only Functions Table 0 00005 204 12 2 The FACE Functions Table 0 0 0 0 0c c eee 207 12 3 Function Reference Pages 0 0 ce eect cette 213 13 1 The Command Line Options 0 00 eee ee 377 13 1 1 General Options 0 e ete nee 377 13 1 2 Environment Options 0 0 0 0 cece ee ees 377 13 1 3 Editor Options oss e000 eek tea do hee ee ey eee ee 379 13 1 4 Compilation Options saesae 380 13 1 5 Dual Process Options 00 0 e cece eee eee 383 13 1 6 Application Generation Options 000s ee eee 384 13 1 7 Debug Options iarere rorun poesia ese epee esp ae de ree ec 384 13 1 8 XFaceMaker Extension Options 000 eee eee 384 13159 Standard X clients ni cet A oe A RA OR a SRS 385 17 1 Source and Configuration Files 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 eee e eee eee 393 17 2 Generating the
96. ACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmGetActiveValue FmAttachValue 282 C NAME FACE NAME FmGetVersionString GetVersionString SYNOPSIS String FmGetVersionString DESCRIPTION Return a string describing the version of XFaceMaker such as Version 3 0 When it is no longer needed the string can be freed using free SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Print the version of XFaceMaker tmp GetVersionString printf s n tmp free tmp SEE ALSO 283 C NAME FACE NAME FmGetXmDisplay FmGetXmDisplay SYNOPSIS Widget FmGetXmDisplay Widget w DESCRIPTION Call XmGetXmDisplay with widget w s display and return the global Xm Display widget id SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 284 C NAME FACE NAME FmGetXmScreen FmGetXmScreen SYNOPSIS Widget FmGetXmScreen Widget w DESCRIPTION Call XmGetXmScreen with Widget w s display and return the global Xm Screen widget id SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 285 C NAME FACE NAME FmHideWidget FmHideWidget Hide hide SYNOPSIS None FmHideWidget Widget w DESCRIPTION Hide widget w from the screen If w is a Shell widget then Hide unmaps the Shell If w is a Popup Shell then Hide calls XtPopdown on the shell Other wise Hide simply unmanages the Widget Note if the intent is to hide an Xm DialogShell w should refer to the DialogShell s child not to the shell itself because of the way Moti
97. ARGETMACH Name of the target operating system for compilation and link used in Makefile pattern TARGETMACHFILE Name of the configuration file Mk lt machine gt that should be used to compile and link used in Makefile pattern XFMNAME Name of the XFaceMaker executable used to generate the ap plication files CLASS Class of the interface s tope level object NUMAVS Number of global active values NUMNAMES Number of fm files in the interface COPTIONS C code generation options cflags option NAMES Base names of the fm files in the interface PROJECTFILE Name of the project file FILES Names of the fm files LCNAMES Names of the fm files lower case BASENAMES 0 Names of the fm files upper case 181 The Genappli Utility CREATENAMES 0 Creation names TOPOBJS 0 Types of toplevel objects MAPPED Mapped flag for topelevel objects PARENTPATHS 0 Paths in the Motif hierarchy of toplevel objects NUMUCLASSES Number of dynamic user classes added to this XFaceMaker UCLASSPREFIX User class prefix eprefix option UCLASSNAMES 0 User dynamic class names UCLASSFILES 0 File names for user dynamic classes UCLASSPATHS 0 Full path names for user dynamic classes NUMACLASSES Number of classes added statically to this XFace Maker ACLASSNAMES Names of classes added statically to this XFace Maker NUMUSEDACLASSES Number of added classes used in the in terface USEDACLASSNAMES 0 Names of added c
98. Accelerator w string moe GeometryManager parent w request geometry_return return o of w value ChangeManaged w z InsertChild parent w oe Ss of w DeleteChild parent w4 Zi 2 ofw Table 11 1 Class Method Arguments 1 is undefined value is in 2 Or 0 if called from Initialize 3 is undefined value is in 4 is undefined value is in 193 New Widget Classes 11 2 2 The ClassInitialize Method The ClassInitialize method can be used for doing one time initializations for the wid get class such as registering resource converters The default ClassInitialize method sets the Composite class part methods defined by the active values Geometry Man ager ChangeManaged InsertChild and DeleteChild if any for sub classes of Com posite If an active value with the name ClassInitialize exists for the model object of the class its Set script is called in the class_initialize method with a NULL argu ment Therefore must not be referenced 11 2 3 The Initialize Method The Initialize method of the new widget class does the following e adds the callbacks defined for the model object e creates the child widgets of the new widget instance according to the children of the model object if any exist e calls the creation callback for the new widget if one is defined e calls the Set scripts of all active value resources to initialize them see Section 11 2 4 e calls the Set script if an active value with the
99. Box Edit Appli Files Opens a cascade menu with a list of application files that can be edited Selecting one pops up an editing window in which you can modify the specified file The type of editing window that is opened vi emacs Wx etc is controlled by the FMEDITOR environment variable Functions Include Makefile XFM Main XFM Makefile Figure 4 11 The Edit Appli Files Menu 4 1 3 The View Menu Show Hide Raise Lower Expand Shrink Draw Attachments Figure 4 12 The View Menu The View Menu contains the following items 25 The Command Window Show A cascade menu provides the following choices Selection All Shells 26 Figure 4 13 The View Cascade Menu m Selection Makes the current selection visible m All Makes all current widgets visible selected or not m Shells Makes all shell widgets visible selected or not Hide When the interface is saved only those widgets that are not hidden will be marked as mapped in the file they will be visible when the interface is instanci ated by the application Before saving your interface you should hide any wid gets you do not want visible when the application starts up A cascade menu provides the following choices m Selection Hides the current selection m All Hides all widgets on the interface whether selected or not m Shells Hides all shell widgets Raise Moves the current widget selection to th
100. CE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 372 C NAME FACE NAME strcpy strcpy SYNOPSIS None strepy String targ String src DESCRIPTION Call the C function strcpy SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 373 C NAME FACE NAME strlen strlen SYNOPSIS Int strlen String src DESCRIPTION Call the C function strlen SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 374 C NAME strncmp SYNOPSIS Int strncmp String String Int DESCRIPTION FACE NAME strncmp Call the C function strncmp SCOPE FACE scripts EXAMPLE SEE ALSO application 375 376 CHAPTER 13 Command Line Options This chapter lists the command line options available for use in XFaceMaker Each option has an associated resource whose name is listed in bold 13 1 The Command Line Options The full command line is xfm options lt file gt fm or if you are loading XFM and the Draw Widget Library xfmwf options lt file gt fm 13 1 1 General Options help help Print the command line information given here lazy lazy Specify that XFaceMaker interface widgets are created when needed nonlazy lazy This is the opposite of lazy which is the default in this release If you specify nonlazy all the windows of XFaceMaker will be created at startup time otherwise they will be created the first time they are used postordermanage postOrderManage In interpreted mode specif
101. Callback w parent XmList0 for i 1 i lt w selectedItemCount 1 i 1 str ListGetNthSelectedItem w i printf selected item number d item s n i str free str j SEE ALSO FmListGetNthItem 295 C NAME FACE NAME FmListGetSelectedItems FmListGetSelectedItems SYNOPSIS String FmListGetSelectedItems Widget list DESCRIPTION Return the selected items in a list as a string of comma separated items list is the XmList widget SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmListGetNthSelectedItem 296 C NAME FACE NAME FmListSetItems ListSetItems SYNOPSIS None ListSetItems Widget list String items DESCRIPTION A convenience function used to set the items and itemCount resources of the XmList widget according to the items string items is a string containing comma separated items ListSetltems converts this string to an XmString Table and calls XtSetValues to set the items and itemCount resources SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Initialize a list in its create callback xfmCreateCallback ListSetItems self first second third fourth fifth sixth SEE ALSO FmListGetItems 297 C NAME FACE NAME FmLoad none SYNOPSIS Widget FmLoad char filename DESCRIPTION Load create and manage the interface contained in filename where filename is a fm file saved by the Save or Save As commands of XFaceMaker filena me must normally contain an ApplicationShel
102. ClassPartIni tialize method or NULL subclass_prototype is a pointer to the data with which the class structure should be initialized when creating a sub class of this class dynamically the Core structure need not be initialized and can be all 0s subclass_prototype_size is the size of the data pointed to by subclass_prototype 327 subclass_class_part_init is a pointer to the method to be stored in the class part initialize of the class FmSetSuperclassInfos returns 1 on success 0 on failure When using subclassed widgets created with XFaceMaker the generated C code file contains the function FmAddNameWidgetClass which calls FmAddWidgetClass with the appropriate values for the new widget class The compilation flag XFM enables this code to link the new widget with XFaceMaker Note however it is up to you to register resource converters that may be re quired by your new widget even if this is automatically done on widget in stantiation because XFaceMaker may have to parse the new resource types before this point The XFaceMaker Examples directory contains the sub classed widget exam ple TextValid SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 328 C NAME FACE NAME FmSetTallest FmSetTallest SYNOPSIS None FmSetTallest Widget we DESCRIPTION FmSetTallest sets the height of up to twelve widgets to that of the tallest wid get If the list contains less than twelve widgets you must put a null widget
103. DeactivateProtocol XmDestroyPixmap XmDragCancel XmDragStart XmDropSiteConfigureStackingOrder XmDropSiteEndUpdate XmDropSiteGetActiveVisuals XmDropSiteQueryStackingOrder XmDropSiteRegister XmDropSiteRetrieve XmDropSiteStartUpdate XmDropSiteUnregister XmDropSiteUpdate XmDropTransferAdd XmDropTransferStart XmFileSelectionBoxGetChild XmFileSelectionDoSearch XmFontListAdd XmFontListAppendEntry XmFontListCopy XmFontListCreate XmFontListEntryCreate XmFontListEntryFree 406 C Name FACE Name XmFontListEntryGetFont XmFontListEntryGetTag XmFontListEntryLoad XmFontListFree XmFontListFreeFontContext XmFontListGetNextFont XmFontListInitF ontContext XmFontListNextEntry XmFontListRemoveEntry XmGetAtomName XmGetColorCalculation XmGetColors XmGetDestination XmGetDragContext XmGetFocus Widget XmGetMenuCursor XmGetPixmap XmGetPixmapByDepth XmGetPostedFrom Widget XmGetSecondaryResourceData XmGetTabGroup XmGetTearOffControl XmGetVisibility XmGetXmDisplay XmGetXmScreen XmImGetXIM XmImMbLookupString XmImRegister XmImSetFocus Values XmImSetValues XmImUnregister XmImUnsetFocus XmFontListEntryGetFont XmFontListEntryGetTag XmFontListEntryLoad XmFontListFree XmFontListFreeF ontContext XmFontListGetNextFont XmFontListInitF ontContext XmFontListNextEntry XmFontListRemoveEntry XmGetAtomName XmGetColorCalculation XmGetColors XmGetDestination XmGetDragContext XmGetFocus Widget XmGetMenuCursor XmGetPixmap
104. E Compare an active value called File with the empty string GetActiveValue parent TextFile File if equal File Show root FileNameHelp SEE ALSO not_equal strcmp 268 C NAME FmFetchValue SYNOPSIS FACE NAME none Boolean FmFetchValue Widget char XtPointer XrmQuark int int int int int DESCRIPTION widget name address_return type_return storage_return scope_return immediate_return qutomatic_return genfun_return This function returns the attributes of a given active value for a given object If the active value is automatic not immediate and it is not yet attached the active value storage is allocated The contents of storage_return is one of the constants FM AV GLOBAL FM_AV_OBJECT or FM_AV_NONE de fined in Fm h The contents of scope return is one of the constants FM_AV_PUBLIC FM_AV_PRIVATE or FM_AV_PROTECTED defined in Fm h immediate_return automatic_return and genfun_return contain 0 or 1 The function returns True if the active value exists False otherwise This is the new version of FmGetActiveValueAddr and should be used instead of it SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmGetActiveValueAddr 269 C NAME FACE NAME FmFetchValueAddress none SYNOPSIS int FmFetchValueAddress Widget widget char name XtArgVal value return String type_return DESCRIPTION This function fetches the address attached to the specified active value an
105. E integer constants can only be input in decimal form They have the FACE type Int Floating point constants begin with an optional minus sign followed by a se quence of decimal digits 0 9 a dot character and a second sequence of decimal digits FACE floating point constants do not have an exponent part They have the FACE type Float FACE character string constants are placed within optional single or double quotes A string which does not include blanks does not have to be placed between quotes but it is good practice to always quote strings if a variable with the same name exists an unquoted string is assumed to refer to the variable though you may have intended it to be a string Strings which contain blank characters must be quoted The single and double quote characters may also be escaped within a string with backslash A quoted string may contain the other quote character unescaped The memory holding a string constant is allocated by the FACE interpreter the first time the script in which the string appears is parsed and the same memory is re used each time the script is interpreted Thus modifications made to FACE string con stants remain in place FACE character string constants have the FACE type String 124 Basic Objects These are examples of FACE integer floating point and character string constants 1234 5678 12 34 56 78 Hello Hello world Hello world Awakening he said Hello
106. EXAMPLE See PopupAndWait example In the SelectionBox applyCallback return the selected string str GetString self textString Return self str SEE ALSO FmPopupAndWait FmWaitForReturn 320 C NAME FACENAME FmSendClick SendClick send_click SYNOPSIS None FmSendClick Widget w DESCRIPTION Send a Bin Down event followed by a Btn Up event to widget w This sim ulates a click on the Se ect button SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Activate the sibling Cancel button SendClick parent Cancel SEE ALSO 321 C NAME FACE NAME FmSendMessage SendMessage SYNOPSIS Int FmSendMessage Widget w String type String data DESCRIPTION Send a ClientMessage event to Widget w The message_type field of the event is the Atom form of type and the first word of the data field is data The return value is that of the call to the XSendEvent function SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE A pushButton sends a client message to a label SendMessage parent XmLabel0 String Y The label receiving the client message changes its labelString to the character passed with SendMessage translations override lt ClientMessage gt eval XClientMessageEvent ev n ev n buf n sprintf buf c ev gt data_b0 n self labelString buf SEE ALSO XSendEvent 322 C NAME FACENAME FmSetActiveValue SetActiveValue SYNOPSIS Boolean FmSetActiveValue Widget w String name DESCR
107. Editing Boxes 5 1 3 Drop Site An active value whose usage is set as drop site names a target accepted by the widget as a drop site nae z XFace aker Active Values Ami Usage interface Q drag source drop site Q widget class C class Drop Targets Get Script Custom Editor Cear _ uL Set Script Custom Editor H a Drop Target Name Eee e Ada Repiace betete l F Figure 5 3 Drop Site Drop Targets A display box listing the targets specified as drop sites for the selected widget Drop Target Name Used to specify the name of a target accepted by the selected widget as a drop site List Pops up a selection box of possible drop sites Select ing one enters it in the Drop Target Name field The Drop Target Selector is used to select a drag and drop target from a list of com monly accepted selection targets as defined in the Inter Client Communication Convention Manual by the X Consortium Open the box by clicking on the List button in the Active Values box 50 The Active Values Box 5 1 4 Widget Class An active value whose usage is set to widget class defines a resource for a widget class To edit an active value of this kind you must first select the top level widget of the class Specify the class name and class icon they are associated to the widget Then define as many resources as you like for this class and
108. EnumeratedType is a special version of FmAddResource Type for enumerated types only type specifies the representation name of the new resource type i e XtRNewType XmRNewType or XNewRNewType get_value defines how the current resource value is to be retrieved RT_WIDGET the current value of the resource is retrieved from the wid get using XtGetValues RT_OBJECT the current value is fetched from the resources of the XFaceMaker object and avtype must be RT_STRING RT_WIDGET is valid only for integer or string resources for other re sources RT_OBJECT must be used avtype specifies how XFaceMaker will allocate the storage that will be at tached to the active value avname RT_INTEGER The active value associated to the resource type will be attached to the address of a memory location large enough to hold an in teger or a pointer RT_STRING The active value associated to the resource type will be at tached to the address of an 8 KBytes buffer holding the value of the re source as a string Thus for integer or other immediate resources like floats the value will be the contents of the Active Value variable whereas for string resources the string value is avname specifies the name of the active value attached to the resource type If avname is NULL then the type parameter is used boxname specifies the name of a Shell widget in the XFaceMaker interface to pop up when a resource of this type is to be edited T
109. FmReturn FmSendClick FmSendMessage FmSetActiveValue FmSetActiveValueTimeOut FmSetTallest FmSetValue FmSetWidest FmShowPopup FmShowWidget FmStartCursorDrag FmStartSimpleDrag FmStopTimeOut Fm Wait FmWaitForReturn Fm WarpPointer Fm Widest FmWidgetName SuperclassDeleteChild SuperclassExpose SuperclassInsertChild SuperclassRealize ListGetNthItem ListGetNthSelectedItem FmListGetSelectedItems ListSetItems LowerWidget FmNewArgList NewArgList not_equal PopupAndWait Raise Widget FmRegisterSimpleDropSite Return SendClick send_click SendMessage SetActive Value SetActiveValueTimeOut FmSetTallest FmSetValue FmSetWidest ShowPopup Show show FmStartCursorDrag FmStartSimpleDrag StartSimpleDrag StopTimeOut wait WaitForReturn WarpPointer Widest WidgetName SuperclassDeleteChild SuperclassExpose SuperclassInsertChild SuperclassRealize C Name FACE Name SuperclassResize SuperclassResize Motif Functions C Name FACE Name XmActivateProtocol XmActivateProtocol XmAddProtocolCallback XmAddProtocolCallback XmAddProtocols XmAddProtocols XmAddTabGroup XmAddTabGroup XmCascadeButtonGadgetHighlight XmCascadeButtonHighlight XmChangeColor XmClipboardBeginCopy XmClipboardCancelCopy XmClipboardCopy XmClipboardCopyByName XmClipboardEndCopy XmClipboardEndRetrieve XmClipboardInquireCount XmClipboardInquireFormat XmClipboardInquireLength XmClipboardInquirePendingltems XmClipboard
110. Getting the Address of an Array The function data can be used to pass the address of a linear FACE array that is an array created with new_array or new_c_array to an application function data re turns a pointer to the actual data contained in the array It takes one argument which is the variable holding the array For example String t Int new_array t 0 Hello t 1 World MyFunction data t MyFunction receives a regular C array 6 11 7 Clearing an Array The clear function deletes all entries in an array but not the array itself clear a The array is then as if it had just been allocated When an initialized linear array is cleared the C array passed to new_c_array is not freed It is not possible to delete a particular entry of an array instead the default value of the array can be stored as the element value In that case the first or next functions will return a valid key which will yield the default value 151 The FACE Language 6 12 Structures A FACE structure is similar to a C structure except that FACE provides access only to structure pointers A structure can be declared either from the C code of an appli cation or inside a FACE script 6 12 1 Declaring a Structure from a C application To declare a structure of your application which you want to be able to use in FACE scripts use the FmRegisterStructures function int FmRegisterStructures FmStructDesc structs int num_struct
111. IPTION Call the set script of active value name for widget w If name is null calls the set scripts of all active values defined for w regardless of their names If w is null calls the set scripts of all active values called name regardless of the wid get they are defined for If at least one script was called it returns 1 other wise 0 SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Activate the set script for active value fval in widget parent SB SetActiveValue parent SB fval Activate the set script for active value fval in all widgets SetActive Value Widget 0 fval SEE ALSO FmGetActiveValue FmSetActiveValueTimeOut FmSetValue 323 C NAME FACE NAME FmSetActiveValueTimeOut SetActiveValueTimeOut SYNOPSIS TimeOutClosure FmSetActive ValueTimeOut Widget w String name Int interval DESCRIPTION Initialize a timeout so that the set script of active value name is called in in terval milliseconds by SetActiveValue w name It returns a handle to a tim eout identifier The timeout can be stopped with FmStopTimeOut to which the handle is passed Note The parameter w must not be null but name can be SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE See the example for FmGetActiveValueTimeOut SEE ALSO FmStopTimeOut FmGetActiveValueTimeOut 324 C NAME FACE NAME FmSetCloseHandler none SYNOPSIS CloseHandPfn FmSetCloseHandler CloseHandPfn function DESCRIPTION Used to augment or override the default close
112. IPTION Convert a floating point number to an integer SCOPE FACE scripts EXAMPLE Perform a calculation in Float and convert to Int Float ymin Float ymax Float y Int v min self sliderMin max self sliderMax v cftoi y ymin citof max min ymax ymin SEE ALSO citof 353 C NAME FACE NAME none citof SYNOPSIS Float citof Int i DESCRIPTION Convert an integer to a floating point number SCOPE FACE scripts EXAMPLE Perform a calculation in Float and convert to Int Float ymin Float ymax Float y Int v min self sliderMin max self sliderMax v cftoi y ymin citof max min ymax ymin SEE ALSO cftoi 354 C NAME FACE NAME none clear SYNOPSIS None clear FaceArray a DESCRIPTION Delete all entries in array a but not the array itself SCOPE FACE scripts EXAMPLE Clear a FACE array that has been declared elsewhere global FaceArray a clear a SEE ALSO destroy 355 C NAME FACE NAME none cstoi SYNOPSIS Int cstoi Int value DESCRIPTION Convert a short value to an integer Although FACE always uses XtArgVal sized integers cstoi returns an integer within the appropriate range for a short SCOPE FACE scripts EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 356 C NAME FACE NAME none data SYNOPSIS Pointer data FaceArray a DESCRIPTION Return a pointer to the data in FaceArray a SCOPE FACE scripts EXAMPLE Get the addre
113. If you do not specify automat ic allocation the contents of the active value is not accessible in Try mode Note that if you specify a default value for an active value of type String XFaceMaker will always allocate storage Access You must decide whether your FACE script will refer to the contents of the 48 active value via the special variable or by its immediate value using If by immediate value select the checkbutton marked immediate The Active Values Box 5 1 2 Drag Source An active value whose usage is set to drag source defines a target the widget can export in a Motif Drag amp Drop operation XFaceMakert Active Values cial Usage Q interface drag source Q drop site Q widget class Q C class konma X Drag Types Get Script Custom Editor Clear et Set Script Custom Editor Cear Drag Type Name Figure 5 2 Drag Source Icon Pixmap Used to enter the name of a pixmap that the pointer changes to when you start a drag operation The ellipsis pops up the Pixmap editor for defining a pixmap Drag Type Name Used to enter the type of target that the selected widget can export The List button pops up the Drag Target Selector which contains alist of com monly accepted selection targets defined in the ICCCM Select a drag target from the list then click on the OK button A widget can have more than one target 49 The
114. LMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ amp 0 0123456789 lt gt OK Rebuild Set Values Set Cancel Figure 5 34 The Fonts Box The Fonts box has the following fields Font Families Displays a list of the font families currently available for the resource listed above the display field When you select a font family from this list a sam ple of it is displayed in the box below the Name field Miscellaneous Fonts A list of further available font families When you select a font family from this list a sample of it is displayed in the box below the Name field 105 The Editing Boxes Weight This option menu lists the weight or intensity options for the font charac ters Style This option menu lists the slant options for the font Size This option menu lists the type sizes available for the font Name Displays the name of the selected font or can be used to enter a font name di rectly OK Applies the specified value to the resource and returns to the main Resource win dow Rebuild Makes the changes by rebuilding and remains in the editor Set Values Makes the changes by setting the values and remains in the editor Set Updates the value in the Resources list but does not apply it Cancel Returns to the previous window without changing the value 106 The Resource Edit Boxes 5 17 8 The Integer Box The Integer box is used to edit resources that require an integer value To open
115. Lock XmClipboardRegisterFormat XmClipboardRetrieve XmClipboardStartCopy XmClipboardStartRetrieve XmClipboardUndoCopy XmClipboardUnlock XmClipboard WithdrawFormat XmCommandAppendValue XmCascadeButtonGadgetHighlight XmCascadeButtonHighlight XmChangeColor XmClipboardBeginCopy XmClipboardCancelCopy XmClipboardCopy XmClipboardCopyByName XmClipboardEndCopy XmClipboardEndRetrieve XmClipboardInquireCount XmClipboardInquireFormat XmClipboardInquireLength XmClipboardInquirePendingltems XmClipboardLock XmClipboardRegisterF ormat XmClipboardRetrieve XmClipboardStartCopy XmClipboardStartRetrieve XmClipboardUndoCopy XmClipboardUnlock XmClipboardWithdrawFormat XmCommandAppendValue 403 C Name FACE Name XmCommandError XmCommandError XmCommandGetChild XmCommandGetChild XmCommandSetValue XmCommandSetValue XmConvertUnits XmConvertUnits XmCreateArrowButton XmCreateArrowButton XmCreateArrowButtonGadget XmCreateBulletinBoard XmCreateBulletinBoardDialog XmCreateCascadeButton XmCreateCascadeButtonGadget XmCreateCommand XmCreateCommandDialog XmCreateDialogShell XmCreateDragicon XmCreateDrawingArea XmCreateDrawnButton XmCreateErrorDialog XmCreateFileSelectionBox XmCreateFileSelectionDialog XmCreateForm XmCreateFormDialog XmCreateFrame XmCreateInformationDialog XmCreateLabel XmCreateLabelGadget XmCreateList XmCreateMainWindow XmCreateMenuBar XmCreateMenuShell XmCreateMessageBox XmCreateMessageDialog XmCreateOpti
116. ME FACE NAME FmAddWidgetClass none SYNOPSIS Boolean FmAddWidgetClass WidgetClass widget class WidgetClass gadget_class FmWidgetType type unsigned long flags char default_resources char include_file char class_ref char gadget_class_ref XtResourceList sub_resources Cardinal num_sub_resources char icon_bitmap_file DESCRIPTION 230 Add a new widget class to the set of classes that already XFaceMaker already knows The parameters to the function describe the characteristics of the new class All these parameters can be 0 which specifies the default case except widget_class which must be non zero FnAddWidgetClass returns 1 on suc cess 0 on failure Once a new Widget class is added it can be used in XFaceMaker exactly in the same way as standard OSF Motif classes The only difference being that unless the function FmAddResourceType or FmAddEnumeratedType is used to define resource types for the new widget resources that have a type which is not known by XFaceMaker will be edited with the String resource edit box widget_class is the address of the WidgetClass pointer defined in the header file of the new class For instance amp myNew WidgetClass gadget_class is the address of the GadgetClass pointer if the new class sup ports gadgets 0 otherwise type specifies what category the new widget class belongs to Primitive Composite etc The possible values are FM_PRIMITIVE for a Pri
117. Maker will not specify x and y settings Any previous settings for the x and y resources in the Resource Editor are removed You could for example use this option for a button whose position is defined by its attachment resources and whose x and y resources are therefore not required This also reduces the size of the fm or C code file generated Auto Pos and Auto Size may be applied to several widgets at once or to the whole in terface by using the menu item Auto Pos Size in the Edit menu x and y Indicate the position of the upper left corner of the widget relative to the composite or shell widget that contains it or if it is a shell widget to the upper left corner of the display The x axis increases from left to right and the y axis downwards All measure ments are in pixels The previously described Auto position option may override these fields There is no 3 d shadowing in these fields when Auto pos is set 86 The Resources Box Auto size When this checkbutton is set and applied XFaceMaker will not specify w and h settings For example you might use this option for a label that should default to the size of its labelString resource or for an XmList contained within an XmScrolled Window Any previous settings for the width and height resources in the Resource Editor box are removed when Auto Size is set This also reduces the size of the fm or C code file generated Note that Auto Pos and Auto Size may be applied to se
118. Mouse We assume you are using a three button mouse If not you need to know which com binations of keyboard and mouse actions correspond to Select Menu and Custom Mouse buttons Mouse buttons respond differently in Build mode and in Try mode In Build mode the mouse buttons are used as follows Button1 Select Used to select deselect widgets on the desktop or in the Widget List or Tree to select menu items open a menu or drag Button2 Menu Used to select widgets on the desktop and popup the Resources or the Resource Editor boxes Button3 Custom Used to select the parent of the current widget In Try mode most button actions are determined by the widget resources and call backs defined for the particular interface By default PopupMenus are popped up us ing the Custom button Mouse actions This manual uses the following terms for mouse actions Press Hold down a mouse button Click and double click Quickly press and release once click or twice double click the Select mouse button without moving the mouse Clicking selects Dou ble clicking is for editing actions Shift click Hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button Drag Move the mouse while pressing the Select mouse button Rubber band A rectangular outline displayed when the cursor is dragged One corner is fixed at the point where the button was pressed and the opposite corner follows the pointer Releasing the button creates a rectangle
119. NewPredefinedVariable none SYNOPSIS int FmNewPredefinedVariable String name XtArgVal value String type DESCRIPTION Declares a new predefined FACE variable Its effect is equivalent to typing define lt name gt lt value gt in a FACE script but it allows you to specify a type other than Int or String This function is useful for declaring pre defined val ues for a new resource type SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE Define a Float value static XtArgVal _ftov _ if NeedFunctionPrototypes float f else f float f endif float _f f XtArgVal v float amp v _f return v FmNewPredefinedVariable UNDEFINED _ftov_ UNDEFINED_FLOAT Float SEE ALSO 310 C NAME FACE NAME FmNewType none SYNOPSIS void FmNewType String type DESCRIPTION Declare a new predefined FACE type Its effect is equivalent to typing type lt type gt in a FACE script SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 311 C NAME FACE NAME FmNewTypeDef none SYNOPSIS int FmNewTypeDef String type String ctype int size DESCRIPTION Has an effect similar to the FACE keyword type Useful when you want to build a new instance of XFaceMaker with additional built in functions Is equivalent to the new type construct FmNewTypeDef MyType struct my_type sizeof structmy_type The third argument specifies the size of the C type in bytes This is not used for C C prototyping but for
120. ON Return the items in a list as a string of comma separated items list is the XmList widget ID SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE str FmListGetItems parent Li printf items s n str free str SEE ALSO FmListSetItems 293 C NAME FACE NAME FmListGetNthItem ListGetNthItem SYNOPSIS String FmListGetNthItem Widget list Int position DESCRIPTION A convenience function used to get the n th item of an XmList widget where position is last 0 first 1 second 2 etc Returns a pointer to a character string which should be freed when no longer needed or NULL if the item is not found SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Print the content of a list widget from a sibling pushbutton activateCallback w parent XmList0 for G 1 i lt w itemCount i i 1 str ListGetNthItem w i printf os n str free str SEE ALSO FmListGetNthSelectedItem 294 C NAME FACE NAME FmListGetNthSelectedItem ListGetNthSelectedItem SYNOPSIS String FmListGetNthSelectedItem Widget list Int position DESCRIPTION A convenience function used to get the n th selected item of an XmList wid get where position is last 0 first 1 second 2 selected item etc It returns a pointer to the character string which should be freed when no longer needed or NULL if the item is not found SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Print the selected items of a list from a sibling pushbutton activate
121. Set values List Sort Undo Help Figure 5 26 The Resource Editing Window The Resource Editing window has the following fields A display window that displays resources and callbacks If you open it with the Edit button it displays all the resources and callbacks that have been specified for the se lected widget You can edit resources directly in this window If you open it for a callback it displays and lets you edit only the callback for which it has been opened In both cases you can open the custom editor to do your editing in your favorite ed itor rather than in the default scrolledText Close Only if the resource editor was opened with the Edit button Closes the Re sources window Rebuild Applies the specified resources by rebuilding Set Values Applies the resources by setting values 93 The Editing Boxes List Only if the resource editor was opened with the Edit button Changes back to the Resource List Sort Only if the resource editor was opened with the Edit button Changes to the Sort Order window Undo Only if the resource editor was opened with the Edit button Undoes the last resource modification Select Only if the resource editor was opened to edit a specific callback Clicking on the button changes the cursor to the cursor with which you can select the wid get that you want to access within your callback The relative path to the widget will be pasted directly in
122. SetValues FACE x x x Show FmShowWidget FACE x x x ShowPopup FmShowPopup FACE x x x StartSimpleDrag FmStartSimpleDrag FACE x x x StopTimeOut FmStopTimeOut FACE x x x SuperclassDeleteChild SuperclassDeleteChild FACE x x SuperclassExpose SuperclassExpose FACE x x SuperclassInsertChild SuperclassInsertChild FACE x x SuperclassRealize SuperclassRealize FACE x x SuperclassResize SuperclassResize FACE x x UnmanageChild XtUnmanageChild Xt x UnmapWidget XtUnmapWidget Xt x WaitForReturn FmWaitForReturn FACE WarpPointer FmWarpPointer FACE WidgetName FmWidgetName FACE x x atoi atoi C x breakpoint FACE x callback XtCallCallbacks Xt x cbtoi FACE cftoi FACE citof FACE clear FACE cstoi FACE data FACE x x destroy FACE x x Table 12 2 FACE Functions 210 FACE name C name Class Xm Xt Fm Fm_c Fm_e dtoi FmDtoi FACE equal FmEqualString FACE eval_string FaceEvalString FACE x x close fclose C gets fgets C x first FACE x x x open fopen C x puts fputs C x ree free C x scanf fscanf G x toi FmFtoi FACE x x x hide FmHideWidget FACE x x x init_timer FacelnitTimer FACE x x itoa Fmltoa FACE x x x itod Fmltod FACE x x x itof Fmltof FACE x x x malloc malloc C x new_array FACE x x x new_c_atray FACE x x x not_equal FmNotEqualString FACE x x x new_ struct FACE x x x new_table FACE x x x next FACE x x x
123. Status indicator 44 step by step mode 71 stop_timer 218 StopTimeOut 339 storage 47 Store Widgets 62 strcat 371 stremp 372 strepy 373 String box 111 strings internationalizing 111 strlen 374 strncmp 375 structures 152 160 169 170 superclass resources 188 SuperclassDeleteChild 200 346 SuperclassExpose 197 347 SuperclassInsertChild 200 348 SuperclassRealize 198 SuperclassResize 197 349 support 7 synchronous 384 synchronous 384 T target drag and drop 50 in drag amp drop 49 50 targetEnvironment 384 targets 384 technical support 7 template 86 390 apply 23 unapply 24 Template Mode box 116 templates loading saving editing 27 naming 112 selecting a mode 116 Templates widgetstore 43 token 378 token 378 Toolkit 41 toolkit 383 toolkitClasses 383 toplevel keyword 129 TopLevelShell 129 track icon 35 Track widget 22 TransientShell 129 translation table 112 translations augment mode 112 override mode 112 replace mode 112 Translations box 112 tree icon 35 trusted 383 trusted 383 Trusted state 12 try 379 try 379 Try mode 37 type keyword 135 type casters 134 159 type checking 123 134 type conversion 135 U UIL UIL options 31 117 uil 382 uil 382 UIL file 117 uildialogs 382 uildialogs 382 429 Undo 22 undo 379 undo 379 ungadgetize 23 Update Offsets on Move 32 user begin 179 end 179 User defined widgetstore 42 y variables 125 global 126 loc
124. StringNConcat XmStringNCopy XmStringPeekNextComponent XmStringSegmentCreate XmStringSeparatorCreate XmString Width XmTargetsAreCompatible XmTextClearSelection XmTextCopy XmTextCut XmTextDisableRedisplay XmTextEnableRedisplay XmTextFieldClearSelection XmTextFieldCopy XmTextFieldCut XmTextFieldGetAddMode XmTextFieldGetBaseline XmTextFieldGetCursorPosition XmTextFieldGetEditable XmTextFieldGetInsertionPosition XmTextFieldGetLastPosition XmTextFieldGetMaxLength XmTextFieldGetSelection XmTextFieldGetSelectionPosition XmTextFieldGetSelectionWcs XmStringGetNextSegment XmStringHasSubstring XmStringHeight XmStringInitContext XmStringLength XmStringLineCount XmStringLtoRCreate XmStringNConcat XmStringNCopy XmStringPeekNextComponent XmStringSegmentCreate XmStringSeparatorCreate XmString Width XmTargetsAreCompatible XmTextClearSelection XmTextCopy XmTextCut XmTextDisableRedisplay XmTextEnableRedisplay XmTextFieldClearSelection XmTextFieldCopy XmTextFieldCut XmTextFieldGetAddMode XmTextFieldGetBaseline XmTextFieldGetCursorPosition XmTextFieldGetEditable XmTextFieldGetInsertionPosition XmTextFieldGetLastPosition XmTextFieldGetMaxLength XmTextFieldGetSelection XmTextFieldGetSelectionPosition XmTextFieldGetSelectionWcs 411 C Name FACE Name XmTextFieldGetString XmTextFieldGetStringWcs XmTextFieldGetSubstring XmTextFieldGetSubstringWcs XmTextFieldInsert XmTextFieldInsertWes XmTextFieldPaste XmTe
125. Subsequent Save or Save As com mands will save the hierarchy to this file Save Project As Pops up the File Selector and saves the main and secondary files of an interface as a project fmp file A project file is a FACE file which contains commands to load the main and secondary files of the interface Save Appli Files Opens a cascade menu used to select application files that XFaceMaker will generate a All Main Functions Include Makefile New XFM Custom Figure 4 3 The Save Appli Files Menu The available options are m All Generates the four next files listed below Main Functions Include and Makefile needed to build an application If you have made a project file for your interface you should generate the application files for the project first load the fmp file not just for an individual fm file of your project Before generating the application files make sure that you have set the Preserve User Code flag as you want it and the proper C code generating options as well as the required UIL RDB Message Catalog flags Please refer to Section 4 1 6 The Options Menu The Command Window 18 m Main Generates a C file called lt Name gt Main c containing the main function of the application lt Name gt is the name of the fmp or fm file that is loaded m Functions Generates a C file called lt Name gt App c containing the skeletons of the application functions as well as the global
126. TION Return the descriptor of the catalog named name or 1 if it is not open Non GLS machines return 1 SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 245 C NAME FACE NAME FmCatGetS none SYNOPSIS String FmCatGetS int setn int msgn char dfit DESCRIPTION Is equivalent to catgets except that it looks for the specified message in all message catalogs opened using FmCatOpen The message catalogs are searched in the reverse order of the opening order Non GLS machines return dfit SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmCatOpen 246 C NAME FACE NAME FmCatOpen none SYNOPSIS nl_catd FmCatOpen char s1 int i DESCRIPTION Perform the equivalent of the Load Catalog command si specifies the catalog name i is currently unused and should be set to 0 The return value is the value re turned by catopen As the application opens catalogs with this function the catalog descriptors are stored by XFaceMaker so that the interface message strings are fetched in the message catalogs that the application has opened Non GLS machines return 1 SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmCatClose FmCatGetS 247 C NAME FACE NAME FmChangeValueAddress none SYNOPSIS int FmChangeValueAddress Widget widget char avname XtArgVal value String type DESCRIPTION This function changes the address attached to the specified active value and associated with the specified widget and calls the set
127. ULT _CHARSET Calls XmStringGetLtoR When it is no longer needed the string can be freed using free SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Declare and initialize a FACE array to contain the items of an XmList widget print its contents XmString a Int count parent XmList0 itemCount a new_c_array Pointer parent XmList0 items count for 0 i lt count i i 1 printf index d item s n 1 F mGetString a 1 SEE ALSO FmCreateXmString 280 C NAME FACE NAME FmGetStringFromTable FmGetStringFromTable SYNOPSIS String FmGetStringFromTable XmStringTable table DESCRIPTION FmGetStringFromTable returns the first string in an XmStringTable table is the XmStringTable SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE parent TF value FmGetStringFromTable parent Li items SEE ALSO 281 C NAME FACE NAME FmGetValue FmGetValue SYNOPSIS Boolean FmGetValue Widget widget char name XtPointer address DESCRIPTION This function calls the get script of the specified active value for the specified widget passing it the specified address as the argument This function is similar to FmGetActiveValue but allows you to specify the attached address for each call widget is the widget in which the active value has been defined name is the name of the active value address is the address to be passed as to the active value get script Returns True if the get script is executed False otherwise SCOPE F
128. Widget NULL after the last widget SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmSetWidest 329 C NAME FACE NAME FmSetToplevel none SYNOPSIS void FmSetToplevel Widget toplevel DESCRIPTION Switch to a different display in multi display applications The current dis play becomes that of toplevel SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmSetToplevell FmSetToplevelC 330 C NAME FACE NAME FmSetToplevelC none SYNOPSIS void FmSetToplevelC Widget toplevel DESCRIPTION A specific version of FmSetToplevel defined in the Fm_c library SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 331 C NAME FACE NAME FmSetToplevell none SYNOPSIS void FmSetToplevell Widget toplevel DESCRIPTION A specific version of FmSetToplevel defined in the Fm_e and Fm libraries SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 332 C NAME FACE NAME FmSetValue FmSetValue SYNOPSIS Boolean FmSetValue Widget widget char name XtPointer address DESCRIPTION This function calls the set script of the specified active value for the specified widget passing it the specified address as the argument This function is similar to FmSetActiveValue but allows to specify the attached address for each call widget is the widget ID of the widget where the active value is defined name is the name of the active value address is the address corresponding to the active value SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE
129. XFace Maker User s Guide 187 New Widget Classes 11 1 Widget Class Resources A new widget class generated by XFaceMaker has two kinds of resources e superclass resources tesources inherited from the model object of the class with different default values e new resources resources defined through the active value mechanism 11 1 1 Superclass Resources When XFaceMaker generates a class definition file every resource that was speci fied for the model object of the new widget class is included The resource definition is a copy of the original resource definition in the superclass except for the default_type and default_addr fields which are set according to the value specified for the object For example suppose you create an XmPushButton set the background resource to red and save it as a new class PushButton This new widget class has a back ground resource with the same type size representation and offset as the original Core background resource but with a default value of red This value can still be overridden by any of the usual means such as resource database files or widget cre ation arguments The callbacks of the model object are not added to the resource list but set in the Ini tialize method using XtAddCallback The translations resource is also handled in a special way e Ifthe translation table begins with replace or with a character other than the translation table is simply
130. XFaceMaker UIMS Version 4 0 Motif2 1 Reference Manual Nova Software Labs Copyright Nova Software Labs S A R L 1993 2002 All rights reserved No part of this document may be stored in a retrieval system transmitted or oth erwise copied or reproduced by any electronic mechanical photographic or recording process with out express written permission from Nova Software Labs S A R L Published by N L Nova Software labs Nova Software Labs 8 rue de Hanovre 75002 Paris France Tel 33 1 58 18 61 61 Fax 33 158 18 61 60 email sales NovaSoftwareLabs com or sales nsl fr Web http www NovaSoftwareLabs com or http www nsl fr Every precaution has been taken to ensure the accuracy of this document Nova Software Labs S A R L assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions or for damages resulting from the use of this document XFaceMaker is a registered trademark of Nova Software Labs S A R L X Window System is a trade mark of the X Consortium UNIX is a registered trademark of Novell OSF Motif and Motif are trade marks of The Open Group Inc All trademarks are the property of their respective owners Document Number XFMUIMSRefMan v 7 1 1 Document date November 29 2002 Acknowledgments The following people have contributed to the development of XFaceMaker Alain Bastard Genevieve Beaujard Nicole Brion Alan Char Eric Durocher Marc Durocher France Geze Eric Herbaut Elizabeth Huffer Ion
131. XFaceMaker not to generate a resource database but to call XtSetArg for all resources The resources are either passed directly in one call or converted from their String representation to their own representation and then passed as parameters to XtSetArg The following resources are passed directly Strings Booleans KeySyms call to XStringToKeysym integers Int Position Dimension etc Widgets enumerated constants LabelType Orientation etc XmStrings optionally see FmCreateXmString All the other resources are converted by calling XtConvertAndStore before cre ating the widget passing the parent widget If the XtSetArg option is set you have the following options Convert resources after creation Specifies that for resources that need to be converted XtConvert be called after the widget has been created passing the new widget to the converter and set using XtSetValues Convert Pixmaps after creation Specifies that for Pixmap resources that need to be converted XtConvert be called after the widget has been created passing the new widget to the con verter and set using XtSetValues For other resources that need to be con verted XtConvert is called with the parent widget before creating the widget Create XmStrings Specifies that resources of type XmString do not call the resource converter but directly call the function XmStringCreateLtoR to produce shorter code Initialize Resources Using XtVaCreate
132. a group directly in the Group name field This box is popped when you Delete or Load a group LargeButton Sequence Selection Figure 5 14 The Group Name Box OK Click here to confirm selection of the group Cancel Click here to close the box without selecting a group 74 The Group File Selector Box 5 11 The Group File Selector Box The Group File Selector box is a modified file selector used to specify the name of a group widget when saving the selection as a group XFaceMaker File Selector Filter fhot eliz User gems work fm Directories Group name LargeButtor Default Name Group file to save ok Fiter Cancel Help Figure 5 15 The Group File Selector Box The Group File Selector box has the following fields Group name This text input field is used to enter a name for the selected group Clicking on Default Name will automatically enter the fm file name here with an uppercase first letter The ellipsis pops up the Group Selector box Group file to save This text field has a default name for the group file un named fm You can enter a new name here If you click on the Default Name button the name entered here will be displayed in the Group name field OK Registers the group name specified and closes the Group Name box Cancel Closes the Group Name box without applying any changes 75 The Editing Boxe
133. a library is the full standard library used by an application whose interface is in fm format interpreted mode interface Fm c the libFm c a library is the full library used by an application whose in terface is in c format compiled mode interface Fm e the libFm e a library is a superset of the Fm library It includes some ad ditional functions which can be used to create an extended version of XFaceMak er As shown in the table only a few application only functions are included in the Fm c library 204 Table 12 1 Application only Functions C name Fm Fm_c Fm_e FmAddBootFile FmAdd lt ClassName gt WidgetClass FmAddEnumeratedType FmAddRepresentation FmAddResourceType FmAddWidgetClass FmApplnitialize K KT OX me mm mM KT OX FmApplnitializeC FmApplnitializel FmAttachAv FmAttachFunction FmAttachValue FmCatClose FmCatFind FmCatGetS FmCatOpen FmChangeValueAddress mM me RM OX FmCreateManagedObject FmCreateObject FmDeleteVariable FmEditLoop FmFetch Value FmFetch ValueAdress FmGetCatD FmGetColorPixmap me x mM a FmGetFunctions Vector Fmlnitialize mM mK mM mK mL mK KL RT KL mK mK KT a gt lt Ml mK mM mK mL mK KL a a a a mK a a KT OX FmlnitializeC Fmlnitializel gt lt FmLoad FmLoadCreate
134. active values lt Name gt is the name of the fmp or fm file that is loaded m Include Generates aC include file called lt Name gt App h containing the dec larations of the application functions and global active value variables lt Name gt is the name of the fmp or fm file that is loaded m Makefile Generates a Makefile called lt Name gt Make containing the rules to build the application in interpreted compiled and editor mode lt Name gt is the name of the fmp or fm file that is loaded m New XFM Generates a C file called lt Name gt XfmMain c containing the main function of a new instance of XFM and also a Makefile called lt Name gt Xfm Make You can complete the lt Name gt XfmMain c file as required for your particular needs or use the Load Extensions menu item instead to build a new XFaceMaker executable that includes the functions and widgets that you want to make known to XFaceMaker See the User Guide for further detail m Custom Pops up a File Selector for choosing a pattern file from which to gen erate an application file Save MS Windows Files Generates the Windows version of the interface Con ditioned by the XFaceMaker Win option in the license file This command pops a dialog box that gives information on the conversion in particular on the extent to which the conversion could be achieved Load Extensions Pops up a dialog box with a list of extensions available You can choose the ones you want to inc
135. ains the resource specifica tions for the resources selected in the RDB Options Box An fm_rdb file This contains the interface description file in fm format con taining the full interface description except for the resource specifications which are in the rdb file C code and UIL files are generated from this file if those save options have been set W Save RDB file Class Name 3 Default RDB Resources EF ontList Pixel Jal M fonts M colors C strings Command xfm rdb rdbresources FontList Pixel LOK Apply Gose Reset Deraut Help Figure 5 19 The RDB Options Box The following options are available Save RDB file When this checkbutton is set and applied XFaceMaker will save the rdb versions of the interface file when you save Class name This specifies the first component of the resource specification Thus the name MyAppli will produce a resource file containing lines of the form MyAppli namel name2 namen value This allows multiple rdb files to be generated when an interface has been split into several fm files Each RDB file can be given the same class name so that they can all be concatenated together to produce one application RDB file If the class name is not defined then the name of the rdb will be used Default RDB resources Used to enter other resources to be saved in the RDB file In addition to colors and fonts you can enter any other resource types by d
136. al 125 scope of in FACE 142 verbose 384 verbose 384 View menu 25 Attachments 26 Expand 26 Hide 26 Lower 26 Raise 26 Show 26 Shrink 26 W wait 340 WaitForReturn 341 WarpPointer 342 while 138 while keyword 138 widget 129 auto pos size 23 gadgetize 23 hide 26 430 lower 26 raise 26 show 26 ungadgetize 23 widget class new resources 46 widget class active value 51 widget instance record 201 Widget List 29 39 expand 26 shrink 26 Widget Tree 29 39 expand 26 shrink 26 widgets creating a new class 187 naming 86 129 130 resources 131 window print options 32 windows genappli utility 175 Windows menu 29 Active Values 29 Close Resource Windows 29 Environment 30 Face Debugger 30 Menu Editor 30 New Resource Window 29 Widget List 29 Widget Tree 29 WM close handler 63 X X properties 133 for gadgets 133 X server 380 XAPPLRESDIR 388 XBMLANGPATH 277 388 XFaceMaker architecture 11 building 20 configuring 20 extensions 18 launching 20 restart Design Process 12 xfm 377 XFM Entry 379 XFM Full 379 XFM IDT 379 XFM_ LICENSE NAME 388 xfim3 379 xfm3 demo 379 xfm3 el 379 xfm3 idt 379 XfmA pplication 287 377 XfmDb 378 xfmprint 390 xfmtableprt 390 xfmwf 377 Xm h 122 XmAnyCallback 169 XmAnyCallbackStruct 169 XmAnyICCCallback 169 XmArrowButtonCallback 169 XmArrowButtonCallbackStruct 169 XmCommandCallback 169 XmCommandCallbackStruct 169 XmDragDropFinishCallback 170 XmDragMotionCallback 169
137. alue in a FACE script SCOPE Application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 345 C NAME FACE NAME SuperclassDeleteChild SuperclassDeleteChild SYNOPSIS SuperclassDeleteChild Widget parent Widget w DESCRIPTION Call the DeleteChild method of the superclass of widget parent to delete w from the list of children In general if you have defined a DeleteChild method when defining a new class you must call this function to delete a widget w from its parent s chil dren array Otherwise widget w would remain managed by its parent and this could cause a crash SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SuperclassDeleteChild self SEE ALSO SuperclassInsertChild 346 C NAME FACE NAME SuperclassExpose SuperclassExpose SYNOPSIS None SuperclassExpose Widget w Xevent event Region region DESCRIPTION Call the expose method of the superclass of widget w if w is realized In general you should call this function after the class Expose method if you have defined such a method when defining a new class SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SuperclassExpose self 1 SEE ALSO 347 C NAME FACE NAME SuperclassInsertChild SuperclassInsertChild SYNOPSIS None SuperclassInsertChild Widget parent Widget w DESCRIPTION Call the InsertChild method of the superclass of widget parent to insert w in the list of children In general if you have defined an InsertChild method when defining a new
138. ammer to iterate through the elements of an array The first function returns an initial key for an array It takes two parameters an array variable and a key value which will be returned if the array contains no el ements The next function returns the next key in an array It takes three parameters an array variable the previous key returned by first or next and a key value which is returned if the end of the array is reached Int a String for String s first a 0 s 0 s next a s 0 printf element s d n s a s Notes e Itis guaranteed that the key for each element of the array will be returned exactly once by the first and next functions but for a hash array the order in which the keys are returned is not specified For a linear array though the indexes are re turned sequentially The value passed to first and next as the end value must not be the key for a valid element of the array These iteration functions are most useful with hash arrays To iterate through linear arrays one can simply increment an integer index and use the size function 6 11 5 Getting the Size of an Array The size function returns the number of elements of an array For hash arrays it is the number of values stored in the array For linear arrays it is the largest index used to store a value minus one or the number of elements specified for an initialized ar ray 150 Using Arrays in FACE 6 11 6
139. are allocated from the heap so there is no automatic de allocation when a function exits A structure allocated using new_struct can be freed when no longer needed using free or XtFree 6 12 6 Arrays as Structure Elements This example shows how to declare a structure which contains a FACE array and initialize the array struct Mystruct Int i FaceArray a Int j global Mystruct s s new_struct Mystruct s gt a new_array String a Int s gt a a 0 zero a 1 one a 2 two a 3 three 154 CHAPTER 7 FACE in XFaceMaker In XFaceMaker FACE scripts can be used in callbacks any of the callback resources associated to widgets A script associated to a callback is launched when the callback is activated See the documentation for each widget class creation scripts a special resource associated by XFaceMaker to all widgets called xfmCreateCallback A script associated to a widget s xfmCreateCallback is launched at the time of widget creation after the widget and all its children have been created active value Set and Get scripts active values can be used to share data between the application and the interface Active values are named variables associated to a widget It is possible to associate two scripts to each active value a Get script usually used to fetch a value from the interface and a Set script usually used to set a value in the interface Active value Set and Get scri
140. aries when loading a dynamically linked executable The name differs on different op erating systems When setting this variable include the directory NSLHOME lib NLSPATH When using internationalized interfaces this defines the directories searched to find the message catalog files NSL_LICENSE HOST Specifies the name of the host machine for the server if you are using NSLlicense NSL_LICENSE PORT specifies the port number the product should use to commu nicate with the license server The default is 5002 387 Environment Variables NSLHOME Used to access the XFaceMaker auxiliary files such as include files ap plication patterns libraries XFaceMaker interface files etc The default value of FMLIBDIR is initialized to NSLHOME lib xfm PATH Standard environment variable to specify directories where executables should be fetched When setting this variable include the directory NSLHOME bin XAPPLRESDIR Standard X variable used to define the directories searched to find application resource files XBMLANGPATH Standard X variable used to define the directories searched to find bitmap files B is used as the substitution character for the bitmap file name XFM_LICENSE NAME Specifies the name of the license if you are using NSLIi cense as the license server daemon This should be set to xfm3 or xfm3 el or xfm3 idt depending on the type of product you have purchased Obsolete XFaceMaker version 3 2 2 and above is inc
141. ass an argument as a float even if the function was not declared as taking a float by using the Float type caster For example printf accepts arguments of unspecified type to pass a float you must cast it to Float as follows pi 3 1415926 printf pi of n Float pi 144 Floating Point Variables Another solution is to use a statically typed variable or a constant define pi 3 1415926 Float pi2 pi 2 0 printf pi f pi2 f n pi pi2 Ifa FACE attached application function returns a float it must be declared as return ing a value of type XtRFloat in FmAttachFunction otherwise the FACE interpreter will get an incorrect return value Similarly in compiled interfaces C code ver sions if an application function returns a float this must be specified in the FACE script using the function keyword function Float myfunction typel type2 145 The FACE Language 6 11 Using Arrays in FACE FACE arrays are a form of association table which can be indexed by strings inte gers or arbitrary values like pointers FACE provides two kinds of arrays hash arrays and linear arrays A FACE hash array is a hash table which can be indexed by a string key or by an arbitrary one word key In a string indexed hash array an element is stored and ac cessed using the value of a null terminated character string two strings which are lexically equal will give access to the same element even if they are stored at d
142. atement at a time until the end of the script is reached The FACE interpreter is used in several NSL products This chapter describes only the general features of the FACE language For information specific to the use of FACE in XFaceMaker see the next chapter 119 The FACE Language 6 1 Keywords in FACE The following identifiers are reserved for use as keywords and may not be used oth erwise if else while for script self parent toplevel root global local auto extern type cprototype function return define include resource resource is reserved for future use auto and extern are synonymous with local and global Avoid using auto and extern in any new scripts that you write They have been kept for backward compatibility only The other keywords are described in this chapter 6 2 Special Characters The following characters have special meanings in FACE 5 S P VO lt gt a1 amp l 6 3 Comments The characters introduce a comment which terminates with the characters Comments do not nest 120 Arithmetic Expressions 6 4 Arithmetic Expressions Arithmetic expressions have the same syntax as in C The following operators are supported Assignment operator Unary operator Arithmetic operators ee i Logical operators amp amp l Relational operators lt gt lt gt All arithmetic operations work on integer or floating point operands If any of the op erands is a floatin
143. ay be used instead of defining the DISPLAY environment variable fastlist fastResourceList This option specifies that the fast resource list be dis played in the Resources box instead of the list containing icons which is the de fault The fast list option refreshes resources faster on edit widget change fmbootfile lt alternate boot file gt fmbootfile The default boot file is Fm fm You should not need to change it This specifies which fm file is to be loaded and ex ecuted by XFaceMaker fmcolors lt name gt fmcolors Specify lt name gt as the rdb file for XFaceMaker in terface colors fmfonts lt name gt fmfonts Specify the name of the resource file to be used By default the file XfmDb in the directory NSLHOME lib xfim or the directory specified by fmlibdir is used fmlibdir lt alternate_fm_directory gt fmlibdir Specify an alternate directory from which to fetch the XFaceMaker interface description file Fm fm The default di rectory is usr lib X11 xfm for installations in the default directory NSL HOME lib xfim for installations in a user specified directory where NSLHOME is set to the user specified directory usr local lib xfm for installations in usr local The environment variable FMLIBDIR may be used instead of the com mand line option fmresources fmfonts This option has been kept for backward compatibility only Use fmfonts lt name gt instead ignorexerror
144. bility 33 Display Default Resource Values 32 Message Catalog 31 Preserve User Code 32 Print 32 RDB 31 Restart on FACE Errors 32 UIL 31 Update Offsets on Move 32 Use Fast Resource List 32 P parent 215 parent keyword 129 paste 379 paste 379 paste icon 35 Paste selection 22 PATH 388 426 pattern begin 177 end 177 objects 181 pattern file 181 pattern files for genappli utility 176 per widget storage 47 pixmaps 108 Pixmaps box 108 popup 389 PopupAndWait 314 PopupShell 87 porting the C code library 393 position mode 59 postOrderManage 377 postordermanage 377 preserve 384 Preserve User Code 32 Primitive widgetstore 42 Print 21 Tree 21 Windows 21 print options 32 Print Options box 81 printf 366 printing widget tree 21 windows 21 program xfm 377 xfmwf 377 xwd 277 xwud 277 projectManagerName 383 projmgrname 383 properties 133 Q QueryGeometry method 199 Quit 359 R raise icon 35 Raise Widget 315 random 367 rdb 381 rdb 381 RDB options 31 83 rdbclass 381 rdbclass 381 rdbresources 381 rdbresources 381 Read 16 Realize 198 Rebuild 91 Resize method 196 resource database 63 Resource Editor box 93 Resource List 87 fastlist option 90 resources 390 accessing 131 165 apply options 91 boolean 97 color 99 dragging values in list 89 editing 85 88 enumeration 103 floating point 104 icons 89 integer 107 list 87 pixmaps 108 preferred 95 rebuilding
145. c Objects 6 6 7 Widgets The FACE naming scheme uses the dot operator which lets you travel from a widget to one of its children Widget names have the following form lt reference gt lt name1 gt lt name2 gt where reference is either one of the keywords below or a variable name and namel name 2 are widget names that form the path of the designated widget in the widget hierarchy FACE recognizes the following keywords to designate the reference of a widget name self refers to the widget from which the script is called In the case of FaceEvalString it refers to the widget that was passed as an argument parent refers to the parent of self In the case of FaceEvalString it refers to the parent of the widget that was passed as argument to FaceEvalString Multiple parent keywords can be concatenated to designate the parent s parent etc toplevel refers to the child shell of the ApplicationShell root which is an ancestor of self or root itself if root has no shell child that is an ancestor of self root refers to the ApplicationShell which is an ancestor of self This is necessary for instance to travel from a TopLevel shell to another TransientShell at the same level e g Show root TransientShell If a variable name is used as the first component of a widget name instead of one of the keywords below then the variable must contain a valid widget pointer which will be used as the reference widget
146. can be different from the actual C identifier cname is the C name which will be used to generate references to the structure in the C code generated by XFaceMaker It is the string that would be typed in a C file to declare a pointer to the structure fields is an array of FmFieldDesc structures typedef struct FmFieldDesc String field_name String field_type int field_size int field_offset FmFieldDesc where field_name is the name of the field this must be the same as the C identi fier for the structure field field_type is the FACE type of the field 318 field_size is the size in bytes of the field field_offset is the offset in bytes of the field from the beginning of the structure num_fields is the number of elements in fields id_field is currently unused and must be set to 0 id_value is currently unused and must be set to 0 The offset of a structure field can be computed using the XtOffset macro con tained in X11 Intrinsics h The size can be computed using the FmSize macro which accepts the same arguments as XtOffset and which is defined in Fm h SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 319 C NAME FACE NAME FmReturn Return SYNOPSIS None FmReturn Widget w String retval DESCRIPTION Exit a local event handling loop entered by a call to FmPopupAndWait or FmWaitForReturn and transfer retval as a return value w is currently un used and should be set to self SCOPE FACE scripts
147. ce Maker windows 2 The design process manages the interface which is being designed by the user and interprets the FACE scripts attached to it This new architecture offers two important advantages Error Protection When an error occurs in the user s interface the design process can be completely restarted to restore a safe state e Dynamic Extension Allows you to add new application functions classes etc dynamically without exiting XFaceMaker Dual Process Architecture Foe 55 OF eit File Edit View Modules Windows Options fen pie ig E script interpreter application code street value GetStreet GetName GetStreet editing functions ee ee ee A selection feedbac resource listing widget operations ove Retest set vers tat St Design process XFaceMaker process 11 Architecture 3 1 Error Protection Error protection is a major advantage offered by the dual process mode In most UIMS s as in previous versions of XFaceMaker the interface and its behavior are implemented in the same process as the editor itself This means that if the interface crashes which can happen for example if the user calls a Motif function in a call back with wrong arguments then the whole program crashes XFaceMaker solves this problem by separating the interface being designed by the user from th
148. ce List 0 0 0 e eee eens 90 The Fast List Letters 00 cece 90 The Apply Options 0 00 e cece eee 91 The Resource Editing Window 000005 93 The Sort Order Window 0 00 cece eens 95 The Boolean Box 1 0 2 0 00 cee cece ce eee nee 97 The Color Box color 0 00 0c cece eens 98 The Color Box monochrome 2 000005 99 The RGB Editor 0 0 101 The Enumeration Box 000 cece eee eee 103 The Float Box sorena RR Ree WEA p aR 104 The Fonts Box ness coaie e ees eee eed 105 The Integer Boxarna 2g a eee ebook 107 The Pixmaps Box 2 0 0 0 e cece tenets 108 Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 5 37 5 38 5 39 5 40 5 41 5 42 5 43 The Pixmaps Table Editor 00005 109 The Sting Editori eenig nre Oe karat be apa ae bet 111 The Translations Box 2 0 00 eee cece eee 112 Eval Script Editor 0 00 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 114 The Restart Design Process Box 0 000 00 115 The Template Box 0 00 cece eee 116 TE OPHION Sern A o cee ek en RE ee 117 xiii xiv CHAPTER 1 Introduction Welcome to XFaceMaker This Reference Manual describes the functions and most of the features of XFaceMaker in a reference format More detailed explanations on how to use these features can be found in the X FaceMaker User 5 Guide In addition XFaceMaker includes exte
149. cks and change the labelString ret PopupAndWait root FareDB FareSB printf ret s n ret parent Fare labelString ret SEE ALSO FmShowWidget FmWaitForReturn FmReturn 314 C NAME FACE NAME FmRaiseWidget RaiseWidget SYNOPSIS None FmRaise Widget widget w DESCRIPTION Call XRaiseWindow on w s X Window SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Find a widget called List0 starting from the top of the interface hierarchy and raise it w XtNameToWidget root List0 Raise Widget w SEE ALSO FmLowerWidget FmShow Widget 315 C NAME FACE NAME FmReadValue none SYNOPSIS int FmReadValue Widget widget char name XtArgVal value return String type return DESCRIPTION This function fetches the address attached to the specified active value and as sociated with the specified widget possibly allocating a memory location of size sizeof XtArgVal if the active value is automatic calls the get script of the active value with the address passed as the argument and returns the contents of the address The type returned is the type of the active value If it succeeds the function returns 1 If the active value does not exist or if it is not attached and it is not automatic the function returns 0 If it is immediate or if widget is null the function returns 1 widget is the widget ID of the widget in which the active value is defined name is the name of the active value value_return
150. class you must call this function to insert a new widget w in its parent s chil dren array Otherwise widget w would not be managed by its parent SCOPE FACE scripts the application EXAMPLE SuperclassInsertchild self SEE ALSO 348 C NAME FACE NAME SuperclassResize SuperclassResize SYNOPSIS None SuperclassResize Widget w DESCRIPTION Call the resize method of the superclass of widget w if w is realized In general you should call this function after the class Resize method if you have defined such a method when defining a new class SCOPE FACE scripts the application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 349 C NAME FACE NAME atoi atoi SYNOPSIS Int atoi String s DESCRIPTION Call the C function atoi SCOPE FACE scripts the application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 350 C NAME FACE NAME none breakpoint SYNOPSIS Boolean breakpoint Widget widget String message DESCRIPTION Explicitly call a breakpoint within a FACE script The widget and the mes sage are displayed when the breakpoint is activated SCOPE FACE scripts EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 351 C NAME FACE NAME none cbtoi SYNOPSIS Int cbtoi Int value DESCRIPTION Convert a byte value to an integer Although FACE always uses XtArgVal sized integers cbtoi returns an integer within the appropriate range for a byte SCOPE FACE scripts EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 352 C NAME FACE NAME none cftoi SYNOPSIS Int cftoi Float f DESCR
151. clears any global functions FACE or application memorized by XFaceMaker in the course of the session Open Pops up the File Selector to specify which interface or project file to load The design process current interface is cleared before the new interface is load ed If you have not saved your work since the last modification an alert box will warn you This command does not clear global functions that have been memo rized this allows different interface files to share the same global functions with out having to redeclare them Read Pops up the File Selector box to specify which interface file to concate 16 The XFaceMaker Menus nate to the current interface XFaceMaker first checks that the specified file is not already loaded If so an error message is issued Save Saves the current interface under the current file name that is the name specified during the last Save or Save As The default name is unnamed fm That is the name that will be used to save your interface if you have not already saved it with the Save As command Save As Pops up the File Selector and saves the current interface under the name specified there The file you name becomes the current file If a file with the same name already exists in the directory an alert box will ask your permis sion to overwrite it Save Selected As Pops up the File Selector and saves the currently selected widget hierarchy into the file you specify
152. ctures Fm Name Xm Name XmAnyCallback XmAnyCallbackStruct XmArrowButtonCallback XmArrowButtonCallbackStruct XmDrawingAreaCallback XmDrawnButtonCallback XmPushButtonCallback XmRowColumnCallback XmScrollBarCallback XmToggleButtonCallback XmListCallback XmSelectionBoxCallback XmCommandCallback XmFileSelectionBoxCallback XmScaleCallback XmTextBlock XmTextVerifyPtr XmTextBlockWces XmTextVerifyPtrWcs XmTraverseObscuredCallback XmSecondaryResourceData XmAny ICCCallback XmTopLevelEnterCallback XmTopLevelLeaveCallback XmDropSiteEnterCallback XmDropSiteLeaveCallback XmDragMotionCallback XmOperationChangedCallback XmDrawingAreaCallbackStruct XmDrawnButtonCallbackStruct XmPushButtonCallbackStruct XmRowColumnCallbackStruct XmScrollBarCallbackStruct XmToggleButtonCallbackStruct XmListCallbackStruct XmSelectionBoxCallbackStruct XmCommandCallbackStruct XmFileSelectionBoxCallbackStruct XmScaleCallbackStruct XmTextBlock XmTextVerifyPtr XmTextBlockWcs XmTextVerifyPtrWcs XmtTraverseObscuredCallbackStruct XmSecondaryResourceData XmAnyICCCallback XmTopLevelEnterCallback XmTopLevelLeaveCallback XmDropSiteEnterCallback XmDropSiteLeaveCallback XmDragMotionCallback XmOperationChangedCallback 169 Structures Table 9 1 Structures Fm Name Xm Name XmDropStartCallback XmDropStartCallback XmDropFinishCallback XmDragProcCallback XmDragDropFinishCallback XmDropFinishCallback XmDragProcCallback XmDragDropFinishCallback
153. d as sociated with the specified widget calls the get script of the active value with the address passed as the argument and returns the address The type re turned is the type of the active value if it is immediate or Pointer otherwise If it succeeds the function returns 1 If the active value does not exist the function returns 0 If widget is null the function returns 1 Calling this function is similar to executing an instruction of the form value lt widget gt lt name gt in a FACE script SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 270 FmFetchValue C NAME FACE NAME FmFreeArgList FmFreeArgList SYNOPSIS None FmFreeArgList FmArgList list DESCRIPTION Remove all the arguments from a list and free the list itself The list must not be used again SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE FmFreeArgList arglist SEE ALSO FmClearArgList FmNewArgList FmAddArg 271 C NAME FACE NAME FmFtoi ftoi SYNOPSIS Int FmFtoi Pointer JP DESCRIPTION Return the result of converting a float pointed to by fp into an integer SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Print the decimal value of a Float active value called fval printf decimal value of fval d n ftoi fval SEE ALSO Fmltof 272 C NAME FACE NAME FmGetActiveValue GetActiveValue SYNOPSIS Boolean FmGetActiveValue Widget w String name DESCRIPTION Call the get script of active value name for Widget w If name is
154. d client_data arguments widget is the ID of the widget in which the drop will occur drop_transfer is the ID of the Drop Transfer widget returned by XmDrop TransferStart targets is a comma separated list of targets that are to be added to the drop targets list client_data is the client data you want to pass tp the drop site s active value The set script can retrieve it from the FmTransferProcStruct structure SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 263 C NAME FACE NAME FmDropTransferStart FmDropTransferStart SYNOPSIS Any FmDropTransferStart Widget widget Widget drag_context String targets None client_data Boolean incremental Int status DESCRIPTION Call XmDropTransferStart with the specified drag_context The value of the XmNdropTransfers resource is built using the targets and client_data argu ments The incremental and status arguments are passed as the XmNincre mental and XmNtransferStatus resources respectively widget is the ID of the widget in which the drop will occur drag_context is the ID of the Drag Context widget associated to the transac tion targets is a comma separated list of targets client_data is the client data you want to pass to the drop site s active value The set script can retrieve it from the FmTransferProcStruct structure incremental is the value stored in the XmNincremental resource of the Drop Transfer widget status is the value stored in the XmNtransf
155. d i initializes its value to zero and sets its type to None Local variables declared outside FACE functions are not automatic vari ables i e they are not allocated dynamically each time the callback is invoked They are like static variables in a C function they are initialized to 0 when the script is parsed and retain their value from one call to another Local variables declared inside FACE functions are automatic and are allocated and set to 0 each time the function is called Global variables can be referenced by all scripts of the same interface They are de clared using the global keyword global button_pressed Global variables can also be declared extern as in extern global button_pressed Extern global variables differ from global variables only in the way they are declared in the C code generated The extern modifier should be used in cases where a global variable is used in several fm files in order to avoid multiple declarations of the vari able in the C code generated declare the variable as extern in all but one script Global variables must be declared in all the scripts in which they are used The parser creates the variable and associated storage the first time it encounters the declaration It is possible to declare the type of a FACE local or global variable either when the variable is declared with the following syntax local global lt type gt lt name gt or when a local variable is fi
156. dgetClass Myclass myclass fm attach functions and active values here ww FmLoad interface fm FmLoop SEE ALSO 306 C NAME FACE NAME FmLoop none SYNOPSIS void FmLoop DESCRIPTION Pass control to the function XtAppMainLoop This function must be called after the initialization phase of your application to handle X events If you are generating standalone code and do not want to link with the Fm_c library call XtAppMainLoop or XtMainLoop instead SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 307 C NAME FACE NAME FmLowerWidget Lower Widget SYNOPSIS None FmLowerWidget Widget w DESCRIPTION Call XLowerWindow on w s window SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Find a widget called List0 starting from the top of the interface hierarchy and lower it w XtNameToWidget root List0 LowerWidget w SEE ALSO FmRaise Widget FmHideWidget 308 C NAME FACE NAME FmNewArg List NewArgList FmNewArgList SYNOPSIS FmArgList FnNewArgList DESCRIPTION Allocate an empty argument list SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE FmArgList arglist FmNewArgList FmAddArg arglist pixmap FmGetPixmap self letters bm FmAddArg arglist mask ConvertString self letters_m bm Bitmap Widget source_icon FmCreateDragIcon self source arglist FmClearArgList arglist SEE ALSO FmClearArgList FmFreeArgList FmAddArg 309 C NAME FACE NAME Fm
157. e X buffer for pasting and displays it in the status indicator field of the main command window If no widget is currently selected the tracked wid get s absolute name is displayed If there is a currently selected widget the 35 The Command Window tracked widget s name relative to the selected widget is displayed The selected widget name can then be pasted in an XFaceMaker text field e Expand Used to display all sub trees of the selected widget in the Widget Tree or List Shrink Used to hide all sub widgets of the selected widget in the Widget Tree or List 4 3 The Edit Select Popup Menus Pressing Mouse Button 3 on a widget in the Design Process or on its name in the Widget List or in the Widget Tree opens a Popup Menu whose contents changes with the context the menu can have up to three main categories as follows Selection This set of items is present only if the widget selection is not empty i e at least one widget in the interface is selected It provides a shortcut to issue commands that are also available through the Edit pulldown menu and that apply to the current selec tion When the menu is popped commands that cannot be issued are shown insensi tive e g Paste when the widget cut buffer is empty m Cut Remove the selected widgets from the interface and place them into the widget cut buffer m Copy Place a copy of the selected widgets into the widget cut buffer The wid gets are not removed fr
158. e XFace Maker editor itself In the XFaceMaker architecture the design process can crash but the XFaceMaker process stays alive You can find more information on XFace Maker s dual process architecture in the Chapter Overview in the XFaceMaker User s Guide 3 1 1 Restarting the Design Process The default command line displayed by the restart dialog box launches the same de sign process as the one which just terminated usually xfm or a new user built in stance of XFaceMaker with all the command line options specified initially plus the client option and the restore option explained below Design process command line ifm client calleditor restore Command W Restore state _ Trusted state Ok cancel wat ext FM Hep Figure 3 1 The Restart Process Box The Command pushbutton pops a File Selector for choosing a different XFace Maker executable The Restore state and Trusted state buttons toggle the restore and trusted op tions explained below respectively in the command line OK launches the specified command line XFaceMaker will then wait until the new design process connects to it e Cancel will not launch any design process The user will then be warned that XFaceMaker is running in mono process mode Clicking No at this time will go back to the command line dialog box 12 Error Protection The Wait button will not launch any design
159. e code can also be compiled using a C compiler Types defined in the application must be declared Store Widgets In static variable Specifies that when the C code file is generated teh ID of every resolvable wid get of the interface be stored in a private C variable For any unresolvable wid get names a dynamic widget reference is made so that the name is resolved at runtime This option must not be used for interface fragments which will be instantiated more than once Store Widgets In extern variables Specifies that widget ID s be stored in global extern C variables in the gener 62 C Code Options ated C file A widget whose name is Name will be stored in a C variable called FmNameWidget If two widgets in the interface have the same name one of the variables is re named as FmNameWidget_N where N starts at 1 and is incre mented for every synonym This option must not be used for interface fragments which will be instantiated more than once Store Widgets In array Specifies that widgets be stored in an array that is allocated every time the inter face creation function is called When this option is set XFaceMaker ignores the compilegroup option cflags d and outputs dynamic widget references only for widgets defined outside of the module This option is general it can be used for interface fragments that are to have multiple instances Supported by Fm_c library Generates code which makes use of the Fm_c
160. e content of a FACE array String a Int new_array a 0 zero a 1 one a 2 two a 3 three for i 0 1 lt size a i i 1 printf index d val s n 1 a 1 SEE ALSO new_c_array new_table 361 C NAME FACE NAME none new_c_array SYNOPSIS FaceArray new_c_array Pointer pa Int i DESCRIPTION Create a new linear array allowing you to initialize the array with a C array pa is a pointer to the C array and i is the size of the C array SCOPE FACE scripts EXAMPLE Declare and initialize a FACE array to contain the items of an XmList widget print its contents XmString a Int count parent XmList0 itemCount a new_c_array Pointer parent XmList0 items count for i 0 i lt count i i 1 printf index d item s n i GetString a i SEE ALSO new_atray new_table 362 C NAME FACE NAME none new_struct SYNOPSIS MyStruct new_ struct MyStruct ms DESCRIPTION Allocate a new structure in a FACE script ms is the name of the structure of type MyStruct When the structure is no longer needed use free or XtFree SCOPE FACE scripts EXAMPLE Declare a structure which contains a FACE array and initialize the array struct Mystruct Int i FaceArray a Int j E global Mystruct s s new_struct Mystruct s gt a new_array String a Int s gt a a 0 zero a l one a 2 two a 3 three SEE ALSO FmRegisterStructures 3
161. e foreground where it no longer is occluded by other widgets This does not modify the interface file just the current display Lower Moves the current widget selection to the background where it will no longer occlude other widgets This does not modify the interface file just the cur rent display Expand In the Widget Tree or Widget List displays the widgets that belong to the subtree of the selected widget i e expands a shrunk node Shrink In the Tree or List hides any widgets that are descendants of the selected widget i e reduces the subtree to a node the selected widget Draw Attachments Specifies that widget attachments be visible This does not modify the interface file just the current display The XFaceMaker Menus 4 1 4 The Modules Menu Groups gt Templates Classes gt C Class Figure 4 14 The Modules Menu The Modules Menu contains the following items Groups Opens a cascading menu containing m Load Pops up the File Selector box to specify which group to load in the Groups widgetstore m Save As Saves the selected widget and its subtree as a group under the name specified in the file selector box in a fm description file for later reloading and adds the group to the Groups widgetstore m Delete Deletes the specified group from the Groups widgetstore This does not destroy the fm group description file saved with Save As m Choose Icon Pops up the Images box t
162. e result in the float variable pointed to by fp SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Store the value of a scale widget in a float active value called fval itof parent scale value fval SEE ALSO citof 291 C NAME FACE NAME FmListAllowKeySelection none SYNOPSIS None FmListAllowKeySelection Widget list Boolean alnum String delim Boolean notify DESCRIPTION FmListAllowKeySelection allows the user to select items in the list by typing characters on the keyboard For each non blank key typed in the list while it has keyboard focus the list selects the next item in the list that starts with that character list is the XmList widget id alnum is a flag indicating whether to accept non alphanumeric characters If alnum is true only letters and digits will cause selection to take place If false then the user may select with any non blank character delim is a string containing delimiters that mark the search area for selection Each item will be searched after the last delimiter in that item s value For example if you specify as the delimiter in a list of filenames then only the last component determines the result of the search notify indicates whether or not the list should call its selection callback list when a selection is made SCOPE application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 292 C NAME FACE NAME FmListGetItems FmListGetItems SYNOPSIS String FmListGetItems Widget list DESCRIPTI
163. e structure with the specified geometry This structure can be passed to FmDropSiteRegister as the value of the resource XmNdropRectangles The pointer returned should be freed when no longer needed using XtFree SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 253 C NAME FACE NAME FmCreateXmString CreateXmString SYNOPSIS XmString FmCreateXmString String s DESCRIPTION Create an XmString using the string s and the default character set When it is no longer needed the string can be freed using XmStringFree SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Specify a side effect for the XtSetValues of a new resource of type String when defining a class For example in the resource s set script xms CreateXmString self PB labelString xms StringFree xms SEE ALSO FmGetString XmStringFree 254 C NAME FACE NAME FmDeleteObject FmDeleteObject SYNOPSIS void FmDeleteObject Widget w DESCRIPTION Destroy Widget w and all its subwidgets The widget must have been created by one of the following FmLoadCreate FmLoad FmLoadCreateGroup Fm LoadCreateManagedGroup FmCreateObject or FmCreateManagedObject SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 255 C NAME FACE NAME FmDeleteVariable none SYNOPSIS void FmDeleteVariable String name DESCRIPTION Delete the global FACE variable name This is useful only when working with interfaces in interpreted mode FmDeleteVariable is not available in
164. e used each time a widget instance is created Resource assignments have the same format as in the Resource Editor window of XFaceMaker and must be newline separated For example width 10 nheight 100 n If there are no default resources pass 0 If you have a widget with resourc es which cannot be set using strings either rewrite the widget to use sen sible default values or use xrdb to load a default resources file before 231 launching XFaceMaker include_file is a string used to generate the C code file containing instances of the new widget class and specifies the header file that must be included in the generated C file The whole line must be specified e g include lt MyWidget h gt char class_ref is also used to generate the C code file and is the C name of the WidgetClass pointer for the new class for instance myNewWidgetClass char gadget_class_refis the C name of the GadgetClass pointer if it exists or the null pointer sub_resources specifies additional resources not listed in the resources field of the new WidgetClass record Some widget classes like XmText for in stance use special resources that are accessed using the XtGetSubre sources function Such resources must be specified here in order to be usable in XFaceMaker as an array of XtResource records where only the following fields have to be filled resource name resource_class resource_type resource_size If the new widg
165. e used or declared their type need not be specified If the type of a variable is not specified when the variable is declared the type is deter mined each time the variable is assigned and it takes the type of the function or wid get resource to which it is assigned For example X1 self x self x is a widget resource Its type is Dimension With this assignment X1 is defined as being of type Dimension a f 0 The type of the variable a is the type of the function s return value FACE checks the type of variables in two instances when assigning a variable and when passing it as a function parameter 123 The FACE Language 6 6 2 Special FACE Types You can prevent argument type checking by using the special types None and Any None If when attaching a function i e in FmAttachFunction you declare the type of an argument as None you are in effect telling FACE that the argument type for this argument is not to be checked whenever the function is called Any If when calling a function whose arguments have all been specified you use a type Any for one of the arguments the type of that argument is not checked for that call Obviously these two types should be used only rarely and with care since circum venting type checking prevents the detection of possible errors 6 6 3 Constants Integer constants begin with an optional minus sign followed by a sequence of decimal digits 0 9 FAC
166. e value You cannot set it in the CreateCallback because the resource does not exist in the model object XFaceMaker would produce an error message The Set script of your initialize active value might be set_Initialize selftapplyButton self apply_button At the time this script is executed both the apply_button widget and the applyButton resource exist 11 2 4 The SetValues Method The SetValues method handles changes in the new resources you specify as active values in the model object of the class This method is called by the X Toolkit at ev ery resource change during widget use i e calls to XtSetValues The SetValues method does the following e fetch the current value of the resource from the current widget argument e fetch the new value of the resource as specified by the call to XtSetValues from the new argument e call the Set script of the active value with the call_ data pointing to the following structure struct XtArgVal new_value XtArgVal current_value XtArgVal current_widget Thus in the Set script refers to the new resource value I refers to the old resource value 2 contains a pointer to the current widget The same sequence of operations is performed in the Initialize method but in this case new_value is equal to current_value and the pointer is NULL hence in the Set script 1 and 2 0 In the Initialize method the Set scripts of all the new resources you have defined for yo
167. e widget will be created m menu_bar Present for XmRowColumn widgets if they are acting as a menu bar m menu_pulldown Present for XmRowColumn widgets if they are acting as a pulldown menu active value The flag block may be followed by one or more active value blocks which define any active values associated with the widget along with their Get and Set scripts createproc The flag block may be followed by a createproc block which defines the xfmCreateCallback script for this widget 389 The Fm File Structure template If an interface contains one or more templates then a template block defines the template files to be included resources The resources block contains all resources defined for this widget in cluding callbacks and translations The resources defined may be modified by the flag block entries children If the widget is a parent then a children identifier will mark the start of the child widget definitions block Further widget definition blocks will occur within this block Finally please note the following points The name of the widget comes after the closing brace of the widget block A line starting with the characters or is a comment and therefore ignored The indentation of a widget block in the Fm file shows the relationships of the widget i e a child is indented with respect to its parent When reading a file this indentation is not taken into account to determine the relationship betwee
168. eDragIcon FmCreateDragIcon FACE x x x FmCreateRectangle FmCreateRectangle FACE x x x FmDeleteObject FmDeleteObject FACE FmDoEvent FmDoEvent FACE x xX x FmDragStart FmDragStart FACE x x x FmDropSiteRegister FmDropSiteRegister FACE x x x FmDropSiteRetrieve FmDropSiteRetrieve FACE x x x FmDropSiteUpdate FmDropSiteUpdate FACE x x x FmDropTransferAdd FmDropTransferAdd FACE x x x FmDropTransferStart FmDropTransferStart FACE x x x FmEqualString FmEqualString FACE x x x FmFreeArgList FmFreeArgList FACE x x x FmGetPixmap FmGetPixmap FACE x x x FmGetStringfromTable FmGetStringFromTable FACE x x x Table 12 2 FACE Functions 208 FACE name C name Class Xm Xt Fm Fm_c Fm_e FmGetValue FmGetValue FACE x x x FmGetXmDisplay FmGetXmDisplay FACE x x x FmGetXmScreen FmGetXmScreen FACE x x x FmHideWidget FmHideWidget FACE x x x FmListAllowKeySelection FmListAllowKeySelection FACE x x x FmListGetItems FmListGetItems FACE x x x FmListGetSelectedItems FmListGetSelectedItems FACE x x x FmNewArgList FmNewArgList FACE x x x FmRegisterSimpleDropSite FmRegisterSimpleDropSite FACE x x x FmSendClick FmSendClick FACE x x x FmSetTallest FmSetTallest FACE x x x FmSetValue FmSetValue FACE x x x FmSet Widest FmSetWidest FACE x x x FmStartCursorDrag FmStartCursorDrag FACE x x x FmStartSimpleDrag FmStartSimpleDrag FACE x x x
169. eRadioBox XmCreateRowColumn XmCreateScale XmCreateScrollBar XmCreateScrolledList XmCreateScrolledText XmCreateScrolledWindow XmCreateSelectionBox XmCreateSelectionDialog XmCreateSeparator XmCreateSeparatorGadget XmCreateSimpleCheckBox XmCreateSimpleMenuBar XmCreateSimpleOptionMenu XmCreateSimplePopupMenu XmCreateSimplePulldownMenu XmCreateSimpleRadioBox XmCreateTemplateDialog XmCreateText XmCreateTextField XmCreateToggleButton XmCreateToggleButtonGadget XmCreateWarningDialog XmCreateWorkArea XmCreate WorkingDialog 405 C Name FACE Name XmCvtCTToXmString XmCvtFromHorizontalPixels XmCvtFromVerticalPixels XmCvtStringToUnitType XmCvtTextToXmString XmCvtToHorizontalPixels XmCvtToVerticalPixels XmCvtXmStringToCT XmCvtXmStringToText XmDeactivateProtocol XmDestroyPixmap XmDragCancel XmDragStart XmDropSiteConfigureStackingOrder XmDropSiteEndUpdate XmDropSiteGetActiveVisuals XmDropSiteQueryStackingOrder XmDropSiteRegister XmDropSiteRetrieve XmDropSiteStartUpdate XmDropSiteUnregister XmDropSiteUpdate XmDropTransferAdd XmDropTransferStart XmFileSelectionBoxGetChild XmFileSelectionDoSearch XmFontListAdd XmFontListAppendEntry XmFontListCopy XmFontListCreate XmFontListEntryCreate XmFontListEntryFree XmCvtCTToXmString XmCvtFromHorizontalPixels XmCvtFromVerticalPixels XmCvtStringToUnitType XmCvtTextToXmString XmCvtToHorizontalPixels XmCvtToVerticalPixels XmCvtXmStringToCT XmCvtXmStringToText Xm
170. eVariable scale_value the first time it is used in a fm file for which the C code is being generated The variable must be declared global without the extern in one and only one script global Int scale_value This will produce the variable definition before the script in the C code FaceVariable scale_value Using the extern modifier lets you use a global variable in several fm files without having multiple definitions of the variable NOTE If a variable is declared as global and not extern global in a file whose C code is generated separately from any other file referring to the variable the defini tion of the variable is generated in the C code ONLY if the variable is USED in the file For example 162 Generating C Code in XFaceMaker activateCallback global Int scale_value activateCallback extern global Int scale_value if A fm and B fm are compiled separately e g with xfm compile A fm xfm compile B fm the extern global declaration will not be known in A fm and scale_value which is not used only declared in A fm will not be declared in the A c file If however the two files are compiled jointly e g with xfm compile A fm B fm then scale _value will be declard in A c with FaceVariable scale_value and in B c with extern FaceVariable scale_value just as if the script in A fm had actually used the global variable 163 FACE in XFaceMaker 164
171. ead and write access The names of these functions will be built by concatenating set and get with the capitalized name of the mem ber 99 66 Access There are three choices of access level for the member public protected and private They correspond to C access levels 54 The Alignment Box 5 2 The Alignment Box The Alignment Box is used to align widgets relative to each other or to a parent wid get It can also be used to apply a snap on grid to a composite widget so that widgets are aligned in it as they are created moved or resized Open the box by clicking on Alignment in the Edit menu Vertical Horizontal Grid vy Left V Center Q Right Grid Spacing 10 Reference First YV Parent 4 Edit _ Grid on Align by Position Q Size Figure 5 6 The Alignment Box The Alignment box has the following fields Vertical Defines parameters for the vertical alignment If none of the radio buttons is selected Apply will not do vertical alignment Horizontal Defines parameters for the horizontal alignment If none of the radio but tons is selected Apply will not do horizontal alignment Reference Specifies the reference i e the widget with respect to which a widget is to be aligned The choices are m First The selection will be aligned with respect to the first widget that was selected which must be a sibling The first w
172. ed widget in the Attach to field you must enter the name of that widget in this field You have several ways to do so You can enter the name directly Or you can click on the Select button move the cursor over the widget or widget name and click Or you can select the widget name from the list in the field below Update Offsets When set the widget s offsets will be updated when it is moved This option is also available in the Options menu under Update Offsets on Move Draw Attachments Specifies that widget attachments be visible when XFaceMaker is running They will not be visible when the interface is created by the applica tion Detach This Side When clicked this button removes all attachment resources for the corresponding side of the widget currently being edited Always remove previous attachments if you want to redefine an attachment Otherwise you may have stray attachment resources in your fm file due to the fact that depending on the type of attachment you choose different resources are involved Detach All Sides When clicked this button removes all attachment resources for all sides of the currently edited widget Detach all sides of a widget if you want to remove all its attachment resources or if you want to modify the attachments for 59 The Editing Boxes more than one side OK Applies the specified value to the resource and returns to the main Resource win dow Rebuild Applies the changes b
173. ed in most cases in your Expose method SuperclassExpose self 1 11 2 8 The Destroy Method If an active value with the name Destroy exists for the model object of the class its Set script is called in the class Destroy method with a NULL argument therefore must not be referenced In addition for all callback resources of the new widget class the Destroy method calls XtRemoveAlICallbacks to free the storage allocated for the callback lists 197 New Widget Classes 11 2 9 The Realize Method If an active value with the name Realize exists for the model object of the class its Set script is called in the class Realize method with the following arguments 0 value_mask parameter of the Realize method 1 attributes parameter of the Realize method If you specify a Realize method you must call a function which creates the widget s window otherwise the X Toolkit would get confused and XFaceMaker could even tually crash You can either call XtCreateWindow directly or call the superclass s Realize method using the convenience function SuperclassRealize w value_mask attributes SuperclassRealize self 1 11 2 10 The SetValuesAlmost Method If an active value with the name SetValuesAlmost exists for the model object of the class its Set script is called in the SetValuesAlmost method with the following ar guments 0 old parameter of the SetValuesAlmost method 1 request parameter of the Set ValuesA
174. eee ees 31 AAT The Help Menu ss 3 c c8hcit eit ie ge Se ie hee 34 42 The Edit Display ICOns ss accsscce eae ee ak ets PTR eee E A 35 4 3 The Edit Select Popup Menus 2 0 00 eee eee 36 4 4 Try Mode and Build Mode 0 c ccc teens 37 4 5 The Widget Tree and Widget List 2 0 0 c eee eee eee 39 4 53 2 T he Widget Dister sites take gu EE ast arate aati gu eee ean 40 4 S 2 The Wid Bet Tree siyin coset nnn ran Sal NENA ERAN EER ees 40 4 6 Th Toolkit mie airi oie ts heen EE eee ee E 41 4h TheMessagce Area ons eee ssa ees MA E E A Me TTA 44 iii 5 1 Th Active Valti s Box coe die tote tated sto beg Ea ohio E 46 Solely Interface a Lec exer ss oS eh ote wee de pee eetel gone pte taht 47 901 2 Drag Sourcen es sisted i i A ed Vd eat eed Vos od hie 49 Sell 3S Drop Site x2 EE eae tsi hode ae oats Maer toes E Sr E AT ania 50 SAA Widget Class iapun in ene a e ott Sue AN ag al han Se ERAS 51 Sid CHF Class pec anes sb ae as iw oie hd ee eee 53 S2 The Alignment Bokara nreo eas ie eee ee PE ae DRS oes as 55 5 3 The Attachments Box 0 c anenee 57 S4 C Code OptiSeo e Si eee a E ihn Ae cee 61 5 5 The Class Name BOX rnern eee a Aa A a Aa a eai 66 5 6 C Class Name Box ruere a Seti T ee el EE 67 5 7 The Environment Box sasopi3 ob pene hoe eb pete seeds boonies 69 5 8 The FACE Debugger 0 0 00 ccc cette ees 70 5 9 The File Selector is masana E tee a eee gE ee 73 5 1
175. ees 51 xi xii Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 5 5 5 6 Be 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 21 5 22 5 23 5 24 5 25 5 26 52275 5 28 5 29 5 30 5 31 5 32 5 33 5 34 5 35 5 36 CFF Clas Siion a biden eh eee ate aro Rea a basis gr ene eat 53 The Alignment Box 0 0 aure tesd an niei 55 The Attachments Box 0 0 0 eee eee nee 57 The C Code Options Box 00 0 c eee eee 61 The Class Name Box 00 00 e cece eee eens 66 C File Selector iieo ecra e hated eyes dd 67 The Environment Box 0 0 cc cece eens 69 The FACE Debugger 0 0 cece eee 70 The File Selector ccs o ceii cee ieee idk u ees 73 The Group Name Box 2 0 eee eee eee 74 The Group File Selector Box 0 0 000000 75 The Menu Editor icccceecne eh See a E 76 The Message Catalog Options Box 0 80 The Print Options Box 00 eee eee eee eee 81 The RDB Options Box 00 e cece eee 83 The Resources Box 0 00 00 ce Aann eens 85 The Resource List i 6 ccs serere geese a idee ena 3 88 The Resource List Icons 0 00 0 e eee eee 89 The Fast Resour
176. efining the resource by its Class with XmC removed Type or its name directly e g 83 The Editing Boxes Foreground mnemonic Pixel labelString The list is comma separated without intervening spaces options These three checkbuttons specify the following all This generates an RDB file with the extension rdb containing all the inter face resources as well as a version of the fm file with no resources whose extension is fm_rdb fonts This generates an RDB file with the extension rdb containing all FontList resources as well as a version of the fm file with no font resources whose extension is fm_rdb colors This generates an RDB file with the extension rdb containing all Pixel i e color resources in the rdb file as well as a version of the fm file with no color resources whose extension is fm_rdb strings This generates an RDB file with the extension rdb containing all XmString resources as well as a version of the fm file with no compound string resources whose extension is fm_rdb Command Displays the current command line OK Applies the specified options when the interface is saved Apply Applies the options and remains in the RDB Options box Close Closes the window without changing the RDB options Reset Returns the window to its previous values Default Returns the window to the default values 84 The Resources Box 5 16 The Resources Box The Resources Box lists resources f
177. ename of the current filename i e the fm filename 61 The Editing Boxes Save As class Compiles the interface into the code necessary to create a new widget sub classed from the class of the top widget in the interface Code is also generated to integrate the new widget class into XFaceMaker The option Store Widgets In array cflags a will be forced to True Creation Name Used to enter the name used in the creation function so that it becomes FmCre ate lt Name gt The default value for Name is the basename of the current file name i e the fm filename Class Prefix Used to enter the prefix string to be used for the widget class when generating the class The prefix is used in conjunction with the creation name to give FmCreate lt PrefixName gt which will create an instance of the new widget class lt PrefixName gt The default value for Prefix is Xfm Include File Used to specify an include file name to be inserted in the C code file The string given e g e_retApp h is inserted directly into the file to give the line include e retApp h Any special characters must be protected when used from the shell Only one file can be included Type of C Code K amp R classic Generates C code conforming to the standard defined by Appendix A of Kerni gan and Ritchie s The C Programming Language Type of C Code ANSI Generates C code with prototyped functions conforming to the ANSI C stan dard Th
178. ename with the suffix c cflags lt character gt cflags Specify an option for C code generated by the com pile or compilegroup options with a character Characters may be concatenated to give a string of options See the Command Line Options table for character values cinclude lt string gt cinclude Specify an include file name for the C file generated by the compile or compilegroup options The string is inserted directly after the text include Quotes and other characters must be protected when defined from the shell e g xfm compile my fm cinclude myinclude h cname lt name gt cname Specify a different name for the main function FmCre ate lt name gt in the C file generated by the compile or compilegroup options The default is to use the name FmCreate lt filename gt where filename is the basename of the fm file being compiled compile compile Compile a fm file to create a C file If the option rdb is used then lt file gt rdb is created together with the C code version of lt file gt fm_rdb All references to unknown widgets are resolved dynamically compilegroup compilegroup Compile a fm group file to create a C code file All references to widgets are resolved dynamically coptions lt number gt coptions Obsolete use cflags instead cprefix lt Prefix gt cprefix When generating a widget class this option defines the 380 The Command Line Options prefix string to
179. ent AS BB Name onslBarGrapht Class Ens1Bar Graph Templates f W Current selection Resource maximum 150 00 EEC A e 5e 02 OK Rebuild Set values Set Cancel Figure 5 33 The Float Box The Float box has the following fields A slider Used to specify the value A text input box Used to display or specify the value for the resource Minimum and maximum arrows Used to set the maximum and minimum values for the resource OK Applies the specified value to the resource and returns to the list Rebuild Applies the change by rebuilding and remains in the editor Set Values Applies the change by setting values and remains in the editor Set Updates the value in the Resource list and returns to the list Cancel Returns to the list without changing the value 104 The Resource Edit Boxes 5 17 7 The Fonts Box The Fonts box is used to select a font It is popped up when you select a font resource for a widget or from inside another editing box e g when you are creating a menu with the Menu Editor box Templates f W Current selection Resource buttonFontList Font Families Weight Miscellaneous Fonts adobe courier bold fixed adobe helvetica pater heb6x13 adobe interim dm Style heb8x13 adobe itc avant garc ro helvetical0 adobe itc lubalin gi helvetical2 7 Size A gt 140 Name adobe helvetica bold r 14 abcdefghijkimnopqrstuvwxyz ABCDEF GHIJK
180. eoutID The w parameter must not be null but name can be SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Definition of an active value which re activates its get script every second name Myav get global handle Beep handle GetActive ValueTimeOut self Myav 1000 a push Button which activates the active value s get script labelString Get_activeval activateCallback global handle handle GetActive ValueTimeOut parent avwidget Myav 1000 a pushButton which stops the process labelString Stop_activeval activateCallback global handle StopTimeOut handle SEE ALSO FmSetActiveValueTimeOut FmStopTimeOut 275 C NAME FACE NAME FmGetCatD none SYNOPSIS nl_catd FmGetCatD DESCRIPTION Return the descriptor of the last opened catalog Non GLS machines will re turn 1 SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmCatOpen FmCatGetS 276 C NAME FACE NAME FmGetColorPixmap none SYNOPSIS Pixmap FmGetColorPixmap Screen screen char image_name Pixel foreground Pixel background DESCRIPTION Similar to XmGetPixmap but can also load color Pixmap files in the XWD format used by the xwd and xwud commands The function first calls XmGetPixmap to see if the image is already loaded or if it is a bitmap file name in which case the bitmap is loaded Otherwise it searches first in the directories defined by FMPIXMAPSPATH with a substitution character of P followed by XBMLANGPATH with a substit
181. er an assignment a control structure a function call a call to a named script 6 8 1 Assignments Assignments are as in C of the form lt left hand side gt lt right hand side gt The left hand side of an assignment can be a variable local or global a widget resource a widget property the special variable an active value of the form name widget name or widget name in XFace Maker The right hand side of an assignment can be any expression that is a constant integer character string or floating point a variable a widget reference a widget s resource a widget s property a function call a special variable or an active value s address name or widget name or contents name or wid get name in XFaceMaker an arithmetic expression which itself can be composed of arbitrary expression operands 137 The FACE Language 6 8 2 Control Structures FACE provides the if else while and for statements These have the same syntax and semantics as in C The following example illustrates the use of if else valueChangedCallback Loudness self value if Loudness 0 Reset Volume else if Loudness lt 10 Slide Slide Slide 10 SetVolume Slide else SetVolume Slide FACE provides a while loop equivalent to that used in C For example the following code performs a linear search in an application database for information keyed on a stri
182. erStatus resource of the Drop Transfer widget SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO XmDropTransferS tart 264 C NAME FACE NAME FmDtoi dtoi SYNOPSIS Int FmDtoi Pointer dp DESCRIPTION Return the conversion of the double pointed to by dp into an integer SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE parent scale value dtoi dblval SEE ALSO Fmltod atoi 265 C NAME FACE NAME FmEditLoop none SYNOPSIS void FmEditLoop DESCRIPTION The same as FmLoop but allows the user to load the editor using the CallEd itor function by typing lt Shift Control Escape gt on the keyboard while the pointer is in any application window other than one which was popped up by the function PopupAndWait SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmLoop 266 C NAME FACE NAME FmEnableTraversal FmEnableTraversal SYNOPSIS None FmEnableTraversal Widget w Int ht DESCRIPTION Enable keyboard traversal for Widget w and all its children by calling XmAddTabGroup w and setting the resources traversalOn to True and high lightThickness to At for all children of w SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE EnableTraversal parent XmRowColumn2 SEE ALSO FmDisableTraversal XmProcessTraversal 267 C NAME FACE NAME FmEqualString FmEqualString equal SYNOPSIS Boolean FmEqualstring String sl String s2 DESCRIPTION Return true if strings s and s2 are identical SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPL
183. es the current value of the resource from its widget argument e calls the Get script of the active value with the call_data pointing to the current value thus in the Get script refers to the current resource value e stores the value which may have been modified by the Get script into the ad dress specified by the caller of XtGetValues Usually you do not need to specify a Get script for your new resources since side effects when reading resource values are not frequent 11 2 6 The Resize Method If an active value with the name Resize exists for the model object of the class its Set script is called in the class Resize method with the following arguments 0 x position of the widget 1 y position of the widget 2 width of the widget 3 height of the widget 196 Widget Class Methods If a Resize method is specified the superclass s Resize is not called automatically by the Intrinsics For this reason a convenience function SuperclassResize w is pro vided which should be called in most cases in your Resize method 11 2 7 The Expose Method If an active value with the name Expose exists for the model object of the class its Set script is called in the class Expose method with the following arguments 0 event parameter of the Expose method 1 region parameter of the Expose method As for Resize a convenience function SuperclassExpose w event region is pro vided which should be call
184. essages from XFaceMaker Cliek here Oo to clear ae FACE i tee Status indica X ACE xFac Maker UIMS is ready clear the win tor dow Status Messages icons box S palette Figure 4 24 The Message Section The Status line above the message box describes the current internal condition of XFaceMaker itself While you are loading or saving files this line states which operation is underway and whether it has succeeded or failed The message box displays various messages from XFaceMaker including error messages The message box may be cleared by clicking on the Clear button on the top right hand side of the Message area The Message icons are shown below This closed safe indicates that the state of the De afe a ies sign process is saved wg The Design palette and XFM process icons are linked indicating that they are connected i e a Design pro XFM process ee ee cess is running 44 Figure 4 25 The Message Icons CHAPTER 5 The Editing Boxes This chapter contains brief descriptions of the XFaceMaker dialog boxes and their use Many of these boxes can be opened by clicking on the appropriate menu item but some are popped up only when the associated option or resource is selected The boxes are listed alphabetically with sub boxes listed under the main dialog box they are opened from Certain boxes are modal that is you must either respond to the question posed by the box
185. et When you use this box the required syntax elements are inserted automatically and XFaceMaker makes sure that they occur in the right order This box is popped up when you edit a resource of type accelerators or trans lation Parent AS BB maxRC Name La Cass xmbabeT ia Templates f B Current selection Resource translations Translation Table override ay lt EnterNotify gt eval parent TF value FmGetString sel f Translation lt LeaveNotify gt eval parent TF value Ada Replace Delete Type override Q augment Q replace Event type MotionNotify EnterNotify LeaveNotify E Rebuild Set Values Set Cancel Figure 5 39 The Translations Box Type Specifies how the translations are added to the table 112 m augment merges new translations into the existing default translation ta ble ignoring translations that conflict with existing ones m override tions m replace replaces the existing translations table with the new translations specified the default mode merges new translations into the existing de fault translation table new translations overriding any conflicting transla The Resource Edit Boxes Note You should check with the local widget documentation that the above modes are valid Translation table Displays the translations specified in XFaceMaker for the current ly selected widget and the mode the
186. et class does not use sub re sources pass 0 num_sub_resources specifies the number of sub resources in the sub_resources array icon_bitmap_file specifies the bitmap file to be used for the new icon in the Widget Toolkit Their size is typically 32x32 If NULL is passed a default icon is used If xfm_no_icon is passed no icon is used FmAddWidgetClass returns on success 0 on failure If successful the new widget class can be used like other classes and has the name contained in the WidgetClass record During the next call to the FmCallEditor function a new icon will be created for the new widget class in the User defined panel of the Toolkit FmAddWid getClass can be used several times in the same program to add several new widget classes XFaceMaker enforces no limit to the number of classes added SCOPE Application only SEE ALSO 232 FmAddResourceType C NAME FACE NAME FmApplnitialize none FmApplnitializeC none FmApplnitializel none SYNOPSIS Widget FmAppInitialize XtAppContext app_context_ret String class XrmOptionDescRec ops Cardinal num_options int argc String argv String fallback_resources ArgList args Cardinal num_args DESCRIPTION Initialize all data structures required by XFaceMaker and call XtAppInitial ize The return value is the default ApplicationShell returned by XtAppInitial ize You must call FmAppInitialize or FmInitialize at the beginning of the application
187. eturned in buffer This should be freed with free when it is no longer needed Similarly when a resource is set XFaceMaker calls XtConvert if necessary stores the result in a word then calls XtSetValues For the same widgets and resources as before Motif makes a copy of the value specified for the resource hence the original buffer provided can be freed For example parent XmText value buffer 165 Memory Management The contents of buffer is copied into the widget buffer should be freed afterwards if it is not used elsewhere and does not point to statically allocated memory In general any resource of type XmString is copied into a new buffer whenever it is accessed with XtGetValues The buffer thus created should be freed when no longer needed using StringFree Conversely when an XmString resource is changed using XtSetValues the widget keeps a copy of the XmString provided Thus the string provided can be freed after the XtSetValues Depending on your version of Motif however there may be some XmString resourc es that do not make a copy when queried the corresponding strings should not be freed Copies are not returned for resources which hold XmStringTables Therefore they should never be freed For other resources you should refer to your Motif doc umentation to know if they are handled directly or through a copy although the doc umentation is not always very specific 8 2 Literal Strings When literal stri
188. evelopment software compiler linker etc e A window manager Although XFaceMaker can run with different window man agers it is guaranteed to work with the OSF Motif window manager mwm e A graphic display consisting of a monitor a keyboard and a mouse There are two main types of graphic displays on which you can run the X Window System and thus XFaceMaker e Unix workstations These are Unix computers with a graphic screen They run the X server as a Unix process e X terminals X terminals run only the X server as a stand alone program The ap plication itself runs on the remote Unix host Motif based applications require a screen resolution of at least 1024 x 768 pixels If you plan to use color make sure you have 256 colors It is unreasonable to attempt to create a Motif based application with only 16 colors The following libraries must be installed on the host computer The Xlib Host applications call the Xlib library when they want to use the X serv er The Xlib is usually installed as usr lib libX11 a The X Intrinsics library Called the Xt library it is usually installed as usr lib libXt a The Motif 2 1 widget set It is usually installed as usr lib libXm a This version of XFaceMaker is designed to work with Motif 2 1 or Open Motif Zr The XFaceMaker libraries libFm a The interpreting library for using interpreted scripts libFm c a The C code library for fully compiled applicatio
189. f handles DialogShells SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Hide a transientShell which is the shell ancestor of self Hide toplevel SEE ALSO FmShowWidget FmLowerWidget 286 C NAME FACE NAME Fmlnitialize none FmlnitializeC none Fmlnitializel none SYNOPSIS Widget Fmlnitialize String name String class XrmOptionDescRec ops Cardinal num_ops Cardinal arge String argv DESCRIPTION Initialize all data structures required by XFaceMaker and call XtInitialize The return value is the default ApplicationShell returned by XtInitialize You must call FmInitialize at the beginning of the application not XtInitialize un less you have generated the c code interface with the standc flag set FmIni tialize has the same arguments as XtInitialize and you should consult the X documentation for a full explanation The line toplevel Fmlnitialize name Name NULL 0 amp argc argv is sufficient for an application called name which does not need to parse the command line to recognize its own options If you pass the class Xfm to FmAppInitialize it will be replaced by XfmApplication Otherwise the class name that you pass will be the class name of the application you are building The FmInitialize function is also available in two versions Fmlnitializel is defined in the libFm_e and libFm libraries while FmInitial izeC is defined in libFm_c The arguments and return values are the same as for FmInitialize See Compatib
190. f the same parent widget to have the same name This lets resource specification files use common widget names paste lt char gt paste Specify lt char gt as the accelerator for the paste widget oper ation try lt char gt try Specify lt char gt as the accelerator to switch to Try mode undo lt char gt undo Specify lt char gt as the accelerator for the undo operation 379 Command Line Options 13 1 4 Compilation Options When using the compilation commands the interface of XFaceMaker is not loaded and it exits immediately after the compilation without displaying windows on the screen However XFaceMaker still connects to the X Display so the X server must be running and the DISPLAY environment variable must be set correctly This al lows certain X data structures and functions to be used to validate the input file ansic ansic Generate C code with prototyped functions conforming to the ANSI C standard This is the default c cxx Generate a C class ct lib lt name gt exxClassLib Specify the base C class library ct name lt name gt exxClassNam Specify the C class name ct file lt name gt exxCFile Specify the C implementation file name ct t header lt name gt exxHFile Specify the C header file name cfile lt file c gt efile Explicitly specify the name for the C file generated by the compile or compilegroup options The default is to use the fm bas
191. f v is not compatible with the type Pointer a FACE error occurs lt widget gt lt avname gt arg can be used like a function call but calls an active val ue s set script instead of a function The arguments are stored in a structure start ing from the second field of the structure the first argument in field 1 the second argument in field 2 etc The active value s set script is called with the address of the structure passed as the argument for an immediate active value or in the argument otherwise The active value s script can reference the arguments by de 158 Constants claring a structure with the appropriate number of fields i e the number of argu ments plus one and storing or in a variable typed with the structure name The active value script can return a value by storing it in the first field of the struc ture Note that all fields of the argument structure must have the size of a FACE word which means that you can declare the structure in FACE but you cannot use a structure declared in C with fields of size different from sizeof XtArg Val 7 3 Constants XFaceMaker includes all the OSF Motif constants defined in Xm Xm h but not the definitions of resource names classes and types Thus constants such as XmATTACH_WIDGET or XmDIALOG_OK_ BUTTON are included but not re sources such as XmNwidth Predefined OSF Motif constants are of type Int or String 7 4 Type Casters The se
192. fied value to the resource and returns to the main Resource win dow Rebuild Applies the selected value and remains in the editor Set Values Applies the change by setting values and remains in the editor Set Updates the value in the Resources list but does not apply it Cancel Returns to the main Resource window with no value change 5 17 13 The Eval Script Editor The Eval action is a special case because it invokes a user defined script instead of a built in function In this context is the address of the X event structure Selecting the Eval action pops up a dialog box in which you can enter a standard FACE 113 The Editing Boxes script The script can call all the usual FACE functions and any application functions needed In particular it can call the function XtCallCallbacks and thus associate a callback to a particular key combination in addition to the standard one Templates W Current selection Resource translations Eval script arent TF value lok Cancel Select Lox Rebusas Set vaes set cancet Figure 5 40 Eval Script Editor The editor has the following fields Eval Script A text field for entering a FACE script OK This registers the script and applies it to the widget Cancel Returns to the Translations window without applying the script Select The cursor changes to a Move it over a widget or widget name and click This fetches
193. g point value then the operator performs a floating point opera tion but the other operands are not converted automatically to a floating point type you must use the function citof Expressions can be parenthesized and operator pre cedence is as in C 6 5 Include Files A file may be included in a FACE script using the include keyword followed by a file name i e include project face The included file may contain any FACE statements The including script is parsed as if the contents of the file had been included in the script 121 The FACE Language 6 6 Basic Objects FACE has the following kinds of objects e constants e variables e special variables e widgets e widget resources e active value variables when used with XFaceMaker e X properties 6 6 1 Object Types The type of objects in FACE is specified by a string whose content is arbitrary i e an application may define new variable types if it so desires as long as they satisfy the type checking and or type conversion done by FACE when a variable is used The usual type strings are defined in lt Xm Xm h gt They correspond to frequently used widget resource types such as Int String Pointer etc In addition FACE has some special types described in the next section All FACE objects are stored by the FACE interpreter in equally sized memory units which have the size of the X Toolkit defined XtArgVal typedef which is usua
194. gument For example Popup root PopupShell 2 result WaitForReturn is equivalent to result PopupAndWait root PopupShell SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE A push button shows a transientShell and waits for a return value the tran sientShell contains a messageBox whose okcallback calls Return in the push button activateCallback Show root TransientShell0 str WaitForReturn printf os n str in the MessageBox okCallback Return self my returned string Hide toplevel This is equivalent to in the pushButton activateCallback str PopupAnd Wait root TransientShell0 printf os n str in the MessageBox okCallback Return self my returned string Hide toplevel SEE ALSO FmPopupAndWait FmReturn 341 C NAME FACE NAME FmWarpPointer WarpPointer SYNOPSIS None FmWarpPointer Widget w DESCRIPTION Move the mouse pointer to the center of widget w Should be used in rare cas es taking control of the pointer independently from the user is contrary to good ergonomics and to Motif Style guide recommendations SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE In a pushButton force the pointer to move to the center of a sibling drawing Area WarpPointer parent XmDrawingArea0 SEE ALSO 342 C NAME FACE NAME Fm Widest FmWidest SYNOPSIS Int Fm Widest Widget lt DESCRIPTION FmWidest returns the width of the widest widget of up to twelve widgets the ma
195. hadowPixmap O S_ Image Images 0 ManForegroundPixmap O S image Images 0 ManHighlightPixmap O S image Images 0 ManTopShadowPixmap O S image Images 0 MenuWidget O S Widget Widget 0 MultiClick W I Enumeration Enumeration multiclick_discard 0 NavigationType W I Enumeration Enumeration none 0 Orientation W I Enumeration Enumeration vertical 1 Packing W I Enumeration Enumeration pack_tight 1 Pixel OJS 0 Colors 0 Pixmap O S image Images 0 Position W I Jint Integer 0 PrimBottomShadowPixmap O S_ Image Images 0 PrimForegroundPixmap O S image Images 0 PrimHighlightPixmap O S image Images 0 PrimTopShadowPixmap O S image Images 0 ProcessingDirection W I Enumeration Enumeration max_on_top 0 ResizePolicy W I Enumeration Enumeration resize_none 0 G get_value A avtype o offset O RT_OBJECT S RT_STRING W RT_WIDGET I RT_INTEGER 227 Table 12 3 Predefined Resource Types Type G A Avname Boxname Enumeration 1st o RowColumnType WIT Enumeration Enumeration work_area 0 ScrollBarDisplayPolicy W I Enumeration Enumeration static 0 ScrollBarPlacement W I Enumeration Enumeration bottom_right 0 ScrollingPolicy W I Enumeration Enumeration automatic 0 SelectionPolicy W I Enumeration Enumeration single_select 0 SelectionType W I Enumeration Enumeration dialog_w
196. he XFaceMaker process and then restored into the initial Design process 3 1 3 Launching a New Design Process The user can control the Design process using the Restart Design Process command in the File menu This command terminates the Design process with a confirma tion if the current interface was modified The Design Process Restart dialog box appears See the previous sections on how to choose the Design process and its op tions The Restart Design Process command is used to start a different Design process and gives access to the Dynamic Extension functionality in XFaceMaker For example suppose you want to define a new C function and add it to XFaceMaker so that it can be called in a callback As in previous versions you have to write your function compile it and link it with a main program containing calls to FmInitialize FmAt tachFunction and FmCallEditor In fact XFaceMaker will do everything except writing the function automatical ly as explained in the Application chapter of the XFaceMaker User s Guide The difference is that you don t have to exit your current XFaceMaker and start the new one from the beginning Instead you just have to call the Restart Design Process command and specify the new program as the Design process Your new function is now available When XFaceMaker is running in mono process mode without any Design process connected the Restart Design Process switches bac
197. he deleted warnings are Resource lt re source name gt might need conversion and Unknown resource lt resource name gt Note that these warnings should be suppressed or ignored only if you are sure that the specified resource does not need special conversions See also silentmode rdb rdb Create files lt file gt fm_rdb and lt file gt rdb In conjunction with compile or compilegroup the C code version of the file lt file gt fm_rdb is also generated rdbclass lt name gt rdbclass When used in conjunction with rdb this option spec ifies the first component of the resource specification to be name rdbresources lt type gt rdbresources Specify resource types or names to be saved in RDB resource files stande standc Used with the compile option causes the generation of standal one C code i e C code that need not be linked with the Fm_c library startup lt file fm gt startup This option allows an FACE script file to be loaded be fore compilation begins Ordinarily this is used to load the description of a wid get sub class which exists in the fm file to be compiled but has not been linked into XFaceMaker silentmode silentmode This option disables all warning messages from the FACE interpreter and C code generator This can be used to suppress warning 381 Command Line Options messages issued by FACE when generating standalone C code if you are sure that all resource conversions in yo
198. he type of the return value in the C code type is the type of the first argument in the C code The types declared for MyCfunction typel type2 should correspond to those declared for the FACE function MyFunction If the number of argu ments does not match the behavior is undefined SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 326 C NAME FACE NAME FmSetSuperclassInfos none SYNOPSIS int FmSetSuperclassInfos WidgetClass widget_class char includes char class_parts char widget_parts char class_init char class_part_init WidgetClass subclass_prototype int subclass_prototype_size void subclass _class_part_init DESCRIPTION Specify information on user defined widgets FmSetSuperclassInfos returns 1 on success 0 on failure It has the following parameters widget_class here you should pass the same address as given in FmAdd WidgetClass to identify the class includes specifies the include file s string to output in the C code file con taining the widget definition class_parts is a string containing the C declarations of the class parts of the class and its superclasses up to and including Core widget_parts is a string containing the C declarations of the widget parts of the class and its superclasses up to and including Core class_init is a string containing the C initializer of the widget class not includ ing Core class_part_init is a string containing the C code to output in the
199. hen an uninitialized element is accessed this value must be a constant it is 0 if not specified For example here is how to declare a hash array a of integers indexed by strings and with a default value of 1 Int a String 1 146 Using Arrays in FACE An array can be declared anywhere as for other FACE variables and can be declared local or global The scope rules are the same as for ordinary variables FACE function parameters can be declared as arrays for example function String Foo String a Int Int i Array variables can be used as any other variables In particular they can be passed as parameters to functions return a i String a Int Foo a 10 The same array can be accessed using different array variables declared with differ ent types For example say you want to access a hash array sometimes by strings and sometimes by values To do this you can declare two array variables and assign the value of one to the other Int indexed by ints Int Int indexed by strings String indexed by strings indexed by ints It is also possible to declare an array variable without actually declaring the array To do this declare an ordinary variable of type FaceArray FaceArray a Such a variable can hold the value of any array but it cannot be used to access the elements of the array 147 The FACE Language 6 11 2 Allocating Arrays Declaring a FACE array does not allocate any
200. his can be either an existing box or a new one defined in a customized Fm fm file If boxname is NULL the type box is used default_value specifies a default value to display in the editing box if no value has been defined yet for the resource The default value can be NULL enumeration specifies the values will be displayed in the list of the Enumer ation box if the boxname is Enumeration Each value must end with the character n For example choice 1 nchoice2 nchoice3 n If boxname is not Enumeration this argument must be NULL Alterna tively you can use the function FnAddEnumeratedType offset specifies the integer value of an enumerated resource type The values following must be contiguous Therefore if offset is 3 then choice1 is 3 choice2 is 4 and choice3 is 5 FmAddResourceType returns on success 0 on failure For example FmAddResourceType NewType1 RT_OBJECT RT_STRING 0 0 0 0 0 This call declares the new resource type NewTypel When a resource of this type is selected in the XFaceMaker resource list an active value called NewTypel will be set and the shell called NewType1 will pop up Table 12 3 Predefined Resource Types lists the resource types already defined in XFaceMaker with their parameters You can use the existing editing boxes for your new resource types but in that case the parameters get_val avtype and avname must match those of the e
201. idget selected has solid handles m Parent The selection will be aligned relative to the parent widget m Edit The selection will be aligned with respect to the last widget selected called the Edit or the current widget the one which has the x handles instead of the solid handles 55 The Editing Boxes Align by Specifies whether the widget is to be aligned by position or size m Position The widget will move to a new position to align as specified m Size The widget will change size to align as specified m Grid The Grid field contains two items a slider used to set the spacing between lines of the grid e the On and Off toggle buttons When On is set and the current widget is a BulletinBoard or a subclass of BulletinBoard the grid is displayed a child widget placed moved or resized on the composite widget will snap to the nearest grid line both horizontally and vertically When Off is set no grid is displayed widget positions and sizes are not constrained by XFaceMak er The grid will not exist in your interface it is only a visual and editing aid placed on the Composite by XFaceMaker Apply Aligns the widgets as specified Close Closes the Alignment box If Apply was not clicked before closing the box no changes are made to the selected widget 56 The Attachments Box 5 3 The Attachments Box The Attachments box is used to specify widget attachments within an XmForm par ent The widget
202. iffer ent addresses In a value indexed hash array only the immediate value of the index is used and only two values which are arithmetically equal give access to the same element A FACE linear array is similar to a C array The elements are stored in a contiguous area of memory and are indexed by integers only The memory for a linear array is allocated and expanded automatically as needed FACE linear arrays can give access to C arrays defined by the application or by Motif widgets for example the array of items in an XmList 6 11 1 Declaring Arrays FACE arrays are special variables which must be declared with the following syntax lt element type gt lt variable name gt lt key type gt lt default value gt element type is the FACE type of the elements of the array if an element type is specified the array elements will behave like statically typed variables with type checking otherwise any type can be stored in the array and all array elements will have the type Any variable name is the name of the FACE variable which will hold the array key type is the FACE type of the keys used to index the array if the key type is String then the array will be indexed by strings otherwise it will be indexed by values If the key type is not specified it defaults to None and the array is in dexed by values for linear arrays the key type must be Int default value allows to specify a value which will be returned w
203. ighlighted as well as the item in each menu that selects the next cascade 76 The Menu Editor e You can reorder items within a menu by dragging their menu representation just as you would in the Widget List or Widget Tree e You can double click on an item in the menu representation to open its corre sponding pulldown menu This does not work in the Widget Tree or List but you can still select the pulldown menu there 5 12 2 The Dialog Section The dialog section of the Menu Editor is used for editing Only the most commonly used resources are available in the Menu Editor but you may still use the Resources box for complete control of an object s resources The resource settings of the cur rently selected menu item appear in the editing fields You can change their values then click the Add or Replace button to apply the changes You can select the menus or menu items to be edited on the interface itself in the Widget List or in the Widget Tree When you select an option menu you automati cally select its accompanying pulldown menu Furthermore you can select any item visible in the menu representation by clicking on it You can select a pulldown menu for editing by double clicking on its cascade button in the menu representation The dialog section has the following fields depending on the type of menu item being edited Widget Name Displays the widget name Except for separators you will normally not need to enter a
204. ility with libFm_c and lib Fm_e in the Ap plication chapter of the User s Guide SCOPE Application only SEE ALSO Xtinitialize FmAppInitialize 287 C NAME FACE NAME FmInternationalize Internationalize SYNOPSIS String FmInternationalize String str DESCRIPTION Scan the string str which must be of the form MSG n m xxx call FmCat GetS searching the message catalogs that are currently open and return the resulting string or NULL if str does not have the correct format SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Internationalize a string returned by an application function function String GetMyString sl GetMyString Q s2 Internationalize s1 SEE ALSO 288 C NAME FACE NAME FmlItoa itoa SYNOPSIS String Fmltoa Int i DESCRIPTION Convert integer i into a statically allocated string SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Set a push button s label string to the value of a scale s itoa parent scale value parent GetLabel labelString s free s SEE ALSO Fm Itod atoi 289 C NAME FACE NAME FmlItod itod SYNOPSIS None FmItod Int i Pointer dp DESCRIPTION Convert integer i into a double and store the result in the double variable pointed to by dp SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO Fmltoa FmDtoi 290 C NAME FACE NAME Fmltof itof SYNOPSIS None Fmltof Int i Pointer JP DESCRIPTION Convert integer i into a float and store th
205. in with 176 Pattern Files and no special character sequence is necessary at the end of the line The pattern line character sequences can be specified as command line options In the examples below we will use the C syntax Patterns are enclosed within lines of the form begin pattern lt pattern name gt end pattern lt pattern name gt Pattern lines are broken into tokens separated by blanks or special characters which are the same as for description files Tokens can also be quoted in the same manner as in description files using back quote quote sequence pairs Contiguous tokens can be separated by quoting one of the tokens or both The begin pattern line can contain an optional conditional expression in one of two forms begin pattern lt pattern name gt lt left gt lt op gt lt right gt begin pattern lt pattern name gt lt expression gt In the first form lt op gt can be one of equal not equal is contained in or contains For the contains is contained in operators one of the values must be the name of an attribute of which the value is a list the operator tests if the other value is contained in the list This form of expressions is obsolete The second form of expressions enclosed in square brackets allows more complex conditions using a C like syntax Attributes are replaced by their values The C op erators amp amp
206. ine Sefm client calleditor restore Command W Restore state _ Trusted state OK cancet wat ext xFM Help 20 Figure 4 6 The Restart Design Process Box m Launch Appli Launches the editable version of the application built using the Build Appli command The application is launched as a new Design process m Launch New XFM Like Launch Appli but launches a new XFM built using the command New XFM described above m Build Appli Builds the editable version of your application directly from XFaceMaker The output is displayed in a pop up window You may have to modify the generated Makefile to compile and or link your application if your system requires special compilation flags or libraries You can also modify the application file patterns if you want to change permanently the way XFaceMaker generates the application files on your system m Build XFM Like the Build Appli command but used to compile a new XFM after using the command New XFM described above m Save State To Disk Saves the current state of the Design process in the current directory in a set of files prefixed by xfm_ Used to save the process to disk Use with the restore option Save Prefs Saves your current screen configuration including the position of the widgetstores editing boxes etc as well as the currently loaded groups tem plates and classes and the options set in the Options menu This information is stored i
207. ing e g Release 2 1 1 a A full description of the problem including any error messages if applicable A copy of the User s Guide so we can point out where further help may be found NSL Technical Support 2 3 NSL Technical Support Technical Support is available Monday to Friday except for French national holidays 9 00 am 12 30 pm 2 00 pm to 6 00 pm MET 2 5pm Fridays From French and English speaking support staff By phone 33 1 58 18 61 61 ask for the Technical Support Department By electronic mail addressed to support nsl fr By FAX 33 1 58 18 61 60 addressed to Technical Support including your re turn FAX number and a telephone number where you can be reached 2 4 Further Help NSL gives the following courses at their premises in Paris XFaceMaker XFaceMaker WF The Xlib The OSF Motif Toolkit Interface Design Languages C C PostScript Java HTML WEB site creating and maintaining Please contact the training department at 33 1 58 18 61 61 for more details and for information on courses tought in English You can order extra copies of the User s Guide or Reference Manual Please contact the sales department at 33 1 58 18 61 61 for a full list of the manuals available and prices NSL Product Support 10 CHAPTER 3 Architecture The XFaceMaker architecture is based on two distinct processes 1 The XFaceMaker process is the main process which implements the XFa
208. ing Array Elements Array elements are accessed with the following syntax lt array variable gt lt key gt Array elements can be used in expressions and as the left hand side of assignments Int a Int new_array a 10 20 printf element no 10 of array a is d n a 10 Array keys can be arbitrary expressions If the array has been declared with a key type the type of the key is checked against the declared key type In an assignment if the array has been declared with an element type the type of the right hand side is checked Writing to a non existing entry of a hash array creates a new entry Writing beyond the current bound of a linear array expands the array automatically except if the ar ray was initialized using new_c_array If the index used to write to a linear array is greater than the last index i e greater than or equal to the size of the array the array is also expanded automatically but any gap is filled with zeros not with the ar ray s default value Reading from an array element which was not previously written to returns the de fault value specified when the array was declared or 0 if no default value was spec ified Reading from an unallocated array i e an array variable with a null value also returns the default value Writing to an unallocated array does nothing 149 The FACE Language 6 11 4 Iterating Through Arrays There are two functions which allow the progr
209. ion W I Positivelnt Integer 0 DraglnitiatorProtocolStyle W I Enumeration Enumeration drag_none 0 DragReceiverProtocolStyle W I Enumeration Enumeration drag_none 0 DropSiteActivity W I Enumeration Enumeration drop_site_active 0 DropSiteType W I Enumeration Enumeration drop_site_simple 0 EditMode W I Enumeration Enumeration multi_line_edit 0 ExtensionType W I Enumeration Enumeration cache_extension 0 Float WII J0 0 0 G get_value A avtype o offset O RT_OBJECT S RT_STRING W RT_WIDGET I RT_INTEGER 226 Table 12 3 Predefined Resource Types Type G A Avname Boxname Enumeration 1st o FileTypeMask WIT Enumeration Enumeration file_directory 1 Font OJIS FontList Fonts 0 FontList OIS FontList Fonts 0 FontStruct OJIS FontList Fonts 0 GadgetPixmap O S image Images 0 HorizontalDimension W I Positivelnt Integer 0 HorizontalPosition W I Int Integer 0 Horizontallnt W I Int Integer 0 IconAttachment W I Enumeration Enumeration attach_north_west 0 Image OIS JO Images 0 IndicatorType W I Enumeration Enumeration n_of_many 1 InitialState W I Enumeration Enumeration NormalState 1 Int wil JO Integer 0 KeyboardFocusPolicy W I Enumeration Enumeration explicit 0 LabelType W I Enumeration Enumeration pixmap 1 ListSizePolicy W I Enumeration Enumeration variable 0 ManBottomS
210. ions set in the window C code generated by XFaceMaker varies according to the options that have been set in the C Code Options window and also according to the set tings of the other options such as UIL RDB etc See section 5 4 C Code Op tions and the X FaceMaker User s Guide for further detail RDB Pops up the RDB Options window When the Save RDB file checkbutton is set and applied some or all of the resources of the interface will be saved into an RDB Resource Data Base file when the interface is saved as well as a ver sion of the fm file without the RDB resources whose extension is fm_rdb Use the Save RDB Options window to specify RDB options i e the types or names of resources that are to be copied to the RDB file and stripped from the fm_rdb file See section 5 15 RDB Options for further detail Message Catalog Pops up the Message Catalog Options window When the Save message catalog file checkbutton is set and applied a message catalog source file will be saved when the interface is saved Un numbered messages are numbered automatically Use this window to specify the default set number used for inter nationalized strings See the XFaceMaker Users Guide Internationalization chapter and section 5 13 Message Catalog Options Box for further detail UIL Pops up the UIL Options window When the Save UIL file checkbutton is 31 The Command Window 32 set and applied a UIL language version of the interface
211. ir usage Usage Used to specify the usage for the active value Custom Editor Opens the editor you specified using the FMEDITOR environment variable Clear clears the editing field Get Set Script Used to enter get and set scripts for the active value By convention the get script should do whatever is necessary to update the active value s data to reflect the interface s current setting The set script should do whatever is neces sary to update the interface so that it displays the current value of the data Add adds the newly defined active value to the list of active values for the widget Replace Replaces the active value that is being edited with the modified settings Delete Deletes the selected active value and its get and set scripts Close Closes the Active Values window If you have added by clicking on the Add button an active value to the widget you are editing the active value is registered with the widget If not clicking Close merely closes the window without chang ing the widget 46 The Active Values Box 5 1 1 Interface An active value whose usage is set as interface is used to share data with the appli cation or to define a script a pseudo resource or a method nn i a a ie te Usage interface Q drag source Q drop site Q widget class C class Type ff E vValue f E Storage global Q per widget lt gt per call J Allocate automatically Active values Access
212. it click on the ellipsis next to the resource in the Resources list Parent AS BB Name anslBarGraph Class finslBarGraph Templates f W Current selection Resource interval value fio 5 _ 100 OK Rebuild Set values Set Cancel Figure 5 35 The Integer Box The Integer box has the following fields value Used to specify the value for the resource The slider can also be used to change the value Max and min buttons Used to set the maximum and minimum values for the re source Clicking on a button changes the button s maximum or minimum value by a power of 10 OK Applies the specified value to the resource and returns to the main Resource win dow Rebuild Applies the value by rebuilding and remains in the editor Set Values Applies the change by setting values and remains in the editor Set Updates the value in the list but does not apply it Cancel Returns to the main Resource window without value change 107 The Editing Boxes 5 17 9 The Pixmaps Box The Pixmaps box is used to select bitmap or pixmap resources for the selected wid get It is popped up when a pixmap type resource is selected and is not available di rectly from a menu XFaceMaker Current Widget Resources ajm Parent sessionShell0 Name xmLabel Class xnLabel Templates W Current selection Resource highlightPixmap Filter sO 7 COPY ormlin6 opt NSL XFM
213. it_timer SetValues FaceStopTimer stop_timer FmAddArg FmBeep Beep CallCallbacksTimeOut CallEditor FmCall Value FmClearArgList ClearArgList FmCreateDragIcon FmCreateRectangle C Name FACE Name FmCreateXmString CreateXmString FmDeleteObject FmDeleteObject FmDisableTraversal DisableTraversal FmDoEvent FmDoEvent FmDragStart FmDragStart FmDropSiteRegister FmDropSiteRegister FmDropSiteRetrieve FmDropSiteRetrieve FmDropSiteUpdate FmDropSiteUpdate FmDropTransferAdd FmDropTransferAdd FmDropTransferStart FmDropTransferStart FmDtoi dtoi FmEnableTraversal EnableTraversal FmEqualString FmEqualString equal FmFreeArgList FmFreeArgList FmFtoi ftoi FmGetActiveValue GetActiveValue FmGetActiveValueA ddr GetActiveValueAddr FmGetActiveValueTimeOut FmGetPixmap FmGetString FmGetStringFromTable FmGetValue FmGetVersionString FmGetXmDisplay FmGetXmScreen FmHideWidget Fminternationalize Fmltoa Fmltod Fmltof FmListAllowKeySelection FmListGetItems GetActiveValueTimeOut FmGetPixmap GetString GetStringFromTable FmGetValue GetVersionString FmGetXmDisplay FmGetXmScreen Hide hide FmHideWidget Internationalize itoa itod itof FmListAllowKeySelection FmListGetltems 401 402 C Name FACE Name FmListGetNthItem FmListGetNthSelectedItem FmListGetSelectedItems FmListSetItems FmLowerWidget FmNewArgList FmNotEqualString FmPopupAndWait FmRaise Widget FmRegisterSimpleDropSite
214. ive a position of 50 percent with an offset of minus half the button width m The cross in the middle of the arrow buttons is used to change the resource be ing edited Click on it then on the arrow corresponding to the resource e g the top arrow for topAttachment The Attachments Box Attach to There are five choices form The widget is attached to the Form parent widget self The widget s attachment is in respect to itself none Specifies no attachment BBB B position The widget is attached to the Form parent widget with a relative po sition B widget The widget is attached to a sibling widget Note that the widget you attach to must be created before the current widget no offset checkbutton When set the attachment is done without offsets that is the object will be attached flush to the Form or to the sibling you specify or at the relative position you specify e Offset Sensitive only if the no offset checkbutton is unset The value displayed in this field specifies the current offset To change this enter a new value directly or drag the object on the interface if Update Offsets is set Position Sensitive only if attach to position has been selected In this mode the wid get s attachment is always to the Form parent s border If the interface is resized a widget thus attached keeps its position relative to the Form s border Enter the widget s position in this field Widget If you select
215. k to dual process mode by start ing a new Design process 14 CHAPTER 4 The Command Window This chapter describes the XFaceMaker Command window the Menus Icons Try button Toolkit and Message area Menus XFaceMaker 3 5 OSF Motif 1 2 Try button File Edit View Modules Windows Options Help Edit and Display icons barGraph b3 i barGraph Toolkit Eisinga Status FACE r XFaceMaker UIMS is ready icons KA 5 Message area Figure 4 1 The Command Window 15 The Command Window 4 1 The XFaceMaker Menus The Command window contains seven pulldown menus File Edit View Modules Windows Options and Help Each menu contains a number of commands that you can issue by selecting the appropriate menu item If a menu item is followed by an ellipsis or an arrow clicking on the item will open a dialog box or a sub menu with further choices 4 1 1 The File Menu New Open Read Save Save As Save Selected As Save Project As Save Appli Files Save MS Windows Files Load Extensions Ca Design Process Save Prefs Change Directory Print Exit Figure 4 2 The File Menu The File Menu contains the following items e New Clears XFaceMaker by removing all user defined widgets from the inter face If you have not saved your work since the last modification an alert box will warn you This command also
216. king here adds the resource specified in the Resource Name or Type field 95 The Editing Boxes to the list of preferred resources Replace Clicking here replaces the selected resource in the list of preferred resources with the resource specified in the Resource Name or Type field Delete Clicking here deletes the selected resource from the list of preferred resourc es Sort Order This field gives you options for changing the sort order and display op tions of the Resources List The sort order options are m alphabetical Present resources in alphabetical order m by subclass Group resources by subclass i e the widget specific resources are first followed by inherited then core resources m by superclass Group resources by superclass i e the core resources come first followed by any inherited resources and ending with the current wid get s resources Place XFM resources at top bottom Displays the XFM resources at the top or bot tom of the list as specified Place active values at top bottom Displays the active values at the top or bottom of the Resources list as specified Gather set resources Setting this option groups resources that have user defined values and displays them at the top of the Resources list or after the Preferred Resources if you have established that list Show template resources Setting this option displays any template resources that have been set Sho
217. l which in turn contains the other widgets of your interface and possibly additional TopLevelshells if your application has several windows If the topmost widget of filename is not an ApplicationShell then it must be of a subclass of Shell and it will be created as a child of the default ApplicationShell returned by FmInitialize In this case the default Applicationshell will be visible on the display as a small window in the top right hand corner containing the current version of XFace Maker FmLoad returns the topmost widget of your interface normally an Applica tionShell or if there are several main shells the first one If it is an Appli cationShell this will replace the default one created by FmInitialize Notes If your interface contains more than one window then you should de fine one of these windows as the main window and the additional windows as the secondary windows The main window should be an ApplicationShell and secondary windows should be TopLevelShells with their popup flag set If your interface scripts call application functions you will need to attach them before you load the interface See FmAttachFunction SCOPE Application only 298 main shells are those that are not children of one another NSL does not recom mend building files with more than one toplevel object since only the first toplevel object will be accessible through the widget ID returned by FmLoad Note that while FmLoad
218. lEditor 242 FmCallValue 243 FmCatClose 244 FmCatFind 245 FmCatGetS 246 FmCatOpen 247 FmChangeValueAddress 248 FmClearArgList 249 fmcolors 378 fmcolors 378 FmConvertProcStruct 170 FmCreateDragIcon 250 FmCreateManagedObject 251 FmCreateObject 252 FmCreateRectangle 253 FmCreateXmString 254 FmDeleteObject 255 FmDeleteVariable 256 FmDisableTraversal 257 FmDoEvent 258 FmDragStart 259 FmDropSiteRegister 260 FmDropSiteRetrieve 261 FmDropSiteUpdate 262 FmDropTransferAdd 263 FmDropTransferStart 264 FmDtoi 265 FmEditLoop 266 FMEDITOR 25 387 FmEnableTraversal 267 FmEqualString 268 FmFetchValue 269 FmFetchValueAddress 270 fmfile 385 FMFILEPATH 387 fmfonts 378 fmfonts 378 FmFreeArgList 271 FmFtoi 272 FmGetActiveValue 273 FmGetActiveValueAddr 274 FmGetActive ValueTimeOut 275 FmGetCatD 276 FmGetColorPixmap 277 FmGetFunctionsVector 278 FmGetPixmap 279 FmGetString 280 FmGetStringFromTable 281 FmGetValue 282 FmGetVersionString 283 421 FmGetXmDisplay 284 FmGetXmScreen 285 FmHide Widget 286 FmHideWidget 286 FmInitialize 287 FmInitializeCQ 287 FmInitializel 287 FmInitializel 287 FmInternationalize 288 FmItoa 289 FmItod 290 Fmltof 291 FMLIBDIR 387 fmlibdir 378 fmlibdir 378 FmListAllowKeySelection 292 FmListGetItems 293 FmListGetNthItem 294 FmListGetNthSelectedItem 295 FmListGetSelectedItems
219. lasses used in the in terface 10 2 1 2 Module Description Used to describe each fm file in the project NAME FILE Base names of the fm file Name of the fm file LCNAME Name of the fm file lower case BASENAME Name of the fm file upper case CREATENAME Creation name INDEX TOPOBJ Index of this fm file in the project Type of toplevel object MAPPED Mapped flag for topelevel object PARENTPATH Path in the Motif hierarchy of the toplevel object 10 2 1 3 Active Value Description 182 Genappli Options Used to describe each toplevel global active value CLASSNAME C class name NAME Name of the active value UCNAME Name of the active value with leading upper case character TYPE Active value type in the FACE sense CTYPE Active value type in the C sense the type in C code generated USAGE Active value usage FACE class cxx STORAGE Active value storage none object SCOPE Active value scope in C private public IMMEDIATE true if immediate active value false otherwise AUTOMATIC true if automatic allocation false otherwise GENFUN In C tru if automatic function generation was requested VALUE Initial default value in string format 10 2 1 4 Resource Description Used to describe each resource of the toplevel object NAME Name of the resource UCNAME Name of the resource with leading upper case character TYPE Resource type in the FACE sense CTYPE Resource type in the C sense the type
220. lay Icons There are three sets of icons in the Command window to help you visualize and edit your interface The Edit Display icons are described below The Status icons are de scribed in Section 4 7 The third set of icons represent the widgets in the Toolkit The Toolkit is described in Section 4 6 Delete al Paste Hide Widget List Raise Widget Tree Lower Track Cut Expand Copy Shrink Figure 4 21 The Edit Display Icons The edit icons are briefly described below For more details on their use please con sult the XFaceMaker Users Guide Delete Used to delete widgets from the interface Hide Used to hide selected widgets on an interface Lower Used to move selected widgets to the background so that they no longer occlude other widgets Raise Used to move selected widgets to the foreground so that they are no longer occluded by other widgets Cut Used to remove the selected widgets from the interface and put them into the widget cut buffer Copy Used to place a copy of the selected widgets into the widget cut buffer The widgets are not removed from the interface Paste Used to place the current contents of the widget cut buffer in a window List Used to display or close the Widget List Tree Used to display or close the Widget Tree Track Changes the mark cursor to a question mark waits for the use to click on a widget or widget name gets the name of that widget in the interface hierarchy stores it in th
221. layRect XmToggleButtonSetState XmTrackingEvent XmTrackingLocate XmTranslateKey XmUninstallImage XmUpdateDisplay XmVaCreateSimpleCheckBox XmVaCreateSimpleMenuBar XmVaCreateSimpleOptionMenu XmVaCreateSimplePopupMenu XmVaCreateSimplePulldownMenu XmVaCreateSimpleRadioBox Xm WidgetGetBaselines XmWidgetGetDisplayRect 414 Index newxfm 384 Symbols 142 C 207 fm 207 fm file environment variables 387 fm_rdb 31 381 _Xdefaults 385 xfm startup 20 A accelerator 78 379 in menus 78 AcceptFocus method 198 active value 389 active values 157 resources 189 usage 46 C class 46 drag source 46 drop site 46 interface 46 widget class 46 variables 157 Active Values box 46 C class 53 drag source 49 drop site 50 interface 47 opening 29 widget class 51 Alignment box 24 55 ANSI C 62 ansic 380 ansic 380 Any 124 appclass 377 application edit files 25 files 25 genappli utility 175 application functions 143 161 declaring 143 applicationClassName 377 ApplicationShell in FACE 129 name 86 appliFiles 384 applifiles 384 arrays 146 clearing 151 hash array 146 in structures 154 linear 146 assignments 131 137 atoi 350 Attachment box 25 57 attachments 57 and Auto position 86 and visible 26 auto 126 auto position 86 auto size 87 autoclient 383 autoPlace 377 autoplace 377 415 autopos 389 autoposition 23 autosave 383 Auto Save State 13 32 autosize 23 389 B Beep 239 begin pa
222. lays existing members of the C class Type This depends on the Member Kind data or function m data Enter the FACE type of the data member m function The type of a member function is a user defined argument struc ture that defines the return type and the parameters of the function Enter the name of the structure in the type field and define it in the set script of the func tion The structure s fields will be interpreted as follows The first field corresponds to the value returned by the function Its type a FACE type is the return type of the function Its name will be used to spec ify the return value unless the return type is None which corresponds to the C void type 53 The Editing Boxes The remaining fields correspond to the arguments of the function The or der in which they appear in the structure will be their order in the argument list of the C member function Each type is a FACE type whose C counterpart will be used in the actual definition of the function Value This depends on the Member Kind data or function m For a data member enter the initial value here m For a member function this field is not used and will be grayed out so that it is not editable Member Kind There are two choices m data to edit data members m function to edit member functions Generate access functions When set specifies that XFaceMaker generate two pub lic member functions for r
223. led 385 Command Line Options 386 CHAPTER 14 Environment Variables The following environment variables may be used with XFaceMaker or its applica tions You can set them from within XFaceMaker through the Windows menu in XFaceMaker s main window DISPLAY Standard X display variable The option display may also be used FMEDITOR Defines the text editor that XFaceMaker will call when the Custom Ed itor button is selected in one of the XFaceMaker editing windows Set this to wx242 to use NSL s text editor You may set it to vi or emacs if you prefer Make sure they are included in your PATH FMFILEPATH An environmental variable used by XFaceMaker to define the direc tories searched to find all Fm files F is used as the substitution character for the fm file name For example if your fm files are in the directory dir Appli Fm set this variable as follows dir Appli Fm F FMLIBDIR An environment variable which may be used to specify the directory where the XFaceMaker interface description file Fm fm should be fetched See also the fmlibdir command option FMPIXMAPSPATH An environment variable used by XFaceMaker to define the di rectories searched to find color pixmap files P is used as the substitution char acter for the XWD file name LANG Defines the language element of NLUSPATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH sun dec sgi sco LIBPATH ibm LPATH hp Standard environment variable to specify search paths for libr
224. lly de fined as a C long When the actual size of the memory needed to represent an object is greater than the size of an XtArgVal e g character strings a pointer to the object is stored instead Most common FACE objects have the same representation as in C integers are rep resented as C ints floating point values are represented as floats character strings are represented as pointers to null terminated character arrays Only FACE arrays have a special representation 122 Basic Objects FACE checks the types of objects as follows e when a function is called the types of the actual parameters are checked against the expected types e when a widget s resource is set or retrieved the type of the value is checked against the type of the resource except for String values which are automatically converted see Section 6 6 8 e when a value is assigned to a statically typed variable the type of the value is checked against the type of the variable FACE accepts a number of resource types as equivalent to the type Int they are Short Boolean Position and Dimension In addition when used with XFaceMaker and Motif all Motif types ending with Position or Dimension e g VerticalDimen sion are also equivalent to type Int Similarly the type Pixmap and all its Motif vari ants like XmBackgroundPixmap are equivalent Finally FACE accepts the types Window and Menu Widget as equivalent to Widget Unlike C when variables ar
225. lmost method 2 reply parameter of the Set ValuesAlmost method 11 2 11 The AcceptFocus Method If an active value with the name AcceptFocus exists for the model object of the class its Set script is called in the class AcceptFocus method with the following argu ments 0 time parameter of the AcceptFocus method In addition the AcceptFocus method of the class will return the contents of 1 which should be set by the Set script of the active value 1 is initialized to False 198 Widget Class Methods 11 2 12 The QueryGeometry Method If an active value with the name QueryGeometry exists for the model object of the class its Set script is called in the class QueryGeometry method with the following arguments 0 request parameter of the QueryGeometry method 1 geometry_return parameter of the QueryGeometry method In addition the QueryGeometry method of the class will return the contents of 2 which should be set by the Set script of the active value 2 is initialized to 0 11 2 13 The DisplayAccelerators Method If an active value with the name DisplayAccelerators exists for the model object of the class its Set script is called in the DisplayAccelerators method with the follow ing arguments string parameter of the DisplayAccelerators method 11 2 14 The GeometryManager Method If an active value with the name GeometryManager exists for the model object of the class its Set script is called in the Ge
226. lude in the new XFaceMaker you will build To load your own extensions click on the Browse button This opens a file se lector which lets you specify the extension file you want to load See the User The XFaceMaker Menus Guide for further detail Select extensions to load or click Browse to add a user defined extension XnslDraw XnslHtml Xns1lStand XnslTree Xrt3d XrtCommon XrtField XrtGear XrtGraph XrtTable Figure 4 4 The Extensions Selection Box Design Process The Design Process is the process in which you build your inter face interactively under the control of the XFaceMaker Process see Section 3 1 1 Restarting the Design Process This cascade menu provides the following options for saving or re launching the design process Restart Launch Appli Launch New XFM Build Appi Build XFM Save State to Disk Figure 4 5 The Design Process Menu m Restart Terminates the design process An alert box first asks for confirmation if the current interface has been modified The Restart Design Process box then appears You can set the options and restart the design process cancel or exit XFaceMaker If you cancel an alert box will ask if you want to run in mono process mode When XFaceMaker is running in mono process mode without any Design process connected selecting Restart switches back to 19 The Command Window Dual Process mode Design process command l
227. mand line which is displayed in the Command Line field W Save UIL file Dialog Shell Behavior Save children only lt gt Save UIL dialogs Command xfm uil LOK Apply Cose Reset Defautt Heip Figure 5 43 UIL Options The box has the following fields Save children only Generates all dialogs as XmDialogShell s with a XmMessage Box widget child Save UIL dialogs Generates predefined combinations of objects called Dialogs in the UIL file These use the Motif convenience functions e g XmCreate Warning Dialog Command Displays the command lines for the selected options OK Registers the option selected and closes the box Apply Applies the selected option and updates the command field without closing the box Close Closes the box without changing the options Reset Sets the options to the values validated with the last Apply Default Returns the options in this box to their default values 117 The Editing Boxes 118 CHAPTER 6 The FACE Language FACE is a language whose syntax is very close to that of C It was designed specif ically to program the dynamic part of a user interface and not as a general purpose language In contrast to ordinary C FACE scripts are not compiled while in the de velopment phase of interface construction but are interpreted so that the typical compile execute cycle is not required The FACE interpreter reads and executes one st
228. max self RC_2 TF value itoa HERR See acral self RC_3 TF value itoa cftoi self 2mslMeter0 minLimit a Execution Area Mono line Q Multi line Execute Debugger Output Execution aborted conte 70 Figure 5 12 The FACE Debugger The FACE Debugger Test your interface by putting XFaceMaker into Try mode and executing the script i e perform the action that launches the script If an error is detected it will be dis played in the Script source field and an error message will appear in the Debugger output field Errors or warnings encountered by the FACE parser or interpreter stop the debugger at the point of the error and start step by step mode Stepping aborting or continuing after an execution error terminates the Design process The explanatory text of the error is printed in the Debugger output area as well as in the XFaceMaker message window You can set breakpoints in scripts by inserting calls to the breakpoint function which takes two arguments a widget usually self and the breakpoint name a character string When the breakpoint is reached the debugger enters step by step mode and a message containing the breakpoint name is printed in the status area Debugging slows down the execution of scripts Therefore when you are not debug ging scripts you should deselect the Debug On checkbutton The Face Debugger window has the following fields Debug On When set
229. me InsertChild exists for the model object of the class its Set script is called in the class InsertChild method The argument passed to the script is the child widget w which must be inserted The self widget is the parent wid get which is an instance of the new class The InsertChild method can be set only for a sub class of a Composite If the model object for the class is not a sub class of a Composite a warning message is printed and the active value is ignored If you specify an InsertChild method you must call a function which inserts the new widget in its parent s children array otherwise the widget will not be managed by its parent To do this you can call the superclass s InsertChild method using the convenience function SuperclassInsertChild parent w SuperclassInsertChild self 11 2 17 The DeleteChild Method If an active value with the name DeleteChild exists for the model object of the class its Set script is called in the DeleteChild method The argument passed to the script is the child widget w which must be deleted self is the parent widget which is an in stance of the new class Note that the DeleteChild method can be set only for a sub class of a Composite If the model object for the class is not a sub class of a Com posite a warning message is printed and the active value is ignored If you specify the DeleteChild method you must call a function which removes the widget from its parent s children array
230. med group_name FmLoadGroup returns 0 if the group could not be loaded and non zero otherwise Unlike FmLoad FmLoadGroup only loads and parses the fm file FmCreateObject or FnCreateManagedObject must subsequently be called to create instances of the group Therefore in most cases the func tions FmLoadCreateGroup and FmLoadCreateManagedGroup should be used Unlike FmLoad if the interface contains several main shells only the first one will be loaded and created SCOPE Face script application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmLoadCreateGroup FmLoadCreateManagedGroup FmLoad 305 C NAME FACE NAME FmLoadWidgetClass none SYNOPSIS WidgetClass FmLoadWidgetClass String classname String classfile DESCRIPTION Load the fm file describing a new widget class for use in an application run ning in interpreted mode classname is the name of the class which should be loaded classfile is the name of the fm format class description file When XFaceMaker generates the C code for the class it defines a function called FmAdd lt ClassName gt WidgetClass which can be used to include the class into XFaceMaker The function is controlled by the XFM compilation flag SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE An application loading an interface called myinterface fm which makes use of a new widget class Myclass whose definition is in file myclass fm would do the following w FmlInitialize myappli Test NULL 0 amp arge argv k FmLoadWi
231. message is output in the main window message area Moreover XFaceMaker places any resources that are not compatible with MS Windows in the Restricted Resources of the Re source box so as to prevent you from setting such resources when developing an interface that you will want to convert to MS Windows 33 The Command Window 4 1 7 The Help Menu On Version Contact NSL HTML Documentation Index On FACE Functions On Main Window Icons Figure 4 20 The Help Menu The Help Menu contains the following items On Version Pops up a box with information about the version of XFaceMaker currently running Contact NSL when clicked connects your Netscape browser to NSL s www site XFaceMaker Tutorial launches Adobe Acrobat Reader to view the tutorial XFaceMaker Reference Manual Launches Adobe Acrobat Reader to view this Reference Manual XFaceMaker User Manual Launches Adobe Acrobat Reader to view the User Manual Motif 2 1 User Manual Launches Adobe Acrobat Reader to view the O Reilly User Manual for Motif 2 1 Motif 2 1 Reference Manual Launches Adobe Acrobat Reader to view the O Reilly Reference Manual for Motif 2 1 You may find further Help menu items added by your System Administrator giving additional ocal information on using XFaceMaker See Chapter 16 on how to add Help items 34 The Edit Display Icons 4 2 The Edit Disp
232. methods 192 naming 66 new 187 resources 188 saving 28 translations 188 widget instance record 201 ClassInitialize method 194 cleanappli 384 cleanAppliFiles 384 clear 355 client 383 client 383 client option 115 ClientMessageEvent 173 Close Resource Windows 29 cname 380 cname 380 color displays 98 colorIcons 378 coloricons 378 Colors Box color palette 98 RGB 101 Colors box 99 monochrome 99 command line options 377 Command Window 15 command window 15 compile 380 compile 380 compilegroup 380 compilegroup 380 Composite widgetstore 42 constants 124 159 defined 128 defining 135 floating point 144 in XFaceMaker 159 OSF Motif 132 417 control structures 137 Control widgetstore 42 ConvertString 135 214 coptions 380 coptions 380 copy 379 copy 379 copy icon 35 Copy selection 22 cPattFiles 384 cpattfiles 384 cprefix 380 cprefix 380 cprototype 120 createproc 389 CreateXmString 254 Creation Arguments 65 Creation Name 62 creation scripts 155 cstoi 356 Current File 39 Current Widget 39 custom editor 46 cut 379 cut 379 cut icon 35 Cut selection 22 CXX 380 cxxCFile 380 cxxClassLib 380 cxxClassNam 380 cxxHFile 380 D data sharing 47 418 data 151 357 debugFace 384 debugface 384 debugger 70 opening 30 defaultNames 378 defaultnames 378 define keyword 128 defined constant 128 delete icon 35 Delete selection 23 DeleteChild method 200 demos 1 descripti
233. mitive Widget FM_COMPOSITE for a Composite Widget FM_SHELL for a Shell Widget FM_MENUCASCADE for a Menu Cascade Widget FM_APPSHELL for an Application Shell Widget unsigned long flags specifies special characteristics of the new widget class The values are defined and explained below however the value FM_NORMAL or 0 can be used most of the time Possible values are FM_NORMAL normal case FM_NEED_REBUILD for Composite widgets which must be rebuilt when a child changed FM_ONE_EXPOSE for widgets which redraw on expose event hence clear all selection handles in one go FM_ONE_CHILD only one child widget is allowed FM_NO_ CHILD no child widgets are allowed FM_INIT_CLASS the class must be initialized before the first instantia tion this flag is no longer necessary because XFaceMaker now always initializes a widget class before it first creates an instance of that class the flag remains only for compatibility FM_KEY_SENS widget is sensitive to Key events This means that XFaceMaker cannot intercept characters in this widget and interpret them as its own accelerator keys FM_DONT_FREE_VALUES specifies that XmString resource values returned by GetValues should not be freed by XFaceMaker when it lists current resource settings in the resource window This is because some third party widgets do not return a copy of an XmString resource the way Motif widgets do default_resources specifies the default resource values that will b
234. mportTargets and XmNnumImportTargets arguments are specified as a comma separated string in targets SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmRegisterSimpleDropSite 260 C NAME FACE NAME FmDropSiteRetrieve FmDropSiteRetrieve SYNOPSIS Any FmDropSiteRetrieve Widget widget String name DESCRIPTION Call XmDropSiteRetrieve to retrieve the value of the resource name and re turn the retrieved value widget is the ID of the widget that encloses the drop site name is the name of the resource to be retrieved The value of the resource is returned by the function Only one resource can be retrieved for each call SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO XmDropSiteRetrieve 261 C NAME FACE NAME FmDropSiteUpdate FmDropSiteUpdate SYNOPSIS Widget FmDropSiteUpdate Widget widget String name None value DESCRIPTION Call XmDropSiteUpdate with an Arg built using name and value widget is the ID of the widget registered as a drop site where the resource is to be changed name is the name of the resource to be changed value is the new value for the resource SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO XmDropSiteUpdate 262 C NAME FACE NAME FmDropTransferAdd FmDropTransferAdd SYNOPSIS Any FmDropTransferAdd Widget widget Widget drop_transfer String targets None client_data DESCRIPTION Call XmDropTransferAdd with a drop transfer entry list built using the tar gets an
235. n a preference file called xfm startup in your home directory XFaceMak er loads this file automatically on startup Note that none of the user interface windows are memorized by this command Change Directory Pops up the File Selector for specifying a different working directory for interface and application files Messages Only on internationalized version of XFaceMaker i e on the machines that have GLS Global Language Support Opens a cascade menu containing the The XFaceMaker Menus following items m Open Catalogs Pops up the File Selector to specify the name of the message catalog from which internationalized messages should be fetched Several message catalogs can be opened successively XFaceMaker then looks for a message in all the open catalogs starting with the last one opened m Close Catalogs Closes all the open message catalogs Print Opens a cascade menu with the following items Window Tree Figure 4 7 The Print Menu m Window Used to create a postscript file of an interface window using the xwd command When you choose Print a cross hair cursor appears Click on an interface window to select it The File Selector box pops up in which to name the postscript file By default the ps file name is that of the window s shell widget Print options are defined in the Print Options box m Tree Pops up the File Selector for specifying the postscript file in which to print the
236. n is evaluated and the result applied to the value set global lt variable gt lt value gt Set a global variable Same action as for local but the value applies to all the patterns in the pattern file regardless of the object type begin if lt expression elseif lt expression gt ifelse end if Pattern lines enclosed within the branches of the if command are instantiated only if the corresponding condition is non zero If commands can nest at any level begin oneline end oneline 180 Pattern Files All pattern lines inside a oneline section are output on the same line One line sections can nest only the end of the top level oneline section will start a new line forcenewline Force a newline character to be output inside a oneline section 10 2 1 Pattern File Objects The main objects used in the application generation pattern files are listed in this sec tion Attributes that have a list value are marked with The value of other at tributes is a character string 10 2 1 1 Interface Description Used to describe a project these objects are used once in a project NAME The application name the name of the main fm file LCNAME Application name with leading lower case UCNAME Application name with leading upper case CREATENAME Creation name value of cname option T
237. n wid gets this depends entirely on the children block marker Indentation uses the space character tab characters exist only as formatting characters in FACE scripts where it represents the continuation of the previous line at the start of a line Beware of editors which insert tab characters automatically after newlines The commands xfmprint xfmtableprt and fmavprt can give you a compact view of the interface if they are available on your system They are described in the appendix 390 CHAPTER 16 Adding Help Files The XFaceMaker library Help directory contains ASCII files which provide the text for the Help menu You may change the text as appropriate to local conditions or add your own windows The files use the following rules Each new item begins on a new line with the item name Item names must not have leading or following space characters e Every text line for an item begins with lt tab gt Every blank line required must begin with a lt tab gt To include an extra help window add an XmPushButton to the Help Menu of Fm fm with the following callback activateCallback Help BoxTitle FmGetHelp FileName item The best example to follow is the On Mouse PushButton of Fm fm 391 Adding Help Files 392 CHAPTER 17 Porting the XFaceMaker C Code Library This chapter gives instructions to recompile the XFaceMaker run time support li brary libFm_c to a target platform on which the
238. nProc XtCallCallbacks XtClass XtDestroy Widget XtDisplay XtDisplayOfObject XtFree XtIsForm XtIsManaged XtIsSensitive XtIsSubclass XtMalloc XtManageChild XtMap Widget XtMove Widget XtName XtNameToWidget XtNewString XtOverrideTranslations XtParent XtPopdown XtPopup XtRealizeWidget XtRemoveGrab XtSetKeyboardFocus XtSetSensitive XtSuperclass XtUnmanageChild XtAddGrab XtAugmentTranslations XtCallActionProc XtCallCallbacks XtClass XtDestroy Widget XtDisplay XtDisplayOfObject XtFree XtIsForm XtIsManaged XtIsSensitive XtIsSubclass XtMalloc XtManageChild XtMap Widget XtMoveWidget XtName XtNameToWidget XtNewString XtOverrideTranslations XtParent XtPopdown XtPopup XtRealize Widget XtRemoveGrab XtSetKeyboardF ocus XtSetSensitive XtSuperclass XtUnmanageChild 398 C Name FACE Name XtUnmapWidget XtUnmapWidget XtUnrealizeWidget XtUnrealizeWidget XtWarning XtWarning XtWindowOfObject XtWindow 399 3 FACE or FmFunctions 400 C Name FACE Name FaceConvertString FaceEvalString FaceInitTimer FaceSetValues FaceStopTimer FmAddArg FmBeep FmCallCallbacksTimeOut FmCallEditor FmCall Value FmClearArgList FmCreateDragIcon FmCreateRectangle breakpoint cbtoi cftoi citof clear cstoi data destroy first new_array new_c_array new_ struct new_table next random return size ConvertString eval_ string FacelInitTimer in
239. nd par ent are those of the widget which called the callback Note however that a script definition or call can only appear on its own within a FACE script The following is not legal helpCallback self insensitive true wrong script help 140 FACE Functions 6 9 FACE Functions It is possible to define C like functions in FACE with the following syntax function Int MyFunction String s Boolean b if b True return strlen s else return 0 FACE function definitions can be nested that is a function can be defined inside an other function but the scope of functions is always the whole interface functions are declared globally Recursive calls are also allowed FACE functions can be defined anywhere in a FACE script They can be declared to be defined later using the same syntax to declare application functions as described in Section 6 9 2 When a function is defined or declared several times in FACE scripts the following rules are applied 1 An application function i e a function name attached to a real function by the application or a predefined function is never overridden 2 Ifa function is declared several times with different prototypes a warning is printed but the function declaration will be changed unless it is an application function first rule The return keyword has the same semantics as in C It must be called with parenthe ses and it may be called with zero or
240. ng selected from a TextList Running 1 ResetTable while Running Key GetTable Running equal Key DisplayCurrentTable For example Int a String for String s first a 0 s 0 s next a s 0 printf element s d n s a s 138 Statements 6 8 3 Function calls Function calls have the same syntax as in C lt function_name gt lt arg1 gt lt arg2 gt A function call can be used as a statement by itself in an expression or as the right hand side of an assignment When a function call is used by itself its return value is lost FACE checks the types of the arguments when calling a function as explained in Section 6 6 1 An argument type mismatch causes an error and execution aborts The current implementation of the FACE interpreter uses the traditional function calling conventions A function call is performed by the FACE interpreter through a function pointer declared in C as follows typedef int FaceFunctionPtr This means that the function pointer is not prototyped as it could be with an ANSI C compiler so all arguments are passed to the function using the default argument pro motion rules used by non ANSI C compiler e chars shorts and ints are passed as longs e floats are passed as doubles For this reason the FACE interpreter only distinguishes between float and integer or pointer arguments when calling functions see Section 6 10
241. ngWes XmTextGetTopCharacter XmTextInsert XmTextInsertWes XmTextPaste XmTextPosToXY XmTextRemove XmTextReplace XmTextReplaceWcs XmTextScroll XmTextSetAddMode XmTextSetCursorPosition XmTextSetEditable XmTextSetHighlight XmTextSetInsertionPosition XmTextSetMaxLength XmTextSetSelection XmTextSetSource XmTextSetString XmTextSetString Wes XmTextSetTopCharacter XmTextShowPosition XmTextX YToPos XmToggleButtonGadgetGetState XmToggleButtonGadgetSetState XmToggleButtonGetState XmTextGetSelectionPosition XmTextGetSelectionWcs XmTextGetSource XmTextGetString XmTextGetStringWes XmTextGetSubstring XmTextGetSubstringWes XmTextGetTopCharacter XmTextInsert XmTextInsertWcs XmTextPaste XmTextPosToXY XmTextRemove XmTextReplace XmTextReplaceWcs XmTextScroll XmTextSetAddMode XmTextSetCursorPosition XmTextSetEditable XmTextSetHighlight XmTextSetInsertionPosition XmTextSetMaxLength XmTextSetSelection XmTextSetSource XmTextSetString XmTextSetString Wes XmTextSetTopCharacter XmTextShowPosition XmTextXYToPos XmToggleButtonGadgetGetState XmToggleButtonGadgetSetState XmToggleButtonGetState 413 C Name FACE Name XmToggleButtonSetState XmTrackingEvent XmTrackingLocate XmTranslateKey XmUninstallImage XmUpdateDisplay XmVaCreateSimpleCheckBox XmVaCreateSimpleMenuBar XmVaCreateSimpleOptionMenu XmVaCreateSimplePopupMenu XmVaCreateSimplePulldownMenu XmVaCreateSimpleRadioBox XmWidgetGetBaselines XmWidgetGetDisp
242. nging the value Set Updates the value in the Resources list but does not apply it 102 The Resource Edit Boxes 5 17 5 The Enumeration Box The Enumeration box displays a list of possible resource values with the current set ting highlighted This box is popped up when you select an enumerated resource in the Resources box Parent AS BB minRC Name La Class EnLabe Templates StandardFgColor W Current selection Resource alignment alignment beginning alignment_center alignment_end OK Rebuild Set Values Set Cancel Figure 5 32 The Enumeration Box The Enumeration box has the following fields A display box Displays the list of enumerations for the resource named above the box The selected enumeration is displayed in inverse video OK Applies the specified value to the resource and returns to the main Resource win dow Rebuild Applies the selected value by rebuilding and remains in the Enumeration box Set Values Applies the change by setting values and remains in the editor Set Updates the value in the Resources list but does not apply it Cancel Returns to the Resource window without changing the value 103 The Editing Boxes 5 17 6 The Float Box The Float box is used to set a single precision floating point value for a resource The box is popped up when you click the ellipsis next to a resource that requires a float ing point value Par
243. ngs are used in a script the string is created by the XFaceMaker pars er the first time it is encountered The same string is used each time it is encountered by the FACE interpreter For example self label hello You should never attempt to free such a string It will be freed when the widget is destroyed If you want a copy of the string create it using the function NewString i e XtNewString or the equivalent malloc then strepy If you repeatedly assign a string some amount of memory will be lost on each Xt SetValues of the XmString as explained above Therefore you should do the conver sion explicitly if significant amounts of memory are involved str CreateXmString changing string self label str StringFree str 8 3 Eval Scripts When using Eval scripts for example in translations you should always name the scripts Each time it parses an unnamed Eval script XFaceMaker allocates a new structure in which to store the result of the parsing If it encounters a named Eval script however XFaceMaker creates the structure only once then re uses the al ready parsed script The name identifies the script for XFaceMaker 166 Returns from Function Calls 8 4 Returns from Function Calls When calling functions from a FACE script or the application you should refer to the function documentation to know what the function returns and as a consequence whether or not buffers should be freed For example Xm Te
244. ns libFm_e a The XFM executable library for applications which include XFaceMaker itself or to rebuild XFM Keyboard Conventions The following include files must be installed on the host computer The Xlib and X Intrinsics include files These are usually installed in usr in clude X11 e The Motif include files These are usually installed in usr include Xm e The XFaceMaker include file Fm h This is usually installed in usr include 1 2 Keyboard Conventions Key combinations are expressed as follows Format Example Meaning Key1 Key2 Ctrl A Hold down the Control key as you press then release key A The shift key is not used Keyl Key2 Esc a Press and release the Escape key then press and release key a Esc A Press and release the Escape key then press and release key a while pressing the shift key Table 1 1 Keyboard Conventions Notice how in the case of the Esc modifier the two keys are pressed in succession whereas in the case of the Ctrl modifier the key is pressed while the Ctrl key is held down 1 3 Typesetting Conventions The following typesetting conventions are used in this manual Type style Used for typewriter Anything you should type as it appears code and key combinations italic Mouse buttons and emphasis bold slant Menu items and editing commands Table 1 2 Typesetting Conventions Introduction 1 4 Using the
245. nsive on line help including help on the FACE functions For detailed information on the Motif Xt and C functions callable in XFaceMaker consult the appropriate documentation or the on line man pages that are provided with the X Window System The XFaceMaker distribution includes a number of examples that illustrate how to do things Please refer to the demos directory in the installed tree Before You Start This manual assumes that you are familiar with the C programming language and to a lesser extent with the Unix operating system and the X Window system We assume that you have access to a reference manual for the Motif widgets The Motif Style Guide can help you with ideas on what you should be trying to achieve with your interface Some of the books which describe the principles involved in both the X Window System and the Motif widget set are listed in the bibliography You should also know how to use a window manager and xterm or a similar terminal emulator and you should be able to open resize iconify and close windows Introduction 1 1 What You Need to Run XFaceMaker To run any application using the X Window System you need A Unix host computer The Unix host will run all the applications The applica tion makes calls to the Xlib library for displaying and for processing keyboard and mouse events The host must be set up to communicate with other machines on a network TCP IP The host system must include d
246. nt 7 8 1 Global FACE Functions FACE functions can also be declared as global global function None Hello String message 161 FACE in XFaceMaker printf Hello s n message Global FACE functions differ from non global functions only in the way their are output in the generated C code Local FACE functions i e FACE functions not de clared with the global keyword are output as static C functions and are output in a C file only if they are actually called in the corresponding fm file When a local function is called in several fm files the definition of the function will be replicated in all corresponding c files Global FACE functions on the other hand are output only in the C file corresponding to the fm file where they are defined as extern C functions When a global function is called from another fm file it must be declared like this global function None Hello String message As for local functions it is sufficient to declare a global FACE function once in a fm file provided that the declaration appears before all the calls When a global function is called from a fm file but not defined in this file XFaceMaker outputs an extern declaration for the function 7 8 2 Global Variables In FACE scripts global variables can be declared extern as in extern global Int scale_value A variable declared extern global will be generated in the C code asa global extern variable extern Fac
247. nything in it because the menu editor automatically creates widget names based on the menu item label If you specify the label name after the widget name the latter is overwritten Menu Item Type Displays the icons of the menus or menu items available for edit ing The name of the selected menu or item is displayed below the icons These change with the type of object currently selected Button Type XmToggleButton This field contains two radio buttons so that you can choose the type of toggle button that will appear next to the menu item you are editing Label XmLabel XmPushButton XmToggleButton PulldownMenu Used to enter the label seen on the menu for this item It corresponds to the XmNlabelString resource The menu editor uses this field to create a widget name unless you ex plicitly enter one after specifying the label mnemonic Used to enter a mnemonic for the menu item being edited GLS Inserts the MSG prefix to the text entry for the label and the mnemonic if present TI The Editing Boxes Font XmLabel XmPushButton XmToggleButton PulldownMenu Used to display or specify the name of the font used to display the menu item Select Opens the Fonts box for choosing the font that will be used to display the menu item being edited Accelerator XmPushButton XmToggleButton Sets the key code name of the accel erator for the item being edited Entering any keystroke in this field sets it to the key code name for that keys
248. o select or create an image for the icon that will represent the specified group in the widgetstore Templates Opens a cascading menu containing Load Save Save As Edit Delete Choose Icon Figure 4 15 The Templates and Classes Cascade Menu m Load Pops up the File Selector box to specify which template to load in the Templates widgetstore m Save Saves the selected object and its subtree as a template in a fm descrip tion file and creates a default icon for the object in the Templates widget store If the selected object is not the same as the object selected during the last Save As or Edit XFaceMaker pops a confirmation dialog m Save As Saves the selected object and its subtree as a template under the 27 The Command Window 28 specified template name and fm file name A default icon is added to the Templates widgetstore to represent the newly saved template m Edit Pops up the Template Name box in which to specify a template name The template specified is then mappped and selected for editing m Delete Deletes the template specified in the Template Name box This does not delete the fm file saved with Save or Save As m Choose Icon Pops up the Icon Selection box to select or create an image for the specified template s widgetstore icon This box works like the box de scribed in section 5 12 The Menu Editor Classes Opens a cascading menu containing
249. oblems are not repeatedly directed to the NSL Tech nical Support Department This will also allow NSL to disseminate future informa tion releases more efficiently and help users more fully To this end we suggest that the Contact Person do one of the following when the product is first installed Send an electronic mail message with his or her electronic mail address to sup port nsl fr e Fax the NSL Technical Support Department giving a fax number or direct tele phone number at which he or she can be contacted We would like to be informed of any problems you might have encountered while installing this particular NSL product NSL Product Support 2 2 Before Contacting Technical Support If you do have to telephone Technical Support please have the following information handy when you call The product name and version number you are using for example in XFaceMak er it is given in the Help menu under On Version Or enter the command xfm revision The machine you are using the product on e g Sun 3 80 and the name and re lease of the operating system e g Sun OS Release 4 0 3c and the type of display If you are using an X Terminal the make and model The amount of RAM you have The version of the X server you are using e g Release 6 The version of the X11 you are using e g Release 3 The patch level of the Xt Intrinsic library you are using e g Patch level 10 The version of OSF Motif you are us
250. om the interface m Paste Place the current contents of the widget cut buffer in a window m Duplicate Duplicate the current selection and place an exact copy slightly to the right and below the original The widget cut buffer s content is not mod ified m Delete Delete the current selection from the interface The widget cut buffer s content is not modified Current Object This set of items is present only if there is a current object 1 e if the widget selection is not empty It has items that let you interact with the selected widget or select its parent m Rebuild Destroy the widget and build a new one with the resource settings cur rently defined for the widget 36 Try Mode and Build Mode m Select lt name gt s parent where lt name gt is the name of the current widget Se lect the widget s parent i e move the selection one step up in the widget tree m Resources for lt name gt where lt name gt is the name of the current widget If a resource window is open and its Current selection toggle is set display the re sources for widget name in the window Otherwise open a new resource win dow with widget name s resources m Auto Size Let the current widget take its default size i e remove any width height resource settings from the interface description m Auto Position Let the current widget take its default position i e remove any x y resource settings from the interface description Curs
251. ometryManager method with the following ar guments 0 w parameter of the GeometryManager method i e the child widget for which a geometry request is made 1 request parameter of the GeometryManager method 2 geometry_return parameter of the GeometryManager method In addition the GeometryManager method of the class will return the contents of 3 which should be set by the Set script of the active value 3 is initialized to 0 Note that in the Set script of the GeometryManager active value the self widget is the par ent of the child for which a geometry request is made The child widget which is passed by the X Toolkit as the w argument to the GeometryManager method can be accessed in The GeometryManager method can be set only for a sub class of a Composite If the model object for the class is not a sub class of a Composite a warning message is printed and the active value is ignored 199 New Widget Classes 11 2 15 The ChangeManaged Method If an active value with the name ChangeManaged exists for the model object of the class its Set script is called in the class ChangeManaged method with a NULL ar gument therefore must not be referenced The ChangeManaged method can be set only for a sub class of a Composite If the model object for the class is not of sub class of a Composite a warning message is printed and the active value is ignored 11 2 16 The InsertChild Method If an active value with the na
252. ompatible with NSLd NSLSERVER If you are using the NSLd token server this environment variable is used to specify the name of the machine running the NSL token server from which tokens will be fetched Useful especially when several NSL token servers are running on a network 388 CHAPTER 15 The Fm File Structure This chapter describes the Fm file to enable developers to read or edit a file An Fm file consists of a number of different blocks widget Each widget in an Fm file starts with widget lt Widget Class gt followed by an opening brace denoting the start of the widget block The block continues until the matching close brace flag The flag block follows the widget block It can contain the following fields m mapped Present if the widget was mapped when the Fm file was saved If a parent of the widget was not mapped the widget may not be visible m popup Present if the popup togglebutton in the Resources window was set The widget is created as a PopupShell m autosize Present if the autosize toggle button in the Resources window was set This denotes that the width and height resources will be ignored when cre ating the widget m autopos Present if the autopos toggle button in the Resources window was set This denotes that the x and y resources will be ignored when creating the wid get m gadget Present if the gadget toggle button in the Resources window was set This denotes that the gadget version of th
253. on set the labelString to a random value between 0 and 300 as long as the button is armed Get a new random number every half second armCallback global t global i t init_timer self global i i random 300 self labelString itoa i 0 500 True disarmCallback global t stop_timer t SEE ALSO 367 C NAME FACE NAME none size SYNOPSIS Int size FaceArray a DESCRIPTION Return the number of elements in array a For hash arrays it is the number of values stored in the array For linear arrays it is the largest index used to store a value minus one or the number of elements specified for an initialized ar ray SCOPE FACE scripts EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 368 C NAME FACE NAME sprintf sprintf SYNOPSIS None sprintf None targ None f fa DESCRIPTION Call the C function sprintf No type checking is done SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 369 C NAME FACE NAME sscanf sscanf SYNOPSIS None sscanf None STC None format Suz DESCRIPTION Call the C function sscanf No type checking is done SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 370 C NAME FACE NAME strcat strcat SYNOPSIS None strcat String sl String s2 DESCRIPTION Call the C function strcat SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 371 C NAME FACE NAME strcmp strcmp SYNOPSIS Int stremp String sl string s2 DESCRIPTION Call the C function stremp SCOPE FA
254. on file for genappli utility 175 Design Process 19 Build Appli 20 Build XFM 20 Launch Appli 20 Launch New XFM 20 Restart 19 Save State To Disk 20 Design process client 115 new 14 options 19 restarting 115 state of 13 designProcess 383 designprocess 383 Destroy method 197 destroy 148 358 Dialog widgetstore 42 DialogShell 286 336 directory changing 20 DISPLAY 378 380 387 display 378 display 378 Display Default Resource Va lues 32 DisplayAccelerators method 199 drag source 49 definition 46 Drag Target 49 drop site 50 definition 46 drop target 50 dtoi 265 dumpcore 384 dumpcore 384 duplicate 379 duplicate 379 Duplicate selection 22 Dynamic widget references 63 E edit boxes 45 Edit menu 22 Alignment 24 Apply Template 23 Attachments 25 Auto Pos Size 23 Copy 22 Cut 22 Delete 23 Duplicate 22 Edit Appli Files 25 gadget 23 Paste 22 Track Name 22 unapply Template 24 Un Auto Pos Size 23 Undo 22 Ungadget 23 else 138 end pattern 177 user 179 enumerated types 159 Enumeration box 103 Environment 30 environment variables 69 387 editing 30 error protection 12 errors genappli 185 Eval 113 155 Eval scripts 113 140 166 eval_string 215 exit 359 exiting XFM 21 expand icon 36 Expose method 197 extensions 384 extern keyword 120 126 extlib 384 extpath 384 extpath 384 F FACE 119 application functions 143 arithmetic expression 121 419 assignment 131 assignments
255. onMenu XmCreateArrowButtonGadget XmCreateBulletinBoard XmCreateBulletinBoardDialog XmCreateCascadeButton XmCreateCascadeButtonGadget XmCreateCommand XmCreateCommandDialog XmCreateDialogShell XmCreateDragicon XmCreateDrawingArea XmCreateDrawnButton XmCreateErrorDialog XmCreateFileSelectionBox XmCreateFileSelectionDialog XmCreateForm XmCreateFormDialog XmCreateFrame XmCreateInformationDialog XmCreateLabel XmCreateLabelGadget XmCreateList XmCreateMainWindow XmCreateMenuBar XmCreateMenuShell XmCreateMessageBox XmCreateMessageDialog XmCreateOptionMenu 404 C Name FACE Name XmCreatePaned Window XmCreatePaned Window XmCreatePopupMenu XmCreatePopupMenu XmCreatePromptDialog XmCreatePromptDialog XmCreatePulldownMenu XmCreatePushButton XmCreatePushButtonGadget XmCreateQuestionDialog XmCreateRadioBox XmCreateRowColumn XmCreateScale XmCreateScrollBar XmCreateScrolledList XmCreateScrolledText XmCreateScrolledWindow XmCreateSelectionBox XmCreateSelectionDialog XmCreateSeparator XmCreateSeparatorGadget XmCreateSimpleCheckBox XmCreateSimpleMenuBar XmCreateSimpleOptionMenu XmCreateSimplePopupMenu XmCreateSimplePulldownMenu XmCreateSimpleRadioBox XmCreateTemplateDialog XmCreateText XmCreateTextField XmCreateToggleButton XmCreateToggleButtonGadget XmCreateWarningDialog XmCreateWorkArea XmCreateWorkingDialog XmCreatePulldownMenu XmCreatePushButton XmCreatePushButtonGadget XmCreateQuestionDialog XmCreat
256. ons are removed from the fm file where other resources or parent widget resources over ride the values making them redundant For example an XmList widget s x and y resources are redundant if its parent is an XmScrolledWindow because the par ent will define its position The number of widgets changed is displayed in the Status field Widgets can also be changed individually by using the Auto Pos and Auto Size toggle buttons in the Resources box Un Auto Pos Size Inserts all the currently undefined position and size resources for widgets that are in the sub tree of the selected widget in the interface descrip tion All x y height and width resources are defined even when they are not re quired because another resource or another widget s resources define the actual values used Apply Template Applies a specified template to the currently selected object Opens a cascade menu for selecting the widget hierarchy to which the template will apply You can apply a template to To Selected Object To Whole Subtree To Widgets Of Same Class Figure 4 9 The Template Menu 23 The Command Window m To Selected Object Applies the specified template to the selected object m To Whole Subtree Applies the specified template to the selected object and its entire subtree m To Widgets of Same Class Applies the specified template to the selected ob ject and all widgets of its class in the subtree The Template Name box is
257. oot script On systems whose cpp does not define a unique preprocessor symbol you must add the one you have chosen to the end of the cpp_argv table in config imakemdep h 2 Edit the file Imake tmpl and add a section for your platform for example ifdef foo define MacroIncludeFile lt foo cf gt define MacroFile foo cf undef foo define FOOArchitecture Hendif foo Where foo is the preprocessor symbol which uniquely identifies the platform or the symbol chosen in step one 3 Write the configuration file foo cf The best way is to copy an existing cf file and modify it for the new platform It is advisable to start from the configuration file for one of the reference platforms listed above Have a look at various cf files to find which parameters may be useful to you You should read the man pages for cc and Id to choose the options to compile and to build the library static and dynamic 4 Run config boot If you found no preprocessor symbol that uniquely identifies the platform you have to specify it at the Bootstrap flags prompt for example Dfoo You may also have to specify additional bootstrap flags that will be used when compiling imake For instance on most System V based platforms you must define the flag SYSV So if your platform foo is a System V you would have to type Bootstrap flags Dfoo DSYSV If imake compiles without problems execute the commands listed above If this fails you should
258. or 0 is the first element 1 is the second element 2 is the third element etc This method should not be used as it is not portable to machines with 64 bit address ing It has been kept for backward compatibility but any new developements should use standard structure element addressing 127 The FACE Language 6 6 6 Defined Constants A constant may be defined with the define keyword Defined constants are like vari ables but their value cannot be changed Their value is either an integer a string or a floating point constant and is specified after the constant name define lt name gt lt value gt Examples define MAX WIDGETS 10 define PI 3 142 define TITLE Project X self labelString TITLE A defined constant may be defined in several places but it may not be defined with different values A defined constant can be used in a script even if it has been de clared in another script provided that the script where the constant has been defined is parsed first Using the define keyword in the Creation script of the root widget of a hierarchy guarantees that it will be known in all the scripts of the hierarchy The FACE interpreter has some predefined constants The constants true True false and False are defined globally Their type is Boolean true True 1 false False 0 e When using FACE in XFaceMaker XFaceMaker also adds most constants de fined by the OSF Motif toolkit 128 Basi
259. or Object This set of items is present only if the widget under the cursor is not the current ob ject It has items that change the current selection and or open a Resources Box m Select lt name gt where lt name gt is the name of the widget under the cursor Clear the current selection and make widget name the current widget m Resources for lt name gt where lt name gt is the name of the widget under the cursor Add widget name to the selection make it the current widget If a re source window is open and its Current selection toggle is set display the re sources for widget name in the window Otherwise open a new resource window with widget name s resources 4 4 Try Mode and Build Mode XFaceMaker has two modes of operation Try and Build Use Build mode when you are building or editing the interface Events you generate in the Design Process are received by the XFaceMaker process You can select widgets by clicking on them in the design process windows Try mode when you want to test some aspect of the interface to see how it will work in the final application Events you generate in the Design Process are re ceived by the widgets in your Design Process You can activate your callback scripts There are a number of editing actions that cannot be performed in Try mode Does the cursor become a caution pointer Whenever you have trouble carrying out some editing action in XFaceMaker check first to see if you have forgot
260. or for a C variable usable as the value of the resource e g struct my_type size The size of the resource value on the current platform e g sizeof struct my_type aligned Value is 0 or 1 If 1 means that the resource value is guaranteed to be always the same size as an XtArgVal on all platforms This can be assumed as true for all pointers on all known platforms but is not guaran teed to be always the case indirect reserved pass 0 The function returns 0 or if it has increased the size of the new types table The number of new types that can be defined is not limited the table is real located if the current table is too small The increment for the size of the table is 20 SCOPE 222 Application only EXAMPLE FmAddRepresentation XtR XrtData XtRXrtData XrtData sizeof XrtData 1 0 SEE ALSO 223 C NAME FACE NAME FmAddResourceType none SYNOPSIS Boolean FmAddResourceType char type char get value char avtype char avname char boxname char default_value char enumeration int offset DESCRIPTION 224 FmAddResourceType can be used to add a new resource type which is re quired by a widget class added to XFaceMaker with FmAddWidgetClass The function must be called after FnAddWidgetClass and before FmCallEd itor You cannot add a resource type that is already declared in XFaceMaker see Table 12 3 Predefined Resource Types Note that FmAdd
261. or the currently selected widget and enables you to edit and apply them Changes to the selected widget are applied by pressing the Rebuild or the Set Values button or Return Open the Resources box by clicking on Resources in the Windows menu or by clicking mouse Button 2 on a widget or its name Parent AS BB minRC Name Ea ass xnLabel a Templates f W Current selection Pea Auto position x 3 y 3 O Popup E Auto size w 48 h 17 C Gadget Resource List lt Search f Callbacks positionindex 7 0 XmLabel accelerator 7 acceleratorText 7 alignment 7 alignment_beginning fontlist adobe courier nedium r I labelinsensitivePixmap C labelPixmap C labelString minLin Anhalt Tema M atiina Qose Rebuild Set Values Edit Sort Undo Help Figure 5 20 The Resources Box There are three sections in the Resources Box They are the Identification section e the Resources List The Apply options 85 The Editing Boxes 5 16 1 The Identification Section The Resources window has the following fields Parent Displays the name of the parent of the widget being edited Name Displays the name of the widget being edited You can change the widget s name by entering a new name in this field XFaceMaker assigns a default name to every widget in your interface and that default name is displayed in this field until you change it The widget name is n
262. ork_area 0 SeparatorType W I Enumeration Enumeration no_line 0 ShadowType W I Enumeration Enumeration shadow_etched_in 5 ShellHorizDim W I Positivelnt Integer 0 ShellHorizPos WII Int Integer 0 ShellUnitType W I Enumeration Enumeration pixels 0 ShellVertDim W I Positivelnt Integer 0 ShellVertPos WII Int Integer 0 Short WII Int Integer 0 SizePolicy W I Enumeration Enumeration change_all 0 String WIS JO 0 0 StringDirection W I Enumeration Enumeration string_direction_ _to_r O StringTable O S _FmTable Table TearOffModel W I Enumeration Enumeration tear_off_enabled 0 TextPosition WII Int Integer 0 TopltemPosition W I Positivelnt Integer 0 TranslationTable OJS JO Translations 0 UnitType W I Enumeration Enumeration pixels 0 UnpostBehavior W I Enumeration Enumeration unpost 0 VerticalAlignment W I Enumeration Enumeration alignment_baseline_top 0 VerticalDimension W I Positivelnt Integer 0 Verticallnt WII Int Integer 0 VerticalPosition WII Int Integer 0 VisualPolicy W I Enumeration Enumeration variable 0 Widget O S Widget Widget 0 Window OIS Widget Widget 0 XmBackgroundPixmap OIS image Images 0 XmsString OIS XtRString XtRString 0 XmString Table O S _FmTable Table 0 G get_value A avtype 0 offset O RT_OBJECT S RT_STRING W RT_WIDGET I RT_INTEGER 228 SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmAddWidgetClass FmAddBootFile 229 C NA
263. ot a resource but is used within the in terface and the application to identify and access the resources of the widget Any legal C language variable name is a legal widget name XFaceMaker ensures that two sibling widgets do not have the same name by adding a numeric extension to a name if it already exists unless you use the command line option nonunique names If you change the name of your ApplicationShell the change will be dis played in the Name field the Widget Tree and the Widget List However the name of the ApplicationShell itself as it appears in the title bar is always that of the current application i e xfm unless you set the title resource to the new name Class Identifies the widget s class This is the same as the widget type in the Toolkit with the prefix Xm for Motif widgets This can be edited You can drag an icon from the Toolkit to this field to change the class Templates Identifies the template associated with the widget if one is defined You can apply or delete a template by entering or deleting its name here and clicking Rebuild or Set Values There can be more than one template listed here separat ed by commas You can also apply a template using the Apply Unapply template commands in the Edit menu Current Selection Indicates if the widget is the current selection Deselect this checkbutton to continue editing the widget even after deselecting it Auto position When set and applied to a widget XFace
264. output area instead of the 71 The Editing Boxes standard output Enter the instruction then press the Execute button Or press Return if Mono line is set Mono line When this is set you can enter a single line instruction then press Return to execute it Multi line When this toggle is set you can type several lines of debugging instruc tions in the Execution area but you then have to click the Execute button not Return Execute This button executes the FACE statements that you have entered in the Ex ecution area In step by step mode the FACE statements are executed as if they were part of the currently debugged script The local variables of the debugged scripts are accessible as well as all the global variables defined so far you do not need to use the global keyword before referencing global variables in this case Stack prints the stack of scripts and functions currently called with the argument types and values in the output text area Clear clears the debugger output area Close hides the debugger window and unsets Tracing On Step advances to the next instruction in step by step mode Interrupt is used to stop the execution of a script a SIGINT signal is sent to the de sign process and the debugger switches to step by step mode Abort is used to terminate execution of the current script in step by step mode Continue is used to switch to normal run mode when in step by step mode Execu tion con
265. pattern hierarchy A special construct allows you to iterate through lists of values If a pattern line con tains SSATTR1I ATTR2 lt sep gt then the values of the attributes ATTR1 ATTR2 etc which must be lists are re placed iteratively for all list positions with the separator string lt sep gt inserted at the end of each row The list iterator character can be specified through a command line option Patterns can contain commands identified by keywords which must occur at the be ginning of the pattern line Here is a list of the pattern commands begin user end user These commands identify a code section that is to be filled with code added by the user in user sections of an existing instance of the pattern in the pattern file begin pattern lt pattern name gt begin pattern lt pattern name gt lt left gt lt op gt lt value gt begin pattern lt pattern name gt lt expression gt end pattern lt pattern name gt Patterns can contain sub patterns which correspond to sub pattern descriptions Sub pattern replacement is done as if the pattern file contained only the enclos ing pattern and the description file contained the sub pattern description as a top level object The optional expression allows you to control the conditional instanciation as for a top level pattern recursive pattern lt pattern name gt
266. pe In a FACE script this parameter is referenced by the read only variable SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE eval_string self st WidgetName parent PB_ 2 printf s n st Pointer 2 SEE ALSO 215 C NAME FACE NAME FaceInitTimer init_timer SYNOPSIS Timer init_timer Widget w String script None call _data Int delay Boolean auto repeat DESCRIPTION Initialize a timer so that the script script will be called automatically in delay milliseconds script is a string containing a FACE script After delay millisec onds the script will be parsed and executed using w as a reference Widget and call_data as the argument If auto repeat is True then the timer is re initialized automatically after the script is executed with the same delay The return value is an identifier which can be passed to stop_timer to cancel the timer before it has expired This function is not available in the library libFm c a SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE In a pushbutton set the label to 0 and increment it every half second as long as the button is armed armCallback global t global 1 i 0 self labelString itoa i t init_timer self global i i i 1 self labelString itoa i 0 500 True disarmCallback global t stop_timer t SEE ALSO FaceStopTimer XtAddTimeOut FmCallCallbacksTimeOut FmStopTimeOut 216 C NAME FACE NAME FaceSetValues SetValues SYNOPSIS Int FaceSetVal
267. pen it by clicking on the RGB button in the Colors box B Class xmBulletinBoard Templates f W Current selection Resource background R 204 LI G 123 LI B 010 H 025 5 079 098 z 98634 _ Palette OK Rebuild Set Values Set Cancel Figure 5 31 The RGB Editor Use the sliders to set the values The actual color is shown in a pad below and its hexadecimal representation is listed in the text field The text field may also be edited directly The box has the following sliders Red Green Blue These sliders enable you to define a new color in the RGB represen tation Hue Saturation Value These sliders enable you to define a new color in the HSV rep resentation display pad Displays a sample of the color defined in the RGB box fetched from the 101 The Editing Boxes X server text input line Displays the name or hex value of the color defined in the RGB box it can be used to enter a color name directly OK This button applies the specified color values and returns to the main Resource window If you have defined a new color the file selector will pop up so that you can save its definition in the color description file Rebuild Applies the selected values by rebuilding the object and remains in the RGB box Set Values Applies the selected values by setting the values and remains in the RGB box Cancel Returns to the main Resource window without cha
268. process but XFaceMaker will still wait for a connection the XFaceMaker interface is disabled until the connection occurs This is useful if you want to launch the design process manually from a shell or by any other external means In this case don t forget to set the client option when launching the design process 3 1 2 Restoring the Design Process State The XFaceMaker process keeps a copy of the state of the Design process The re store option informs the starting Design process that it must fetch this state from the XFaceMaker process and modify its own state accordingly In short the new Design process will restart where the old one had stopped The Design process state in cludes e the whole hierarchy of widgets e the sets of loaded groups templates and classes e the current editing mode Try or Build e various internal informations current directory current file name current edited object template or class model objects in edition If the Design process was restarted by the user or if it terminated due to an execution error in Try mode the Design process state is saved just before the Design process exits If the Design process crashed during a widget modification i e when the user clicked Rebuild or Set Values in an editing box after modifying a resource or anoth er attribute then XFaceMaker restores the state of the Design process just before the widget was re built and things will be as if the use
269. pts are triggered from the application or the interface via the special functions SetActiveValue and GetActive Value translation eval scripts XFaceMaker adds a special action called Eval in which a FACE script can be entered the application by calling the application function FaceEvalString the application can directly specify and launch a FACE script startup script the startup file xfm startup is a FACE script read by XFaceMaker to determine the user s preferences for the position and state of various windows You can add extra commands to this file as desired However they will be lost if the Save Prefs command is used widget class creation FACE scripts are used to specify side effects in widget class methods as well as in the definition of new resources when you create a new wid get class using XFaceMaker 155 FACE in XFaceMaker 7 1 Value of and in XFaceMaker Scripts The value of the FACE special variables and which are passed to a script when it is launched depends on the context of the script as follows callbacks In a callback script is a read only variable referring to the call_data of the widget whose callback is being executed With the OSF Motif toolkit this is the callback structure The elements of the callback structure can be accessed with regular structure addressing For example in the valueChangedCallback of a ScrollBar the callback structure has the following elements int reason
270. r had just made the modifica tions but not yet applied them In this case the modifications should be corrected and another Rebuild or Set Values should be attempted or the modifications can be discarded by selecting another object the Resource modified ignore changes warning will be issued It may happen that the Design process state cannot be saved before it exits for ex ample if its data is too corrupted For this reason XFaceMaker keeps a second security state called the trusted state which by default is saved every minute and each time the user switches to Try mode You can change the de fault value using the Auto Save State item in the Options menu This state can be restored by using the restore and trusted simultaneously So the typical scenario is to try first restore alone the default and if this fails try restore trusted 13 Architecture In addition to having the Design process state kept by the XFaceMaker process it is possible to save the state to disk This can be useful for example to protect against a power failure without saving a fm file The Save State command in the File menu saves the current Design process state into a set of files starting with xfm_ in the current working directory of XFaceMaker Once saved this state can be restored by passing the restore and perhaps trusted option s to the XFaceMaker process The state will first be loaded from disk files to t
271. rce value to a widget Press mouse Button 2 on a text field in the list Drag the icon over a widget or its name in the Tree or List and release If the widget has a resource of that type the value will be applied If not of course no change is made and an error message will appear For instance you cannot set an arrowDirection resource value for a PushButton Drag a value from one resource to another resource in the list Click to open the text field next to a resource Press mouse Button 2 on the value listed Drag the icon over another resource and release You must then apply the new value by clicking Rebuild or Set Values Drag a list of selected resources to a widget Select the resources using the standard Motif extended selection process then drag them to the widget using Button 2 This sets the resources for that widget If you drag to a resource window it updates the window but you must apply the change If you drag to a widget or its name in the Widget List or Tree it applies to the object using Rebuild on Set Values on the window where the list came from 89 The Editing Boxes 5 16 3 The Fast Resource List This version of the Resource list is displayed if you launched XFaceMaker with the fastlist command line option or if you set the Option Use Fast Resource List item XFaceMaker Current Widget Resources aE Parent AS BB minRC Name La Class xmbabeT Templates StandardFgColor W
272. re replaced by a pointer to the beginning of the string If the right hand side of a resource assignment is of type String and the resource is of another type an implicit type conversion is done the FACE interpreter calls the converter registered with the Xt Toolkit to convert the string to the appropriate re source type 131 The FACE Language If the right hand side of a resource assignment is of another type then this type must be compatible with the type of the resource or an error will occur For example self width 1 converts the string 1 to the value 1 before doing the assignment self width hello produces an error because the String to Int conversion function is unable to convert hello to a type Int self width 2 does not produce an error and does no type conversion the type of the variable and the type of the resource are both Int self labelString 1 produces an error because the resource type for labelString is XmString not Int In such a case no implicit conversion function would be called since 1 is not of type String self arrowButton 1 arrowDirection arrow_up converts the string to type Arrow Direction Note If you use the predefined OSF Motif constants as right hand side values in re source assignments you might have to cast them to the appropriate type because they are all declared with the type Int type ArrowDirection self arrowDirection ArrowDi
273. rection XmARROW_RIGHT FACE accepts a number of resource types as equivalent to an Int they are Short Boolean and all Motif types ending with Position or Dimension such as Ver ticalPosition Similarly the types Pixmap and all its Motif variants such as Back groundPixmap are equivalent In a few cases you may have to specify the type of a resource explicitly using the following syntax lt widget reference gt lt resource name gt lt resource type gt For example self value Int means that the resource value is of type Int This is useful only to inform the FACE compiler of the type of the resource when generating stand alone C code if the compiler cannot determine it by itself 132 Basic Objects 6 6 9 X Properties FACE lets you refer to X properties to store data X properties are variables associ ated to an X window For that reason they can be used only for widgets that have already been realized Since such a variable is associated to the particular instance of the widget for which you define it its value is independent of any other Thus the value of a property with the same name defined for a different instance may be dif ferent It is legal in FACE to use properties for gadgets but since gadgets do not have an X window the property of a gadget is associated to the gadget s parent Thus for gad gets you must be careful not to use the same property for two gadgets with the same
274. references compilegroup d Instead of 1 Table 13 1 C Code Command Line Options 382 The Command Line Options 13 1 5 Dual Process Options autoclient autoClient Launch client automatically in server mode autosave lt number gt autoSavelnterval Specify interval in seconds of automat ic saving of design process state client client Run in client mode designprocess lt name gt designProcess Specify the design process to be launched by XFaceMaker at startup monoprocess monoprocess Run XFaceMaker in mono process mode nointerface nointerface Do not load XFaceMaker s interface projmgrname lt name gt projectManagerName Specify the name used by the project manager process to connect to XFaceMaker restore restore Restore editing state stored in the XFaceMaker server server server Run in server mode serverhost lt name gt serverHost Specify the name of the host where the editing server runs servername lt name gt serverName Specify the name with which the XFaceMaker server is registered socketfile lt name gt socketFile Specify an alternate UNIX domain socket path name socketport lt number gt socketPort Specify an alternate INTERNET domain sock et port number toolkit lt name gt toolkitClasses Specify a comma separated list as the initial tool kit e g toolkit Primitive Shell Composite trusted trusted Restore trusted edi
275. reserved C words for widget names a widget name must be a valid C identifier XFaceMaker checks widget names as you specify them and will output a message if it thinks a name is not valid 130 Basic Objects 6 6 8 Widget Resources Widget resources can be accessed by a widget name followed by the colon op erator followed by the widget defined resource name as specified in the widget ref erence manual You must use the resource name without its prefix as in a Xdefaults resource file e g self x not self XmNx The following are examples of legal resource names self x self arrowDirection parent parent button borderWidth A variable to widget resource assignment is of the form widget resource abc Each time an assignment statement such as i self x is encountered the function XtGetValues is called to retrieve the current value of the resource referred to Similarly each time an assignment statement such as self x i is encountered the function XtSetValues is called to update the current value of the resource referred to Note If you refer to the documentation on widget resources you will see that the size of variables representing these resources varies according to the resource type This is not so in FACE where all variables are the same size that of XtArgVal This means that resources whose size are smaller than a word are converted to a word sized integer and resources of type String a
276. rget is the name of the selection target It is the same as the active value name client_data is the value of the XmNclientData resource passed to XmStart Drag if any max_length request_id These are the arguments passed to the conversion procedure for incremental transfers refer to the X Toolkit Intrinsics doc umentation 171 Structures The argument of a drop site s active value for an imported target points to an FmTransferProc typedef struct _FmTransferProc XtPointer value String type int length int format Widget drop_transfer String selection String target XtPointer client_data FmTransferProc The fields of this structure are derived from the values passed to the transferProc of the drop transfer object which is provided by XFaceMaker The Atoms are changed to strings Refer to the X Toolkit Intrinsics manual section 11 5 2 2 for a complete description of selection callback procedure arguments value is where the active value s set script can read the value transmitted from the drag source If the value is immediate i e it is an integer or a one word value then it is stored directly in the value field and the script must NOT free any memory For a string or a pointer then the pointer is stored in the value field and the script can free the memory when no longer need ed type contains the type of the data length contains the length of the converted data format contains the fo
277. rgu ments table summarizes the parameters passed Refer to the section on widget class methods in Chapter 11 for further details 7 2 Active Value Variables XFaceMaker through the active value mechanism lets the application know about variables used in the interface An active value is the association of a named variable a widget a Set script a Get script and once the active value is attached to the appli cation an application address Active value names are composed of letters and digits They must start with a letter and are case sensitive XFaceMaker lets you refer to their value and address directly as follows Name refers to the content of active value Name Name refers to the address of active value Name The Set script of an active value is executed when the function SetActiveValue is called from a FACE script in the interface or FmSetActiveValue is called from the application The Set script is usually in charge of specifying a new value for the vari able in the interface The Get script of an active value is executed when the function GetActiveValue is called from a FACE script in the interface or FmGetActiveValue is called from the application The Get script is usually in charge of reading the current value of the variable in the interface Note that an active value is not necessarily attached to the application It can be used just to store scripts that will be triggered by events in the interface or by
278. rmat of the converted data drop_transfer contains the XmDropTransfer widget returned by XmDrop TransferStart selection contains the name of the selection used by the Motif drag and drop mechanism target is the name of the selection target client_data contains the value of the XmNclientData resource passed to Xm DropTransferStart if any If XmDropTransferStart was not used directly but called automatically by the drop site s XmNdropProc the client_data is the XmNdropProc s call data of type XmDropProcCallback 9 2 XEvent Structures 172 XEvent Structures The Client_Message fields of the ClientMessageEvent structure can be accessed in FACE through intermediate variables as listed below char b 0 char b 1 char b 19 short s 0 short s 1 short s 9 long 1 0 long 1 1 long 1 4 in FACE data_b0 data_bl data _b19 data_s0 data _sl data_s9 data_10 data _11 data_14 Similarly in KeymapNotify events the key vector fields are accessed as follows char key_vector 0 char key_vector 1 char key_vector 31 in FACE key_vector0 key_vector key_vector31 173 Structures 174 CHAPTER 10 The Genappli Utility This chapter describes in detail the program genappli This program is used in XFaceMaker to generate application files C class source files and Windows source files It could also be used independently of XFaceMaker The genappli program combines two input files
279. rst set using lt type gt lt name gt lt value gt When a variable is declared with a type then the variable is statically typed which means that you cannot assign an expression of a different type to it If you do so an error message is issued Static typing is useful for error checking and also to help the FACE compiler find the type of a variable e g in floating point expressions Note the keyword auto is equivalent to local extern to global Use local and global rather than auto and extern which are kept for backward compatibility only 6 6 5 Special Variables Whenever a FACE script is parsed the two special variables and are passed to it is the contents of the variable pointed to by This is analogous to amp x and x if x is an int or p and p if p is a pointer to an int The values of and depend on the context in which the script is being evaluated 126 Basic Objects If is the address of a structure then the elements of the structure can be accessed using regular structure addressing constructs Section 6 12 The variables and have type Any which allows them to match any other type wherever they are used This means however that argument and return type check ing is not done for and used in function calls unless they are cast to the proper type e g i atoi String 1 FACE also lets you access the structure elements through the 0 to 9 variables where
280. ructures soe ot 8 Se et Oe heh i a kh A ak lle EA 152 6 12 1 Declaring a Structure from a C application 152 6 12 2 Declaring a Structure ina FACE script 0 153 6 12 3 Declaring Structure Variables 0 0 00 c eee ee eee 153 6 12 4 Referencing Structure Fields 0 000 ce eee eee 154 6 12 5 Allocating Structures 0 0 0 c ccc eee eee 154 6 12 6 Arrays as Structure Elements 0 0 0 0 e eee eens 154 7 1 Value of and in XFaceMaker Scripts 0 000 eee ee 156 7 2 Active Value Variables 0 cee eee eet eee 157 732 Constants esie iets Le vice sped ewe eG bh Baw ey 2b eee orb eel 159 TAs Vype Casters ooo eit At oo ce eae alee NA eet Ate hale tes 159 7 5 Declaring Enumerated Resource Types 00 0 cee ee eee 159 TOs SUUCHUITES e a acted Se SR SA CaS a sab in fetta Soin Maca oh 160 7 7 Declaring Application Functions in XFaceMaker 161 7 8 Generating C Code in XFaceMaker 00 00 e eee eee 161 7 8 1 Global FACE Functions 00 ccc eee eens 161 7 8 2 Global Variables 00 aoe a eee 162 8 1 Accessing Resources 00 eee cette eees 165 8 2 Literal Strings ee cscs daca ae She der E ER goatee oes geen ee ed 166 8 3 Eval Scripts sci Gees gone Osea eee eerie ote oe te fot 166 8 4 Returns from Function Calls 0 0 c ccc ee 167 8 5 Creating and Destroying Widgets
281. ructures defined in Xm Xm h are pre registered with a name built as follows e if a pointer type is defined for the structure then this type is used e otherwise the FACE structure name is the name of the C structure type with the Struct postfix removed For example the callback structure for a push button widget is declared as XmPush ButtonCallback in FACE while the text block structure used by the text widget is called XmTextBlock The FACE types of the fields of pre registered structures are derived from the C types e all integer scalar types are declared as Int e Booleans are declared as Boolean e character strings are declared as String e other pointers are declared as Pointer e other types are declared with their C names 160 Declaring Application Functions in 7 7 Declaring Application Functions in XFaceMaker When application functions are declared with the function keyword and the same function is used in several callbacks of the same widget it is sufficient to declare the function in the first callback listed in the Resources box Callbacks window An al ternative option for a function that is called many times is to make the declaration in an xfmCreateCallback script which will be parsed when the interface is created To test scripts which call application functions using XFaceMaker s Try mode it is often necessary to specify the return value for the function in simulation mode function Int my_fun Widget Int
282. ryManager method 199 GetActiveValue 273 GetActiveValueAddr 274 GetActiveValueTimeOut 275 GetString 280 GetValuesHook method 196 GetVersionString 283 global keyword 126 global functions 143 161 global storage 47 Global widgetstore 42 GLS 77 111 Group File Selector box 75 Group Name box 74 groups loading 27 74 naming 75 saving 27 75 widgetstore 42 H help 377 help 377 help files 391 Help menu 34 On Version 34 Hide 286 hide 286 hide icon 35 hidetmplres 379 hidetmplres 379 I ICCCM Targets box 50 icon Copy 35 Cut 35 Delete 35 Expand 36 Hide 35 List 35 Lower 35 Paste 35 423 Raise 35 Shrink 36 Track 35 Tree 35 icons creating 108 display and editing 35 message 44 if else 138 ignorexerrors 378 ignorexerrors 378 images 108 imake 394 include keyword 121 Include File 62 init_timer 216 Initialize 188 195 Initialize method 194 InsertChild method 200 instclose 381 Integer box 107 interface description file 175 printing tree 21 interface active value 47 interface windows printing 21 internationaization saving messages 20 internationalization 31 strings 111 Internationalize 288 interpreter 119 itoa 289 424 itod 290 itof 291 K K amp R 62 keyboard 257 keyboard commands 3 KeymapNotify 173 keywords 120 kill 379 kill 379 L LANG 387 Launch Appli 20 lazy 377 lazy 377 LD LIBRARY PATH 387 libFm 207 libFm_c 207 LIBPATH 387 libraries needed in XFM
283. s 5 12 The Menu Editor The Menu Editor is used to build interface menus and edit their most commonly used resources Menu resources can also be edited in the Resources box To use this box you must first select a menu icon in the toolkit s Menu widgetstore To open this win dow select Menu Editor from the Windows menu The Menu Editor has three sections the Representation field the Dialog section and the Pushbuttons When you build menus new items are added to the right or below the currently se lected menu item as appropriate Double clicking on a menu item opens a sub item for you to edit Wciget Morne Fipa m E E i EE Toggle Betton Button Type Rani Button Check Box Labet Eiss options fot Acoers or Combacks Gose Ocar xia Repiace Ociete Adding Cascades in a menuBar Adding a checkBox in a pullDown Figure 5 16 The Menu Editor The Menu Editor box has the following fields which change depending on the type of menu being edited They are presented along with the types of widget to which they apply if any 5 12 1 Representation field This field displays the menus as you build them It works as follows Each menu item is displayed with the correct label mnemonic and font Howev er no additional graphics such as toggle button indicators cascade indicators or accelerators are displayed The item currently being edited is h
284. s _ Single ela ae BES e2HH1 Le ale e ES Figure 4 23 The Toolkit When the single class toggle button is set only one widgetstore can be open at a time To open more than one de select the single class toggle button and then se lect the categories you wish to open from the Toolkit pulldown menu Open widget stores have a checkmark next to their name in this menu To close a widgetstore de select its name 41 The Command Window To create an instance of a widget click on the widget s icon the cursor changes to across Bring the cross over the desktop and drag to draw the desired object Or for widgets that size automatically bring the cursor to the desired parent widget in the interface the Widget Tree or the Widget List and click You can apply unapply a template to a selected widget by pressing mouse Button 3 on the template icon in the widgetstore and selecting the command from the cascade button that pops up You can apply unapply the template to the selected object the whole sub tree or all widgets of the same class The Toolkit contains the following widgetstores 42 Primitive contains the widget types List TextField Label Drawnbutton Tog gleButton Text Separator PushButton ScrollBar ArrowButton Composite contains the widget types Scale DrawingArea BulletinBoard Row Column MainWindow Form Frame PanedWindow ScrolledWindow Shell contain
285. s This function declares the structures described by structs which points to the follow ing type typedef struct _FmStructDesc String name String cname FmFieldDesc fields int num_fields String id_field XtArgVal id_value FmStructDesc name is the name of the structure i e the FACE type which will be used to de clare pointers to the structure This can be different from the actual C identifier cname isthe C name which will be used to generate references to the structure in the C code generated by XFaceMaker It is the declaration that would be used in a C file to declare a pointer to the structure fields is an array of FmFieldDesc structures typedef struct _FmFieldDesc String name String type int size int offset FmFieldDesc where name is the name of the field this must be the same as the C identifier for the 152 Structures structure field type is the FACE type of the field size is the size in bytes of the field offset is the offset in bytes of the field from the beginning of the structure num_fields is the number of elements in fields id_field is currently unused and must be set to 0 id_value is currently unused and must be set to 0 The offset of a structure field can be computed using the XtOffset macro contained in X11 Intrinsic h The size can be computed using the FmSize macro which accepts the same arguments as XtOffset and which is defined in Fm h 6 12 2 Declaring a Struc
286. s ignorexerrors Ignore Bad Drawable X11 protocol errors gener ated by some versions of the OSF Motif Toolkit nocalleditor callEditor Do not call the FmCallEditor function when entering FmLoop token lt type gt token Specify which token type you wish to use When different versions of XFaceMaker are available from the same token server a particular to 378 The Command Line Options ken can be requested Current types are XFM XFM Entry and XFM IDT When using NSLd license server token names are 007 008 006 respectively When using the NSLLicense license server token names are xfm3 xfm3 el xfm3 idt xfm3 demo 13 1 3 Editor Options build lt char gt build Specify lt char gt as the accelerator to switch to Build mode copy lt char gt copy Specify lt char gt as the accelerator for the copy widget opera tion cut lt char gt cut Specify lt char gt as the accelerator for the cut operation duplicate lt char gt duplicate Specify lt char gt as the accelerator for the duplicate widget operation hidetmplres hidetmplres This option causes resources inherited from templates to be omitted from the Resources list kill lt char gt kill Specify lt char gt as the accelerator for the delete widget operation nonuniquenames nonuniquenames This disables the XFaceMaker feature that forces widget names to be unique by adding a suffix allowing different children o
287. s BOX mei ee ve cals Recess My a E eee A aces ed dk 105 5 17 8 The Integer Box 0 cette es 107 5 17 9 The Pixmaps Box 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee 108 5 17 10 The Pixmaps Table Box 000 cee cee ees 109 5 17 11 The String BX cren ura gs ek oa oe Oa io ee 111 5 17 12 The Translations Box 0 cece eee 112 5 17 13 The Eval Script Editor 0 2 0 0 00 eee eee 113 5 18 The Restart Design Process Box 0 cece eee eee eee 115 5 192 The Template Box lt s 0 35 ent 54983 60s Rae ee pages TEn prO Saa 116 5 20 UIL Options s arai eee sited tne Sneed EEE Sete eed wee 117 6 1 _Keywords 1n FACE 20 ssc ete ee ROTA Se MEER U 120 6 2 Special Characters n fects ich ae oe SS AR Sg ea GA oe 120 6 35 Comments f2 56 3065 Lah ei eee ede ds 120 6 4 Arithmetic Expressions 000 c cece cette 121 6 5 gt Include Files socis dances bea baa cue ee oe eee ge wee eat ee acd 121 6 6 Basic Ob Cts gt 0 5 boss cate ered rig ocee A ne whe eee rede tes 122 6 6 1 Object Types is cece a eck ein ne dhe Hie Hed ee EES 122 6 6 2 Special FACE Types 0 cece cee eee 124 6 0 3 COnStamts sso n Sos ET o si Sige Gu RANER EEN He doseess 124 6 6 4 Variables 3 cane ie Beta fe gins eit we ete eee ce Ue 125 6 6 5 Special Variables 0 0 ccc eee ees 126 6 6 6 Defined Constants 2 0 0 c cece ene 128 0 6 7 Wideets iene cain etd oye an otal E EET APET TAO bh bee 129 6 6 8 Widget Resources
288. s box which allows you to define active value names and scripts Active values are usefull to share data between the interface and the application to add pseudo resources to a widget to define a drag source 29 The Command Window to define a drop site e to define the resources of a new widget class to define the data members of a new C class See section 5 1 The Active Values Box and the XFaceMaker User Guide for further detail Menu Editor Opens closes the Menu Editor box for building menus interactive ly See section 5 12 The Menu Editor e FACE Debugger Opens the FACE Debugger which you can use to debug the FACE scripts that you write See section 5 8 The FACE Debugger Environment Opens the Environment window for setting environment variables See section 5 7 The Environment Box 30 The XFaceMaker Menus 4 1 6 The Options Menu C Code RDB Message Catalog UIL Print Restart on FACE Errors Preserve User Code Update Offsets on Move Use Fast Resource List Display Default Resource Values Auto Save State gt Check MS Windows Portability Figure 4 18 The Options Menu The Options Menu contains the following items C Code Pops up the C Code Options window When the Save C Code checkbut ton is set and applied in this window XFaceMaker generates a C language ver sion of the interface each time the interface is saved according to the opt
289. s the widget types DialogShell ToplevelShell ApplicationShell OverrideShell TransientShell Menu contains the widget types OptionMenu PulldownMenu CascadeButton MenuBar PopupMenu Dialog contains the widget types FileSelectionBox SelectionBox MessageBox Command Global contains the Display and Screen global objects defined by the Motif li brary Control contains the NSL Control widget types XnslJoyStick XnslBarGraph XnslIIndicator XnslMeter XnslSlider XnslStepper XnslColorBox XnslColorSe lectionBox Xns FontSelector Group contains user created Group widgets This widgetstore is initially empty unless the xfm startup file contains commands to load certain groups Only ap pears if you have defined a group User Defined contains any user defined widgets that have been linked with XFaceMaker or created with the Widget Class edit box Only appears if you have defined a widget The Toolkit Template contains any user defined templates created with the Templates com mands in the Modules menu Only appears if you have defined a template NSL contains widgets developed by NSL Only appears if you have an extended XFaceMaker NSL DrawGadgets contains the XDraw gadgets Only appears if you have an extended XFaceMaker that includes the XDraw library 43 The Command Window 4 7 The Message Area The Message area at the bottom of the Command window displays information on the state of the editor and m
290. s used This function is generally called from a widget s translation table in a FACE action script for a button press In this case the widget argument is self and the event argument is Similar to FmDragStart but the argument list is re placed by a single pixmap argument This pixmap is used to create a drag icon using XmCreateDragIcon The icon is then passed as the XmNsourcePix mapIcon argument to XmDragStart SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 338 FmDragStart C NAME FACE NAME FmStopTimeOut StopTimeOut SYNOPSIS None FmStopTimeOut TimeOutClosure TimeoutlD DESCRIPTION Stop a previously started timeout identified by the TimeoutID returned by FmCallCallbacksTimeOut FmSetActiveValueTimeOut or FmGetAc tive ValueTimeOut Before calling this function you must make sure that the time out has not al ready been triggered SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmCallCallbacksTimeOut FmGetActiveValueTimeOut FmSetActive ValueTimeOut 339 C NAME FACE NAME FmWait wait SYNOPSIS None FmWait Widget w Int delay DESCRIPTION Wait during delay milliseconds handling X events meanwhile SCOPE FACE scripts EXAMPLE Wait one second wait self 1000 SEE ALSO 340 C NAME FACE NAME FmWaitForReturn WaitForReturn SYNOPSIS String FmWaitForReturn DESCRIPTION Enter a local event handling loop until Return is called Return the value passed to Return as an ar
291. s were returned by allvalues For each pattern found in the pattern file instancing takes place as follows If the c option is not set the pattern definition is first copied to the output file The pattern definition is instantiated using each pattern description with the same name found in the description file If the pattern definition contains a conditional expression the expression is evaluated and the pattern is instantiated only if the result is non zero The pattern file is searched for an existing instance of the pattern in the pattern file If a pattern instance is found the user sections in it are recorded See the explanation on the begin user end user commands below The pattern is read line by line For each line the tokens which are equal to at tribute names in the pattern description are replaced with the attribute values Then the line is output User sections in the pattern are filled with the contents of the user sections of the existing pattern instance if any Line beginning with command keywords are processed See the list of commands below Pattern instances are enclosed within lines of the form begin lt instance name gt end lt instance name gt 178 Pattern Files Attributes of the parent pattern can be used by prefixing __ two underscore char acters to the attribute name Adding several __ prefixes goes up several levels in the
292. sage 143 The FACE Language 6 10 Floating Point Variables Single precision floating point values are implemented in FACE A floating point constant is of the form i f where i and f are decimal numbers Floating point values work as in C with the following restrictions in FACE e Only the first six arguments of a function call can be floating point values e There is no automatic conversion between floating point and integer or other values values can be explicitly converted using the FACE functions cftoi and cit of which convert a float to an integer and vice versa the definition of the con version truncating or rounding is the same as the definition of the conversion operator in C and is machine dependent e An arithmetic operator is assumed to be a floating point operator if one of its ar guments is a float but the other argument is not converted automatically to float the converter citof must be used if needed if a non float argument is passed to a float operator a parse error occurs Floating point arguments are passed correctly to functions only in the following cases m The function is declared as taking an argument of type XtRFloat with FmAt tachFunction m The argument is a floating point literal m The argument is a statically typed variable or a defined constant of type Float m The argument is a call to a function returning a float The last case makes it possible to force XFaceMaker to p
293. scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 250 C NAME FACE NAME FmCreateManagedObject none SYNOPSIS Widget FmCreateManagedObject Widget parent char object_name char sroup_name Arg args Cardinal nargs DESCRIPTION Same as FmCreateObject but the toplevel object created is mapped or man aged This function has been replaced by FmLoadCreateManagedGroup which is more efficient and offers a more consistent parameter interface SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE group 1 FmCreateManagedObject top group 1 sroup fm NULL 0 SEE ALSO FmCreateObject FmLoadCreateManagedGroup FmLoadGroup FmLoadCreateGroup 251 C NAME FACE NAME FmCreateObject none SYNOPSIS Widget FmCreateObject Widget parent char object_name char sroup_name Arg args Cardinal nargs DESCRIPTION Create an instance of the group named group_name every time this function is called The group must have been previously loaded using FmLoadGroup This function has been replaced by FmLoadCreateGroup which is more effi cient and offers a more consistent parameter interface SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE group 1 FmCreateObject top group1 group fm NULL 0 SEE ALSO FmLoadGroup FmLoadCreateGroup FmLoadCreateManagedGroup 252 C NAME FACE NAME FmCreateRectangle FmCreateRectangle SYNOPSIS XRectangle FmCreateRectangle int X int y int width int height DESCRIPTION Allocate and fill an XRectangl
294. se the default value as you would for ordinary resourc es 191 New Widget Classes 11 2 Widget Class Methods A widget class method is a function that you can call to operate on an object This section describes the various methods that can be generated for a new widget class based on a model object definition There are fourteen reserved active value names each corresponding to a method of the Core or Composite widget class When one of these active values is defined for the model object XFaceMaker generates a class method which calls the Set script of the active value For every undefined active value XFaceMaker replaces the method pointer by the appropriate XtInherit value to indicate that the method must be inher ited from the superclass The parameters passed to the methods by the X Toolkit are transmitted to the active value scripts in a structure whose address is passed as the argument The structure passed is different for each method and is explained below for each case The argu ment names are those used in the X Toolkit Intrinsics manual by the X Consortium McCormack89 The Class Method Arguments table summarizes the arguments passed to the method scripts For simple widget classes most of the methods need not be defined the inherited methods can usually be used In most cases you will only need to define the Set scripts for your new resources You can also initialize variables declare functions or register
295. sis button opens a special ized editing window for that resource To edit callback resource click on the Callbacks button e To search for a resource scroll the list or enter its name or the first few letters of its name in the Search field and press Return Or place the pointer over the list of resources and press the first letter of the resource s name The list will advance to the first resource beginning with that letter 88 The Resources Box The icons in the Resource list indicate the following bottomShadowPixmap _ foreground 23 white helpCallback Eo highlightColor Y r highlightOnEnter 7 true Unset No value is set and XFM does not know the default value Template A value inherited from a template RDB file A user defined value saved in a fm and rdb file highlightPixmap scales highlightThickness 7 0 navigationType 7 none shadowThickness 7 _ topShadow Color C Figure 5 22 The Resource List Icons XFM file A user defined value saved in a fm and fm_rdb file Default the default value You can drag and drop widgets and resource values using mouse Button 2 You may do the following operations Drag a widget to a Resources window for editing Press mouse Button 2 on the widget or on its name in the Widget Tree or List The cursor changes to a drag icon Drag the icon to a Widget Resources win dow and drop it anywhere in the window Drag a resou
296. source Types The type keyword is also used to declare a new enumerated type along with its values with the following syntax type lt type name gt lt value0 gt lt value1 gt This declares a new type caster and defines constants for every value For example type Fruit apple orange banana declares the new type caster Fruit and defines 3 constants define XfmAPPLE 0 define XfmORANGE 1 define XfmBANANA 2 In addition a new type converter is registered in the X Toolkit so that the strings ap yp g gs ap ple orange and banana can be converted to the corresponding constant The prefix of the new array can be specified like this type Fruit Xyz apple orange banana This would define the contents define XyzAPPLE 0 etc 6 7 3 Explicit Type Conversion An explicit type conversion function is available to convert a string to the type spec ified as one of the arguments ConvertString Widget w String S String target_type where w is the widget used for additional arguments if required as in the XtConvert func tion S1 is the string you want to convert 135 The FACE Language target_type is the string specifying the type you want to convert to The return type is type Any For example ConvertString w 10 Int returns the value 10 of type Any 136 Statements 6 8 Statements A FACE script is a sequence of one or more statements Each statement is eith
297. ss Pops up a special File Selector for saving the selected object and its subtree as a C class This is described in section 5 6 C Class Name Box The XFaceMaker Menus 4 1 5 The Windows Menu Widget List Widget Tree New Resource Window Close Resource Windows Active Values Menu Editor FACE Debugger Environment Figure 4 16 The Windows Menu The Windows Menu contains the following items Widget List Opens closes the Widget List box displaying the hierarchical list of widgets of the current interface in the XFaceMaker main window See section 4 5 The Widget Tree and Widget List The widget list box status can be toggled also with the List and Tree icons Widget Tree Opens closes the Widget Tree box which displays the current inter face hierarchy as a tree structure See section 4 5 The Widget Tree and Widget List The widget tree box status can be toggled also with the List and Tree icons b Figure 4 17 The List and Tree Icons New Resource Window Opens a Widget Resources editing window By default the resources of the currently selected widget are displayed in the window If no widget is selected the fields will be empty The popup menus on widgets in the Design Process also let you open a resource window and or change the current widget in the resource window Close Resource Windows Closes all open Widget Resource windows Active Values Opens closes the Active Value
298. ss is specified to the active value called name name must be an active value with global stor age If name exists already it returns 1 otherwise 0 SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmAttachValue 235 C NAME FACE NAME FmAttachFunction none SYNOPSIS None FmAttachFunction char name int func char ret_typ int nb_args char argl typ char arg2 typ ssa DESCRIPTION 236 Attach an application function address to the interface function name and provide information on the return value and parameter types so that the FACE interpreter can do type checking name is the name of the function as used in the FACE script func is the address of the function attached to it in the application ret_type is the type of the return value of the function or None nb_args is the number of arguments to the function with a maximum of twelve or zero If the number_of_arguments is given as 1 there is no ar gument checking when the function is called argl_type is the type of first argument if present arg2_type is the type of second argument if present up to nb_args Function arguments can be the basic FACE objects other function calls or arithmetic expressions The type of these arguments can be any of the valid FACE types expressed as character strings i e String Widget Point er etc When an application function is called from a FACE script the type of the arguments used in
299. ss of a FACE array that has been declared elsewhere global FaceArray a p data a SEE ALSO new_c_array new_atray 357 C NAME none SYNOPSIS None destroy FaceArray a DESCRIPTION Free array a SCOPE FACE scripts EXAMPLE Free a FACE array that has been declared elsewhere global FaceArray a destroy a SEE ALSO clear 358 FACE NAME destroy C NAME FACE NAME exit Quit SYNOPSIS None exit Int exitVal DESCRIPTION Quit the application or the interface If called in Try mode will only print a message in the Messages Box The argument exitVal will be returned to the calling program normally a Unix shell It should follow the Unix conven tions SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 359 C NAME FACE NAME none first SYNOPSIS key_type first FaceArray a key_type k DESCRIPTION Return the initial key for array a k is the key value returned if the array is empty SCOPE FACE scripts EXAMPLE Int b String new_table keyl key1 b keyl 1 key2 key2 b key2 2 String si first b 0 printf key first s n si printf first d n b si String s2 next b si 0 printf key second s n s2 printf second d n b s2 SEE ALSO next size 360 C NAME FACE NAME none new_array SYNOPSIS FaceArray new_array DESCRIPTION Create a new linear array SCOPE FACE scripts EXAMPLE Declare initialize and print th
300. t of predefined type casters in FACE is extended to all the resource types known by the XFaceMaker resource editor 7 5 Declaring Enumerated Resource Types Enumerated resource type declarations in FACE are useful mainly in the context of widget class creation with XFaceMaker As discussed above a statement such as type Tool hammer screwdriver wrench saw declares a new type caster Tool defines four constants and a new type converter is registered in the X Toolkit so that the strings hammer screwdriver wrench saw can be converted to the corresponding constants In the context of widget class creation the new resource type is also registered in XFaceMaker using the function FmAddEnumeratedType so that XFaceMaker pops the Enumeration box with the appropriate values when a resource of the new type is edited If the script is saved in a C file as a part of a new widget class then the public header file of the class will contain C constants for the values of the enumeration the C file of the class will contain a resource converter for the new resource type and the func 159 FACE in XFaceMaker tion FmAddNameWidgetClass will contain calls to register the new resource con verter and to register the new type in XFaceMaker by calling FmAddEnumeratedType In short if an enumerated type is declared in that way XFaceMaker does everything you need to use the new resource type 7 6 Structures In XFaceMaker all the st
301. tReplaceItemsPos XmListReplaceltemsPosUnselected XmListReplaceltemsUnselected XmListReplacePositions XmListSelectItem 408 C Name FACE Name XmListSelectPos XmListSelectPos XmListSetAddMode XmListSetAddMode XmListSetBottomItem XmListSetBottomltem XmListSetBottomPos XmListSetBottomPos XmListSetHorizPos XmListSetHorizPos XmListSetltem XmListSetltem XmListSetKbdItemPos XmListSetK bdItemPos XmListSetPos XmListSetPos XmListUpdateSelectedList XmListY ToPos XmMainWindowSep XmMainWindowSep2 XmMainWindowSep3 XmMainWindowSetAreas XmMapSegmentEncoding XmMenuPosition XmMessageBoxGetChild XmOptionButtonGadget XmOptionLabelGadget XmProcessTraversal XmRegisterConverters XmRegisterSegmentEncoding XmRemoveProtocolCallback XmRemoveProtocols XmRemoveTabGroup XmRepTypeAddReverse XmRepTypeGetld XmRepTypeGetNameList XmRepTypeGetRecord XmRepTypeGetRegistered XmRepTypelnstallTearO ffModelConverter XmRepTypeRegister XmListUpdateSelectedList XmListY ToPos XmMainWindowSep XmMainWindowSep2 XmMainWindowSep3 XmMainWindowSetAreas XmMapSegmentEncoding XmMenuPosition XmMessageBoxGetChild XmOptionButtonGadget XmOptionLabelGadget XmProcessTraversal XmRegisterConverters XmRegisterSegmentEncoding XmRemoveProtocolCallback XmRemoveProtocols XmRemoveTabGroup XmRepTypeAddReverse XmRepTypeGetld XmRepTypeGetNameList XmRepTypeGetRecord XmRepTypeGetRegistered XmRepTypelnstallTearOffModelConverter XmRepTypeRegister
302. ten to switch back to Build mode 37 The Command Window To put the editor into Try mode click on the Try button in the Main window the button is checked when selected To return to Build mode de select the Try button 38 The Widget Tree and Widget List 4 5 The Widget Tree and Widget List The Widget Tree and Widget List allow you to visualize the hierarchical structure of your interface and perform some editing actions You can display one or both at a time When both are displayed an arrow between them allows you to resize the dis play laterally File Edit View Modules Windows Options applicationShell0 AS menuBar0 ny A xmMainWindow0 P g menuBar0 gt dow filelabel Sal amFornd filelabel orm w sey Ki EJ xmLabel0 scroll list scroll amp list ame 2 vd popupmenu ae Sa amp Y cut copy 7 versionBoxt version Search string copyright i filename Search Current Widget applicationShe110 2mMainWindow0 mForm0 filename Ct Figure 4 22 The Widget List and Widget Tree The Widget List and Widget Tree have the following features Current File Displays the name of the current fm file Current Widget Displays the pathname of the currently selected widget or the last widget selected if more than one widget is currently selected or nothing if no widget is selected Search string A text input field used to specify the first few characters of a widget name that is
303. that defines either the size of a widget or a selection area Outline box This is the outline of a widget displayed as the widget is moved so that it can be placed correctly 1 5 Organization of This Manual Organization of This Manual This manual is organized as follows Introduction provides an overall view of this Reference Manual NSL Product Support explains how to contact us Architecture describes the dual process and error protection Command Window describes the features of the Command window Bee eo tne Editing Boxes lists the editing boxes available in XFaceMaker in alphabetical order and describes the features of each box 6 The FACE Language is a brief but comprehensive presentation of the FACE language 7 FACE in XFaceMaker describes the use of the FACE language specifically in the XFaceMaker context 8 Memory Management describes how XFaceMaker handles memory manage ment 9 Structures describes those registered or defined in XFaceMaker 10 The Genappli Utility describes the tool used to generate application files asso ciated to an interface 11 New Widget Classes describes the resources and methods available for creating new widget classes in XFaceMaker 12 Functions is an alphabetical list of FACE functions Tables listing all the func tions are located at the beginning of the chapter One table lists the functions that can be called only from the application the other lists functions that
304. the applica tion If several widgets have an active value with the same name it is possible to trig ger their scripts selectively or collectively just as it is possible to trigger the Get or Set script of all the active values associated to a given widget with one call Refer to the description of the functions Fm GetActive Value and Fm SetActiveValue Another use of active values in XFaceMaker is for the definition of new resources and callbacks when creating a widget class 157 FACE in XFaceMaker The syntax of the FACE language has the following additional constructs lt widget gt lt avname gt lt widget gt lt avname gt lt widget gt lt avname gt arg These expressions can be used in the same manner as resource references but will read write or call an active value associated with a given widget More precisely v lt widget gt lt avname gt fetches the address attached to the specified active value and associated with the specified widget possibly allocating a memory location of size sizeof XtArgVal if the active value is automatic calls the get script of the active value with the address passed as the argument and returns the con tents of the address The type of the result is the type of the active value If the active value does not exist or if it is immediate or if it is not attached and it is not automatic a FACE error occurs v lt widget gt lt avname gt fetches the address attached to
305. the call statement must agree with the typed specified when the function is attached to FACE There is no automatic or implicit type conversion in function calls It must have the same number of arguments as was specified or an error message will be given You can however prevent argument type checking by using the special types None and Any FmAttachFunction should be used when an interface is loaded by the appli cation for use in interpreted mode Functions must be attached before the in terface fragment using them is loaded SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmLoadCreate 237 C NAME FACE NAME FmAttachValue none SYNOPSIS int FmAttachValue Widget widget char name XtPointer address DESCRIPTION This function attaches an address to an active value for a given widget If wid get is NULL this is equivalent to FmAttachAv and the function returns 1 Otherwise if the active value has per widget storage the address is attached to the active value for the given widget only If the active value has global storage the address is attached globally as with FmAttachAv In both cases the return value is 2 If the active value does not exist the function does noth ing and returns 0 widget is the identifier of the widget for which the active value is being at tached for an active value with per widget storage If the active value has global storage pass NULL name is the name of the active value in
306. the current wid get Display Default Resource Values When set the default XFaceMaker tries to display the default values of the unset resources in the Resource window s re source list This means that an XtGetValues call is performed for every resource and the value is then converted to a string if possible If this option is not set de fault values are left blank for unset resources and are displayed only when the user clicks on a particular resource line and or pops the specialized resource ed itor Refreshing the resouce window is faster if this checkbutton is not set Unset this toggle if you don t need to know the value of unset resources and or if your machine is slow in refreshing the resource list Auto Save State This sub menu controls how often the trusted state of the De sign Process is saved automatically by XFaceMaker The default is every minute Selecting never diables the auto save mechanism In that case the Design Pro The XFaceMaker Menus cess state is only saved when the user switches to Try mode Never Every 30 seconds Every minute Every 5 minutes Figure 4 19 The Auto Save State Cascade Menu Check MS Windows Portability When this checkbutton is set XFaceMaker will verify each resource setting within the interface being loaded or edited for Win dows compatibility When a resource that XFaceMaker finds a resource setting that it will not be able to translate to Windows code an error
307. the function s C name or its FACE name if there is no C equivalent There are two tables at the beginning of the chapter one listing functions that can only be called from a C program the other listing those that can be called from either a C program or from a FACE script For each function the type of the return value and of the arguments is given by the function prototype Any function that can be called from a FACE script is shown with the FACE return type e g Int Pointer etc Functions that can only be called from C programs are shown with their C return type e g int void char etc The C prototype of each function is declared in the Fm h include file All Motif functions can be called from FACE scripts provided their arguments can be represented with FACE types See your Motif Reference Manual for a description of the Motif functions A complete list of the Motif functions is found in the Appen dix The Xt functions that can be called from FACE scripts are listed in Table 12 2 and in the Appendix Refer to your Xt Intrinsics Reference Manual for a description of the Xt functions 203 12 1 The Application Only Functions Table The table on the next page lists the functions that can only be called by the applica tion and cannot be called in a FACE script together with the libraries in which they can be found An x indicates that the library contains the function Cname is the name of the function Fm the libFm
308. the interface address is the address of the application variable associated to the active val ue if immediate storage is not used If immediate storage is used address is the contents of the active value address will be passed as the read only variable to the active value s set or get scripts SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 238 FmAttachAv C NAME FmBeep SYNOPSIS None FmBeep DESCRIPTION Produce a sound Calls XBell SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FACE NAME Beep 239 C NAME FACE NAME FmCallCallbacksTimeOut CallCallbacksTimeOut SYNOPSIS Pointer FmCallCallbacksTimeOut Widget w String callback Int interval DESCRIPTION Initialize a timeout callback is called in interval milliseconds by XtCallCallbacks widget callback caddr_t 0 Returns a pointer to a timeout identifier TimeoutID The timeout can be stopped with StopTimeOut Pointer TimeoutID SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Initiate a process in the create callback of the parent of a pushbutton continue it in the pushbutton s activateCallback Stop when i reaches 9 The process raises label widgets successively xfmCreateCallback global iter global buf iter 0 buf malloc 10 sprintf buf Label0_ d iter iter iter 1 w XtNameToWidget self buf RaiseWidget w CallCallbacksTimeOut self pb activateCallback 2000 activateCallback global iter global buf
309. ting state stored in XFaceMaker server 383 Command Line Options 13 1 6 Application Generation Options applifiles lt name gt appliFiles List of application files to generate cleanappli cleanAppliFiles Generate clean application files without code preservation information cpattfiles lt files gt cPattFiles This option is reserved for future use genappli generateAppliFiles Generate application files onlygen onlyGen Generate application file template only use with genappli preserve cleanAppliFiles Generate application files with code preservation in formation target lt Target gt targetEnvironment This option is used to specify the environ ment for whichthe interface and the application files are to be generated e g Windows 13 1 7 Debug Options debugface debugFace Enable debugging of FACE scripts nodebugface debugFace disable debugging of FACE scripts dumpcore dumpcore Cause a core dump on receipt of signal 11 By default XFaceMaker will exit without producing the file core on receipt of signal 11 synchronous synchronous Standard X client debug flag verbose verbose Print messages during execution 13 1 8 XFaceMaker Extension Options extensions lt ext gt lt ext2 gt Specifies FACE extension description files to load at startup extlib lt ibrary name gt Used with the gen option to generate the source files of an extension
310. tinues without stopping at each instruction Help pops up a help text box 72 The File Selector 5 9 The File Selector The File Selector is used to select or specify file names when you want to open a file Open save a file under a new name Save as append a file to the current file Read or whenever a filename is needed t sunos demos xfm Examples Adder fn Directories Files n Examp les Adder Examples Adder Adderav fm AdderInt fm 7 J n J Li XFaceMaker file to read ok rier Cancel Hep Figure 5 13 The File Selector The File Selector box has the following fields Filter This text field displays and lets you edit the directory mask used to select the files to be displayed Directories Lists the sub directories of the current directory Files Lists the files contained in the current directory Clicking on a name in this list puts it into the Selection field text input field Used to edit the pathname of the current file OK Reads or writes the file specified in the Selection field Filter Applies the directory mask and updates the sub directories and file lists ac cordingly Cancel Closes the File Selector box without executing a command 73 The Editing Boxes 5 10 The Group Name Box The Group Name Box lists the group widgets that are currently loaded in XFaceMak er You can select one from the Groups list or enter the name of
311. troke To clear the field clear the text field next to it text Displays a text description of the accelerator for the menu item being edited This is the text appended to the button label when an accelerator is defined for the button Callbacks XmPushButton XmToggleButton PulldownMenu This field consists of three items m Arrow button Can be toggled to display the available callbacks for the se lected menu item m A text field Displays the beginning of the callback specified m Ellipsis button Pops up the Script Editor box for editing callbacks The available callbacks are e activate XmPushButton PulldownMenu The XmNactivateCallback resource e arm XmPushButton XmToggleButton The XmNarmCallback resource disarm XmPushButton XmToggleButton The XmNdisarmCallback resource e value changed XmToggleButton The XmNvalueChangedCallback resource e cascading PulldownMenu The XmNeascadingCallback resource Separator Type XmSeparator Contains a set of line types for the separator corre sponding to the XmNseparatorType resource Each line has the name of the sep arator and an example 78 The Menu Editor 5 12 3 The Pushbuttons The buttons on the bottom of the window provide overall control of the dialog box and work as follows Close Closes the window Clear Replaces the values you are editing with those of the previous menu item ed ited Add Adds a menu item according to the contents of the
312. ttern 177 user 179 Boolean box 97 breakpoint 351 breakpoints 71 buffers 165 bufferSize 377 bufsize 377 build 379 build 379 Build mode 37 using mouse buttons 4 C C code ANSI C 62 compile commands 380 K amp R 62 library 393 save options 31 61 standalone 381 C Code Options box 61 c 380 C class 53 defining 28 members 46 C class file box 67 416 C classes the genappli utility 175 c file 380 c header 380 ct lib 380 c name 380 call data 142 callback resources 155 callbacks in Eval scripts 114 in FACE 126 154 in menus 78 in new classes 188 in XFM 155 scripts 156 CallCallbacksTimeOut 240 callEditor 377 378 calleditor 377 CallEditor 242 266 385 catgets 246 cbtoi 352 cfile 380 cfile 380 cflags 380 cflags 380 382 cftoi 353 Change Directory 20 ChangeManaged method 200 Check MS Windows Portability 33 children 390 in pattern files 176 cinclude 380 cinclude 380 citof 354 class methods 192 AcceptFocus 198 ChangeManaged 200 ClassInitialize 194 DeleteChild 200 Destroy 197 DisplayAccelerators 199 Expose method 197 GeometryManager 199 GetValuesHook 196 Initialize 194 InsertChild 200 QueryGeometry 199 Realize 198 Resize Method 196 SetValues 195 SetValuesAlmost 198 Class Name 66 Class Name box 66 Class Prefix 62 class record 201 classes 377 classes 28 active value resources 189 190 class record 201 loading saving editing 28
313. ture in a FACE script You can also declare a structure in a FACE script with this syntax struct lt struct name gt lt c struct name gt lt field type gt lt field name gt 3 For structures declared in FACE scripts all fields have a size of one FACE word The C pointer type c struct name is optional If it is specified it must be defined in a header file included in the C file generated by XFaceMaker using the cinclude op tion 6 12 3 Declaring Structure Variables Variables which are to hold a structure pointer must be declared with the type of the structure and can be used as ordinary statically typed variables For example in the activateCallback of a push button write XmPushButtonCallback cbs cbs 153 The FACE Language 6 12 4 Referencing Structure Fields The fields of a structure are accessed using the gt operator The resulting value has the type of the field as declared in the structure descriptor XmPushButtonCallback cbs cbs printf clicks d n cbs gt click_count cbs gt click_count 0 In general to use callback structures use XmxxxCallback and not XmxxxCCall backStructPtr 6 12 5 Allocating Structures A new structure can be allocated in a FACE script using the function new_ struct which takes the name of the structure as parameter struct MyStruct Int i String s j MyStruct ms new_struct MyStruct ms gt i 1 ms gt s Hello Structures
314. ub pattern ERR_STOP 120 generation stopped ERR NO WHILE 121 Jend while without a begin ERR VARIABLE STACK BO 122 variable stack bottom reached too many __ s T ERR FATAL SIGNAL 123 fatal signal caught 185 The Genappli Utility To determine which pattern files you are using proceed as follows 1 If the Preserve User Code toggle is set and you have already saved your appli cation files once check these There is a good probability that you have made a mistake when adding your code 2 If the toggle is not set or if you have not yet generated any application files for the current interface examine the pattern files that are in the GenAppli directory under 1 The current XFaceMaker directory 2 Your HOME directory 3 The directory NSLHOME lib xfim 186 CHAPTER 11 New Widget Classes XFaceMaker enables you to define entirely new classes of widgets which inherit much of the behavior of existing classes but to which you can add resources and or functions for your own special purposes You can create the new class e statically by generating a C code file containing the source code for the new class dynamically by creating the new class while running XFaceMaker This enables you to instantiate and test the new class immediately This chapter describes the resources and methods for new widget classes Generating a new class is described in the Chapter entitled New Widget Classes in the
315. ues Widget w Int num_resources String resource None valuel String resource2 None value2 fn DESCRIPTION Set multiple resource values in one call to XtSetValues num_resources specifies the number of resources to be set A maximum of 5 resources can be set simultaneously resource is the name of the first resource value is the value to which it will be set The values must be given in their internal form not in their String form The internal form of a resource can be obtained by using ConvertString SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE Set the resources for the scale widget in a float resource editing box SetValues parent scale 3 minimum cftoi min 100 0 maximum cftoi max 100 0 value cftoi v 100 0 SEE ALSO ConvertString XtSetValue 217 C NAME FACE NAME FaceStopTimer stop_timer SYNOPSIS void FaceStopTimer Timer timer DESCRIPTION Stop a timer started by FaceInitTimer FaceStopTimer is not available in the library libFm_c a timer is the timer returned from the call to FaceInitTimer for the timer you want to stop SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FacelnitTimer 218 C NAME FACE NAME FmAddArg FmAddArg SYNOPSIS None FmAddArg FmArgList list String name None value DESCRIPTION Add an argument to an argument list list is a list of arguments created with FmNewArgList name is a resource name value is the value of the resource
316. unction Widget MySelfQ w MySelf PB2 the call to MySelf in widget PB2 returns PB2 not PB1 142 FACE Functions 6 9 2 Declaration of Application Functions Application functions are not known to FACE until the application is linked with the interface as a consequence any reference to an application function in a script gen erates an error message To avoid this you can declare your application functions using the keyword function The syntax is function ret_typ fun_name typ_argl typ_arg2 val where ret_type is the type of the value returned by the function fun_name is the name of the function typ_argl is the type of the first argument type_arg2 is the type of the second argument further argument types up to eleven val is an optional argument giving the value to be returned during simulations Example function Int my_fun Widget Int String 1 declares the function my_fun which returns an Int whose value during simulations is l In principle such a function need be declared only once the first time it is referred to When in doubt as to the order in which scripts are analyzed you can insert the declaration before each reference to the function FACE functions can also be declared as global global function None Hello String message Global FACE functions differ from non global functions only in the way their are output in the generated C code printf Hello s n mes
317. ur class are called regardless of the creation arguments passed by the application to XtCreate Widget 195 New Widget Classes Calling the new resource s Set scripts both at Initialize and SetValues time ensures a homogenous behavior of the new resource it is better if setting a resource at the creation of the widget and changing it by SetValues has the same effect However it is possible to differentiate the two cases by testing the 2 argument The SetValues procedure always calls the Set script of a resource even if the re source value has not actually changed You can test that a resource value has really changed using the arguments passed to the Set script in order to avoid performing any useless side effects A simple way to do this is to start the Set script with the fol lowing if 2 amp amp 1 return This ensures that the value is processed at initialization time 2 0 and that the new value is different from the old value 1 The SetValues method always returns False meaning do not redisplay Widget classes wishing to be redisplayed when a resource is changed should explicitly call a C function which clears the wid get s window causing a redisplay 11 2 5 The GetValuesHook Method The GetValuesHook procedure is called when XtGetValues is invoked on the wid get For every resource of the new widget class that was specified by the caller of XtGetValues it performs the following e fetch
318. ur scripts are OK See also nowarnings uil uil Compile a fm file to create a UIL file If a C code file is generated at the same time all widget references are resolved dynamically The Cfile generated contains all the scripts and none of the interface description which is in the UIL file uildialogs uildialogs Causes XFaceMaker to generate predefined combinations of objects called Dialogs in the UIL file Can only be used in conjunction with the uil option Option Cmd Line Option cflags Use with I Creation function compile 2 Generate widget class g I 3 Class prefix cprefix lt Prefix gt 2 4 Creation name cname lt Name gt l 5 Include file cinclude lt Text gt 1 6 K amp RC k 1 T ANSI C default C 1 8 Use resource database T 1 9 Use XtSetArg for all resources default c 1 10 Use XtVaCreateWidget v 1 11 Convert resources after creation s 9 Only 12 Convert Pixmaps after creation p 9 Only 13 Create XmStrings x 9 Only 14 5 creation arguments allowed default 10 Only 15 20 creation arguments allowed m 10 Only 16 100 creation arguments allowed M 10 Only 17 Store Widgets in static variables I I 18 Store Widgets in allocated array default a 1 19 Store Widgets in extern variables G 20 Use Fm c library default 1 21 Standalone C stande S 1 22 Install WM Close Handler instclose 1 1 23 Dynamic Widget
319. ution character of B for the XWD file image_name If found the pixmap is installed and the Pixmap returned if not the value XmUNSPECIFIED_PIXMAP is returned SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmGetPixmap 277 C NAME FACE NAME FmGetFunctionsVector none SYNOPSIS FmFunctionsVector FmGetFunctionsVector DESCRIPTION Register a new widget class without directly referencing Fm functions This function returns a structure containing pointers to XFaceMaker functions used to register new widget classes When this function is used the Fm func tions are referenced through function pointers rather than directly by the ob ject file of the class so that applications using the widget need not be linked with the Fm_c library SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE FmAddFooWidgetClass FmGetFunctionsVector SEE ALSO FmAddWidgetClass 278 C NAME FACE NAME FmGetPixmap FmGetPixmap SYNOPSIS Pixmap FmGetPixmap Widget w char image_name DESCRIPTION Get the screen foreground and background resources for Widget w and call XmGetPixmap SCOPE Application FACE scripts EXAMPLE parent PB labelType pixmap parent PB labelPixmap FmGetPixmap self scales SEE ALSO FmGetColorPixmap 279 C NAME FACE NAME FmGetString GetString SYNOPSIS String FmGetString XmString str DESCRIPTION Return an ordinary zero terminated character string equal to the text contained within the XmString str assuming XmSTRING DEFA
320. ve Appli Files Menu 0 0000 0 17 The Extensions Selection Box 0 000 005 19 The Design Process Menu 0 000 e eee eeee 19 The Restart Design Process Box 0 000 0 ee 20 The Print Menu e Asse S44 Soe ae ad MS 21 The Edit Ment ost sa5 sh vais pha sles Malena eale pe wakes 22 The Template Menu 0 0 0 cece eee ee 23 The Template Name Box 00 c eee eee eee 24 The Edit Appli Files Menu 000 002 00 25 The View Menu ceecee 06 son need ee een eee ka ewes 25 The View Cascade Menu 00 c eee eens 26 The Modules Menu 00 00 0 cece eee ee 27 The Templates and Classes Cascade Menu 27 The Windows Menu 0 0 0 e eee eee eens 29 The List and Tree Icons 00 0c eee eee eee 29 The Options Menu 00 2 cece cee eee 31 The Auto Save State Cascade Menu 33 The Help Menw sc s cce ec eck ech ee be i inoi didat 34 The Edit Display Icons 0 0 0 e ce eee eee 35 The Widget List and Widget Tree 39 The Lo0Mkit ss 2 4 9 Go eat Be eet nig bee Se 41 The Message Sections irori ogor roven cece eens 44 The Message Icons 000 e cece eee eee eee 44 Interface Active Values 00 00 c cece eee eee 47 Drag SOURCE si dict dt le dt Alp ta elt seats edie s 49 Drop Site cea sb 6i5 ere ce ee eek oi a et ea wee 50 Widget Clas Sres nny Maaweawhe oe Sye pies dea S
321. ved as visible The parameters are the same as those described above for FmLoadCreate Unlike FmLoad if the interface contains several main shells only the first one will be loaded and created SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmLoadCreateManagedGroup 302 C NAME FACE NAME FmLoadCreateManaged none SYNOPSIS Widget FmLoadCreateManaged char name char filename Widget parent Arg args Cardinal nargs DESCRIPTION Same as FmLoadCreate but the top level object created is managed or mapped even if the interface is saved as hidden Unlike FmLoad if the inter face contains several main shells only the first one will be loaded and created SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmLoad FmLoadCreate FmLoadCreateManagedGroup 303 C NAME FACE NAME FmLoadCreateManagedGroup none SYNOPSIS Widget FmLoadCreateManagedGroup char name char filename Widget parent Arg args Cardinal nargs DESCRIPTION Same as FmLoadCreateGroup but the top level object created is managed or mapped even if it was saved as hidden Unlike FmLoad if the interface con tains several main shells only the first one will be loaded and created SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmLoadGroup FmLoadCreateGroup 304 C NAME FACE NAME FmLoadGroup LoadGroup SYNOPSIS int FmLoadGroup char group_name char group_file DESCRIPTION Load a widget group from the interface file group_file The group is na
322. veral widgets at once or to the whole interface by using the Edit menu item Auto Pos Size w and h Indicate the size of the current widget in pixels The w parameter gives the width of a widget along the x axis and the h parameter its height along the y axis The previously described Auto size option may override these fields Measure ments always reflect the actual values on the screen Thus if you select a widget and move or resize it with the mouse these values are updated automatically You can also type in new values and apply them to the widget Remember that monitors vary in size Common monitor dimensions are about 1200 pixels in width and 1000 in height A Sun 19 inch monitor is 1152 by 900 pixels while a PC screen may only have a resolution of 1024 by 768pixels There is no 3 d shadowing here when Auto size is set Popup Indicates if the widget is a PopupShell In most interfaces any Shell widget which is not the interface s ApplicationShell is a PopupShell and XFaceMaker will set this flag by default Because the Xt Toolkit allows the creation of toplevel shells that are not Popup this possibility has been implemented in XFaceMaker However we recommend that this flag is never changed Gadget When this is set and applied XFaceMaker uses the equivalent gadget ver sion of the current widget if available Some widget resources are not accessible to gadgets XFaceMaker refuses to change a widget which uses such a resource
323. w restricted resources Setting this option displays any restricted resources These are resources that cannot be changed in XFaceMaker such as colormap numChildren screen or template resources OK Applies the choices and re opens the Resource List Cancel Returns to the Resource List without applying a choice Set Default Make your sort and display choices the default case for any new Re source windows you open by clicking on this button 96 The Resource Edit Boxes 5 17 The Resource Edit Boxes 5 17 1 The Boolean Box The Boolean box is used to set a resource value to True or False When you are ed iting a resource that requires a boolean value you can open this box by clicking on the ellipsis next to the resource AS BB minRC La Class scm abel Templates StandardFgColor W Current selection Resource recomputeSize True lt False OK Rebuild Set Values Set Cancel T T Figure 5 28 The Boolean Box The Boolean box has the following fields True False Used to specify the resource value OK Applies the specified value to the resource and returns to the main Resource win dow Rebuild Applies the changes by rebuilding and remains in the editor Set Values Applies the changes by setting values and remains in the editor Cancel Returns to the Resource window without changing the value Set Updates the value in the Resources list but does not apply it 97
324. which subtrees of the Widget Tree you see You can use the Widget Tree to select widgets or gadgets to change a widget s name to reorder siblings change their creation order and to specify where in the hierarchy you wish to add a widget Open close the box by clicking on the Widget Tree item in the Windows menu or by toggling the Widget tree display icon You can print the Widget Tree of your interface with the Print button in the File menu 40 The Toolkit 4 6 The Toolkit The Toolkit gives you access to the widgets used to build an interface Widgets are grouped by kind in widgetstores When a widgetstore is open its class category is displayed and each of its widgets is represented by an icon When you move the pointer over an icon the widget s class name is displayed to the left of the widget store Use the arrow buttons to the right of the Toolkit to view icons that are not im mediately visible XFaceMaker 3 5 OSF Motif 1 2 File Edit View Modules Windows Options Shell Composite applicationShel10 enuBar 0 aes xmMainWindow0 Primitive ae filelabel Menu zmForm0 filelabel Dialog epee Global xmLabel0 scroll list Controls scroll list aua User Defined popupnenu ok Templates EENS Search string versionBoxt version Wal Filenane Search FL Current Widget applicationShe110 smMainWindow0 mForm0 filename Toolkit Composite Primitive Control
325. which the topmost widget will become a child If parent is NULL and the topmost widget is not an ApplicationShell then the instance is created as a child of the default ApplicationShell re turned by FmInitialize However it is better to do this explicitly as shown in the examples above args nargs are additional resource values that will be passed to XtCreate Widget at the creation of the topmost widget args and nargs override any values specified within the fm file Typically these are used to specify the position and size of the instance You should pass NULL and 0 if you do not want to change any resources FmLoadCreate always reads in the specified fm file and creates the widget hierarchy each time it is called It does not save an internal description in memory and should therefore be used whenever a widget hierarchy is to be created only once SCOPE Application only EXAMPLE SEE ALSO FmLoad FmLoadCreateManaged FmLoadCreateManagedGroup 301 C NAME FACE NAME FmLoadCreateGroup none SYNOPSIS Widget FmLoadCreateGroup char name char filename Widget parent Arg args Cardinal nargs DESCRIPTION Checks if the fm file filename is already loaded and if not loads it by calling FmLoadGroup name filename Then an instance of the group is created as a child of parent using the creation arguments specified by args and nargs The toplevel object created is returned Does not manage the group even if it was sa
326. widget tree of the interface currently loaded Print options defined in the Print Options box have no effect on this command Exit Exits from XFaceMaker If you have not saved your work since the last time you made a change an alert box will warn you 21 The Command Window 4 1 2 The Edit Menu Undo au cut x Copy c Paste cP Duplicate D Track Name Delete K Gadget UnGadget Auto Pos Size Un Auto Pos Size Apply Template gt Unapply Template gt ARachments Edit Appli Files b Figure 4 8 The Edit Menu The Edit Menu contains the following items 22 Undo Undoes the effect of the immediately preceding edit command When there is no command to undo this line is dimmed to provide the visual cue that clicking in it will have no effect Cut Cuts the current widget selection from the interface and places it in the wid get cut buffer These widgets can be retrieved from the widget cut buffer with the Paste command Copy Copies the current widget selection and places it in the widget cut buffer These widgets can be retrieved from the widget cut buffer by means of the Paste command Paste Pastes the contents of the widget cut buffer at the designated point in the interface Or using the Widget Tree or the Widget List at the specified place in the widget hierarchy Duplicate Duplicates the current selection and places an exact copy slightly to the right and below the original The selection is
327. will be generated when the interface is saved See section 5 20 UIL Options and the XFaceMaker Us er 5 Guide for further detail Print Pops up the Print Options box for specifying how PostScript files will be generated for printing an interface window See section 5 14 The Print Options Box Restart on FACE Errors When set indicated by a checkbutton the Design pro cess will be restarted when an error is encountered in a FACE script In that case the Command Prompt window is popped up allowing you to re launch the De sign process See section 3 1 Error Protection and the XFaceMake User s Guide Preserve User Code When set indicated by a checkbutton the pattern informa tion is kept as comments in the application files generated by XFaceMaker This makes it possible to modify and later re generate the application files See the section on Modifying Application Files in the XFaceMaker User s Guide Update Offsets on Move When set the offsets of a widget that is attached child of an XmForm will be updated when the widget is moved If this checkbutton is not set XFaceMaker will not let you move the widget interactively Use Fast Resource List When set any new Resource windows you open will be displayed with the Fast list of resources that is without icons without the pop up men and without the resource drag and drop capability Use this option if your machine is slow in refreshing the resource list when you change
328. world Awakening he said Hello world Awakening he said Hello world Awakening he said Hello world 6 6 4 Variables Variable names are composed of letters and digits They must start with a letter and are case sensitive Thus X and x do not refer to the same variable All FACE vari ables have the same size that of a word or pointer i e the size of an Xt Toolkit XtArgVal whatever their type For example a char variable which would normally occupy a byte is converted if necessary to an integer the size of a word There are local and global variables Local variables are known only in the script in which they appear Thus a local variable may be known in the script of one callback resource but not in another even of the same widget You need not declare local vari ables They are automatically declared the first time they are used Message Warning Not found Size 10 Here the variable Message has been declared implicitly the first time it has been set It is of type String The variable Size is also implicitly declared when first used and is of type Int Variables may be declared anywhere in the script as long as they are not used before they are declared It is possible to declare a local variable explicitly if it must be used before it is first set Local variables are declared using the local keyword local i 125 The FACE Language This declares a local variable name
329. ximum number of arguments in a FACE function call If the list contains less than twelve widgets you must put a null widget Widget NULL after the last widget SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 343 C NAME FACE NAME FmWidgetName WidgetName SYNOPSIS String FmWidgetName Widget widget DESCRIPTION Return the name of widget widget The string is returned in a static buffer and should not be freed SCOPE FACE scripts application EXAMPLE SEE ALSO 344 C NAME FACE NAME FmWriteValue none SYNOPSIS int FmWrite Value Widget widget char av_name XtArgVal value String type DESCRIPTION This function fetches the address attached to the specified active value av_name and associated with the specified widget widget possibly allocating a memory location of size sizeof XtArgVal if the active value is automatic converts value to the type of the active value if value is of type String stores value as the contents of the active value address and calls the set script of the active value with the address passed as the argument If it succeeds the function returns 1 If the active value does not exist or if it is not attached and it is not automatic the function returns 0 If it is immediate or if widget is null or if the value cannot be converted to the active value type the function returns 1 Calling this function is similar to executing an instruction of the form lt widget gt lt name gt v
330. xisting types 225 Table 12 3 Predefined Resource Types Type G A Avname Boxname Enumeration 1st o Accelerator Table OJS Translation Translations 0 Table Alignment W I Enumeration Enumeration alignment_beginning 0 AnimationStyle W I Enumeration Enumeration drag_under_none 0 ArrowDirection W I Enumeration Enumeration arrow_up 0 Attachment W I Enumeration Enumeration attach_none 0 AudibleWarning W I Enumeration Enumeration none 0 Bitmap O S image Images 0 BlendModel W I Enumeration Enumeration blend_all 0 Bool W I Boolean Boolean 0 Boolean W I Boolean Boolean 0 BooleanDimension W I Positivelnt Integer 0 Callback OJS JO TextEdit 0 Cardinal W I Positivelnt Integer 0 ChildHorizontalAlignment W I Enumeration Enumeration alignment_beginning 0 ChildPlacement W I Enumeration Enumeration place_top 0 ChildType W I Enumeration Enumeration frame_generic_child 0 ChildVerticalAlignment W I Enumeration Enumeration alignment_baseline_top 0 CommandWindowLocation W Enumeration Enumeration command_above_works 0 pace Cursor OIS String String 0 DefaultButtonType W I Enumeration Enumeration dialog_none 0 DeleteResponse W I Enumeration Enumeration destroy 0 DialogType W I Enumeration Enumeration dialog_template 0 DialogStyle W I Enumeration Enumeration dialog_modeless 0 Dimens
331. xtFieldPosToXY XmTextFieldRemove XmTextFieldReplace XmTextFieldReplaceWcs XmTextFieldSetAddMode XmTextFieldSetCursorPosition XmTextFieldSetEditable XmTextFieldSetHighlight XmTextFieldSetInsertionPosition XmTextFieldSetMaxLength XmTextFieldSetSelection XmTextFieldSetString XmTextFieldSetStringWes XmTextFieldShowPosition XmTextFieldXY ToPos XmTextFindString XmTextFindString Wes XmTextGetAddMode XmTextGetBaseline XmTextGetCursorPosition XmTextGetEditable XmTextGetInsertionPosition XmTextGetLastPosition XmTextGetMaxLength XmTextGetSelection XmTextFieldGetString XmTextFieldGetStringWcs XmTextFieldGetSubstring XmTextFieldGetSubstringWcs XmTextFieldInsert XmTextFieldInsertWes XmTextFieldPaste XmTextFieldPosToXY XmTextFieldRemove XmTextFieldReplace XmTextFieldReplaceWcs XmTextFieldSetAddMode XmTextFieldSetCursorPosition XmTextFieldSetEditable XmTextFieldSetHighlight XmTextFieldSetInsertionPosition XmTextFieldSetMaxLength XmTextFieldSetSelection XmTextFieldSetString XmTextFieldSetStringWces XmTextFieldShowPosition XmTextFieldXYToPos XmTextFindString XmTextFindString Wes XmTextGetAddMode XmTextGetBaseline XmTextGetCursorPosition XmTextGetEditable XmTextGetInsertionPosition XmTextGetLastPosition XmTextGetMaxLength XmTextGetSelection 412 C Name FACE Name XmTextGetSelectionPosition XmTextGetSelectionWcs XmTextGetSource XmTextGetString XmTextGetStringWes XmTextGetSubstring XmTextGetSubstri
332. xtGetSelection returns a copy of the primary selection However any function which returns an XmString returns a pointer to a copy which should be freed using StringFree when no longer needed whereas functions returning an XmStringTable do not return a copy and the pointer returned should not be freed 8 5 Creating and Destroying Widgets A further important case of memory usage although not strictly related to FACE is widget creation and destruction Because of various bugs in the X and Motif toolkits the memory allocated when creating a widget instance may not be completely freed by a call to Destroy Widget XtDestroy Widget Destruction of widgets should there fore be minimized it is in fact much faster to unmap and map a widget when re quired 167 Memory Management 168 CHAPTER 9 Structures This chapter describes some of the structures registered or defined in XFaceMaker All the Motif callback structures are registered The table below lists the names of structures in FACE corresponding to the Motif structure names Two structures are defined in FACE for data transfer control in Drag and Drop the FmConvertProcStruct and the FmTransferProcStruct These provide callback infor mation regarding the data being transferred The variable names you should use to access some of the fields in the XEvent struc tures for ClientMessage events and KeymapNotify events are provided in section 9 2 Table 9 1 Stru
333. y rebuilding and remains in the editor Set Values Applies the changes by setting the values and remains in the editor Cancel Returns to the main Resource window without changing the value Set Updates the value in the Resources list but does not apply it 60 C Code Options 5 4 C Code Options The C Code Options box is used to set options for generating C code All these op tions have a corresponding command line option L Save C code Save As Creation Name Include File Type of C Code Supported By widget gt class VY K amp R classic ANSI Fm_c library Q stand alone C J Install WM close handler LJ Dynamic widget references Initialize Resources Using Store Widgets In lt gt static variables Q extem variables array xtSetarg resource database vy amp tVaCreateWidget L Convert resources after creation L Convert pixmaps after creation _ Create XmStrings Command xfm Reset Default Help Figure 5 8 The C Code Options Box The C Code Options box has the following fields Save C code When this checkbutton is set and applied XFaceMaker will generate a C language version of your interface whenever you save The following options are available Save As widget Compiles the current interface into a single creation function that can be called to create the interface that is FmCreate lt Name gt The default value for Name is the bas
334. y that children are managed first compatibility with v2 1 revision revision Print revision number for this release of XFaceMaker 13 1 2 Environment Options appclass lt application shell name gt applicationClassName Specify XFaceMak er s default application shell class name Defaults to XfmApplication if not spec ified autoplace lt true false gt autoPlace Specify automatic interactive placement of XFM windows bufsize lt number gt bufferSize Specify size of internal buffer used to display re sources scripts etc calleditor callEditor Call the FmCallEditor function when entering FmLoop classes lt classes gt startupClasses Specify classes to load at startup as a comma separated list of classes The syntax is Class1 Classfile1 fm Class2 Classfile2 fm If the name of the fm file is the same as that of the class you can specify Class 377 Command Line Options only For example to load classes Cll and C12 you could specify C11 C11 fm C12 C12 fm or just C11 C12 coloricons lt true false gt colorIcons On color screens specify whether to use not use color icons in the XFaceMaker windows defaultnames lt names gt defaultNames Specify default object names template Specify a comma separated list of default object names e g XmBulletin Board BB XmPushButton PB display lt displayname 0 0 gt display Standard X client option specifies the dis play to be used M
335. ype Selector box Choose a type from the list or enter one in the Re source type text field then click OK Value Enter a default value for the new resource being defined in the Value field Or click on the ellipsis to open an editing window for that type of resource Enter a value then click on the Add button Or click on the List button to return to the Active Values box without specifying a value Methods Pops up a list of methods available for your widget class You can select a method name from the list or enter a name directly in the text field of the Meth od Selector box Then click the OK button See Chapter 11 New Widget Classes for details on class methods and defining re sources for a widget class 52 The Active Values Box 5 1 5 C Class An active value whose usage is set as C class is a member of the C class gen erated in connection with the widget YFaceNaker Active Values Usage Q interface Q drag source Q drop site Q widget class C class Members Type 3 w Value SSS on Member Kind data lt gt function J Generate access functions Access public protected Q private Get Script Custom Editor Clear E PF Member Name i Ana Repiace petete ELC Set Script Custom Editor Clear Figure 5 5 C Class Member Name Enter the name of the member here Members This box disp

XFaceMaker/UIMS Reference Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents